Adjustable
Frequency AC
Drive
FRN 1.xx - 6.xx
User Manual
www.abpowerflex.com
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of
electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation
and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your
local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/literature) describes some important differences
between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because
of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state
equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy
themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or
consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative
purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any
particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of
information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written
permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety
considerations.
Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and
understanding of the product.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, and PowerFlex are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances
that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may
lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances
that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic
loss. Attentions help you:
• identify a hazard
• avoid the hazard
• recognize the consequences
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g.,
drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g.,
drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous
temperatures.
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40
User Manual since the August 2008 release.
Manual Updates
The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40
User Manual since the April 2008 release.
Manual Updates
Parameter Updates
The following parameters have been updated with firmware version 6.xx.
Description of New or Updated Information Page(s)
Minimum Enclosure Volume column and new footnotes added. 1-9, A-2
Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings topic updated. A-1
Electronic Motor Overload Protection description updated. A-4
Description of New or Updated Information Page(s)
Description of A056 revised. 3-17
Description of A059/A062 revised. 3-19
Fault description for F3 revised. 4-3
A table row for electrical specifications added. A-4
Graphic for the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-1
Second last paragraph in the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-2
Text in the “Writing (06) Logic Command Data” section revised. C-4
Frequency source for logic command 001 of bits 14, 13, and 12 corrected. C-4
Text in the “Writing (06) Reference” section revised. C-5
Parameter Number Description Page
[Relay Out Sel] A055 Function of option 20, ParamControl,
changed.
Option 24, MsgControl, added.
3-16
[Relay Out Sel] A058, A061 Function of option 20, ParamControl,
changed.
Option 24, MsgControl, added.
3-18
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
soc-2
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40
User Manual since the January 2007 release.
Manual Updates
New Parameter
The following parameter has been added with firmware version 5.xx.
Parameter Updates
The following parameters have been updated with firmware version 5.xx.
Description of New or Updated Information Page(s)
Input description and attention text for Multiple Digital Input Connection
example corrected.
1-22
New method of changing speed reference for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated
drives described.
2-2
Description for Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys revised. 2-4
Fault description for F3 revised. 4-3
Graphic for the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-1
Descriptions for bits 6, 7, and 15 of register address 8192 (Logic Command)
updated.
C-4
New information on reading register address 8192 added. C-4
New information on reading register address 8193 added. C-5
Graphic for the “Connecting an RS-485 Network” section corrected. D-4
New method for inverting sign of PID error added. F-6
Parameter Number Description Page
[PID Invert Error] A167 New 3-44
Parameter Number Description Page
[Control Source] d012 Options 7 and 8 added. 3-5
[Start Source] P036 Description revised for option 6. 3-10
[Relay Out Sel] A055 Description revised for option 20. 3-16
[Relay Out Level] A056 Description revised. 3-17
[Opto Outx Sel] A058, A061 Description revised for option 20. 3-18
[Opto Outx Level] A059, A062 Description revised. 3-19
[Internal Freq] A069 Default value for IP66, NEMA/
UL Type 4X drives is 0.0 Hz.
Default value for IP20 rated drives is
60.0 Hz.
3-22
[PID Trim Hi] A130 Description revised. 3-38
[PID Trim Lo] A131 Description revised. 3-38
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table of Contents
Preface Overview
Who Should Use this Manual? . . . . . . . . . P-1
Reference Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . P-4
Chapter 1 Installation/Wiring
Opening the Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . 1-5
General Grounding Requirements . . . . . . 1-7
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations . 1-14
I/O Wiring Recommendations . . . . . . . . 1-14
Start and Speed Reference Control . . . . . 1-23
EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Chapter 2 Start Up
Prepare For Drive Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Integral Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Viewing and Editing Parameters. . . . . . . . 2-5
Remote HIM Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters
About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Parameter Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Display Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Basic Program Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Advanced Program Group. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Parameter Cross Reference – by Name. . 3-45
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting
Drive Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Fault Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . .
4-5
Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information
Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . A-1
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Appendix B Accessories and Dimensions
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Product Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
2 Table of Contents
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix C RS485 (DSI) Protocol
Network Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . C-3
Writing (06) Logic Command Data. . . . . . C-4
Writing (06) Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Reading (03) Logic Status Data. . . . . . . . . C-5
Reading (03) Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Reading (03) Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . C-6
Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
Appendix D RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable
Connectivity Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
DSI Cable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Connecting One Temporary Peripheral . . . D-3
Connecting One Temporary Peripheral and
One Permanent Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Connecting Two Permanent Peripherals . . D-4
Connecting an RS-485 Network . . . . . . . . D-4
Appendix E StepLogic™, Basic Logic and
Timer/Counter Functions
StepLogic Using Timed Steps . . . . . . . . . . E-2
StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions . . E-3
Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Counter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Appendix F PID Set Up
PID Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
PID Reference and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . F-4
Analog PID Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . F-5
Index
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Preface
Overview
The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information
needed to install, start-up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable
Frequency AC Drive.
This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to
program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In
addition, you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and
functions.
The following manuals are recommended for general drive information:
For information on… See page…
Who Should Use this Manual? P-1
Reference Materials P-1
Manual Conventions P-2
Drive Frame Sizes P-2
General Precautions P-3
Catalog Number Explanation P-4
Who Should Use this Manual?
Reference Materials
Title Publication Available Online at …
Wiring and Grounding
Guidelines for Pulse Width
Modulated (PWM) AC Drives
DRIVES-IN001…
www.rockwellautomation.com/
literature
Preventive Maintenance of
Industrial Control and Drive
System Equipment
DRIVES-TD001…
Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation and
Maintenance of Solid State
Control
SGI-1.1
A Global Reference Guide for
Reading Schematic Diagrams
100-2.10
Guarding Against Electrostatic
Damage
8000-4.5.2
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
P-2 Overview
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
• In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive as; drive, PowerFlex 40 or PowerFlex 40 Drive.
• Parameter numbers and names are shown in this format:
• The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an
action:
Similar PowerFlex 40 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to
simplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of
drive catalog numbers and their respective frame sizes is provided in
Appendix B.
Manual Conventions
P031 [Motor NP Volts]
Name
Number
Group
d = Display Group
P = Basic Program Group
A = Advanced Program Group
Word Meaning
Can Possible, able to do something
Cannot Not possible, not able to do something
May Permitted, allowed
Must Unavoidable, you must do this
Shall Required and necessary
Should Recommended
Should Not Not Recommended
Drive Frame Sizes
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Overview P-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
General Precautions
!
ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take
time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on
drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs [R, S, T (L1,
L2, L3)]. Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.
Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have
discharged to safe voltage levels.
!
ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable
frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or
implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the
system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or
equipment damage.
!
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required
when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly.
Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not
followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures,
reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, “Guarding Against Electrostatic
Damage” or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
!
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in
component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application
errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC
supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of
the system.
!
ATTENTION: The bus regulator function is extremely useful for
preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive
decelerations, overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can
also cause either of the following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages
can cause uncommanded positive speed changes;
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded
deceleration times
However, a “Stall Fault” is generated if the drive remains in this state
for 1 minute. If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be
disabled (see parameter A117). In addition, installing a properly sized
dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most
cases.
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
P-4 Overview
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Catalog Number Explanation
Code Voltage Ph.
V 120V AC 1
A 240V AC 1
B 240V AC 3
D 480V AC 3
E 600V AC 3
Code Version
3 No Brake IGBT
4 Standard
Code Interface Module
1 Fixed Keypad
Code Enclosure
N Panel Mount - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
C Panel Mount - IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X
F Flange Mount - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
H Replacement Plate Drive - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
- Contact factory for ordering information.
1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 (1) 13-14
22B - A 1P5 N 1 1 4 AA
Drive Dash Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure HIM Emission Class Type Optional
Output Current
@ 100-120V 50/60 Hz Input
Code Amps kW (HP)
2P3 2.3 0.4 (0.5)
5P0 5.0 0.75 (1.0)
6P0 6.0 1.1 (1.5)
Code Rating
0 Not Filtered
1 Filtered
Output Current
@ 380-480V 50/60 Hz Input
Code Amps kW (HP)
1P4 1.4 0.4 (0.5)
2P3 2.3 0.75 (1.0)
4P0 4.0 1.5 (2.0)
6P0 6.0 2.2 (3.0)
010 10.5 4.0 (5.0)
012 12 5.5 (7.5)
017 17 7.5 (10)
024 24 11 (15)
Code
22B PowerFlex 40
Additional accessories, options and adapters are available. See Appendix B for details.
Output Current
@ 500-600V 50/60 Hz Input
Code Amps kW (HP)
1P7 1.7 0.75 (1.0)
3P0 3.0 1.5 (2.0)
4P2 4.2 2.2 (3.0)
6P6 6.6 4.0 (5.0)
9P9 9.9 5.5 (7.5)
012 12.2 7.5 (10)
019 19 11 (15)
Code Purpose
AA Reserved for
thru custom firmware
ZZ
Output Current
@ 200-240V 50/60 Hz Input
Code Amps kW (HP)
2P3 2.3 0.4 (0.5)
5P0 5.0 0.75 (1.0)
8P0 8.0 1.5 (2.0)
012 12 2.2 (3.0)
017 17.5 3.7 (5.0)
024 24 5.5 (7.5)
033 33 7.5 (10)
(1)
Position 12 of the Catalog Number now indicates drive type. All PowerFlex 40
drives are equipped with RS485 communication.
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Chapter 1
Installation/Wiring
This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the
PowerFlex 40 Drive.
Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every
precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed.
All items must be read and understood before the actual installation
begins.
IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
1. Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover.
2. Pull the cover out and up to release.
For information on… See page For information on… See page
Opening the Cover 1-1 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1-8
Mounting Considerations 1-3 Power Wiring 1-10
AC Supply Source Considerations 1-5 I/O Wiring
Recommendations
1-14
General Grounding Requirements 1-7 EMC Instructions 1-25
!
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper
installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility
for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or
otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated
equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage
exists if codes are ignored during installation.
Opening the Cover
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-2 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X
1. Loosen the four captive cover screws.
2. Pull cover straight off chassis.
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Cover Installation
1. Squarely align the cover on the chassis.
2. Lightly tighten the four captive cover screws.
3. Torque the cover screws using an alternating pattern.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, ensure isolation of
mains supply from line inputs [R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)] and wait three
minutes for capacitors to discharge before removing the external cover.
Once the cover is removed, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors
has discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the
DC bus voltage at the DC– and DC+ terminals on the Power Terminal
Block (refer to page 1-13 for Power Terminal descriptions). The voltage
must be zero.
1
3
4
2
0.8 ±0.2 N-m
(7.0 ±2.0 lb.-in.)
2
1
3
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
• Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface.
• Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles.
• Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.
• Protect from moisture and direct sunlight.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
Refer to Appendix B for mounting dimensions.
Ambient Operating Temperatures
Table 1.A Enclosure and Clearance Requirements
Mounting Considerations
Frame Screw Size Screw Torque DIN Rail
B M4 (#8-32) 1.56-1.96 N-m (14-17 lb.-in.) 35 mm
C M5 (#10-24) 2.45-2.94 N-m (22-26 lb.-in.) –
B (IP66,
Type 4X)
M6 (#12-24) 3.95-4.75 N-m (35-42 lb.-in.) –
Ambient Temperature Enclosure Rating Minimum Mounting
Clearances
Minimum Maximum
-10°C (14°F)
40°C (104°F)
IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open Use Mounting Option A
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Use Mounting Option A
IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1(1)
(1) Rating requires installation of the PowerFlex 40 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 option kit.
Use Mounting Option B
50°C (122°F) IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open Use Mounting Option B
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
120 mm
(4.7 in.)
120 mm
(4.7 in.)
120 mm
(4.7 in.)
120 mm
(4.7 in.)
Mounting Option A
No clearance required
between drives.
Mounting Option B
Closest object that
may restrict air flow
through the drive heat
sink and chassis
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-4 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Debris Protection
A plastic top panel is included with the drive. Install the panel to prevent
debris from falling through the vents of the drive housing during
installation. Remove the panel for IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
applications.
Storage
• Store within an ambient temperature range of -40° to +85°C.
• Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 95%,
non-condensing.
• Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere.
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Ungrounded Distribution Systems
Disconnecting MOVs
To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground shall be
disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution
system where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed
125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect these devices,
remove the jumper shown in the Figures 1.1 and 1.2.
1. Turn the screw counterclockwise to loosen.
2. Pull the jumper completely out of the drive chassis.
3. Tighten the screw to keep it in place.
Figure 1.1 Jumper Location (Typical)
Figure 1.2 Phase to Ground MOV Removal
AC Supply Source Considerations
!
ATTENTION: PowerFlex 40 drives contain protective MOVs that are
referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the drive is
installed on an ungrounded or resistive grounded distribution system.
Important: Tighten screw after jumper removal.
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4XIP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
1 2 3 4
Three-Phase
AC Input
Jumper
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-6 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Input Power Conditioning
The drive is suitable for direct connection to input power within the rated
voltage of the drive (see Appendix A). Listed in Table 1.B are certain
input power conditions which may cause component damage or
reduction in product life. If any of the conditions exist, as described in
Table 1.B, install one of the devices listed under the heading Corrective
Action on the line side of the drive.
Important: Only one device per branch circuit is required. It should be
mounted closest to the branch and sized to handle the total
current of the branch circuit.
Table 1.B Input Power Conditions
Input Power Condition Corrective Action
Low Line Impedance (less than 1% line reactance) • Install Line Reactor(2)
• or Isolation Transformer
• or Bus Inductor – 5.5 & 11 kW
(7.5 & 15 HP) drives only
(2)
Refer to Appendix B for accessory ordering information.
Greater than 120 kVA supply transformer
Line has power factor correction capacitors • Install Line Reactor
• or Isolation Transformer
Line has frequent power interruptions
Line has intermittent noise spikes in excess of
6000V (lightning)
Phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% of normal
line to line voltage
• Remove MOV jumper to ground.
• or Install Isolation Transformer
with grounded secondary if
necessary.
Ungrounded distribution system
240V open delta configuration (stinger leg)(1)
(1) For drives applied on an open delta with a middle phase grounded neutral system, the
phase opposite the phase that is tapped in the middle to the neutral or earth is
referred to as the “stinger leg,” “high leg,” “red leg,” etc. This leg should be identified
throughout the system with red or orange tape on the wire at each connection point.
The stinger leg should be connected to the center Phase B on the reactor. Refer to
Table B.D for specific line reactor part numbers.
• Install Line Reactor
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The drive Safety Ground - (PE) must be connected to system
ground. Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of
national and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked.
Figure 1.3 Typical Grounding
Ground Fault Monitoring
If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B
(adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping.
Safety Ground - (PE)
This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code. One of
these points must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a
floor ground rod or bus bar. Grounding points must comply with national
and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes.
Motor Ground
The motor ground must be connected to one of the ground terminals on
the drive.
Shield Termination - SHLD
Either of the safety ground terminals located on the power terminal
block provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. The motor
cable shield connected to one of these terminals (drive end) should also
be connected to the motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or
EMI clamp to connect the shield to the safety ground terminal. The
conduit box option may be used with a cable clamp for a grounding point
for the cable shield.
When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield
should be grounded at the source end only, not at the drive end.
General Grounding Requirements
SHLD
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-8 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
RFI Filter Grounding
Using single phase drives with integral filter, or an external filter with
any drive rating, may result in relatively high ground leakage currents.
Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded
AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly
grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure
that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the
same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on
flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that
would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require
redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be
periodically checked.
The PowerFlex 40 does not provide branch short circuit protection. This
product should be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit
breaker. National and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical
codes may determine additional requirements for these installations.
Fusing
The PowerFlex 40 has been UL tested and approved for use with input
fuses. The ratings in the table that follows are the minimum
recommended values for use with each drive rating. The devices listed in
this table are provided to serve as a guide.
Bulletin 140M (Self-Protected Combination Controller)/UL489
Circuit Breakers
When using Bulletin 140M or UL489 rated circuit breakers, the
guidelines listed below must be followed in order to meet the NEC
requirements for branch circuit protection.
• Bulletin 140M can be used in single and group motor applications.
• Bulletin 140M can be used up stream from the drive without the
need for fuses.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
!
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment
damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use only
the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers specified in this section.
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-9
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table 1.C Minimum Recommended Branch Circuit Protective Devices
Voltage
Rating
Drive Rating
kW (HP)
Fuse Rating(1)
Amps
140M Motor
Protectors(2) (3)
Catalog No.
Recommended
MCSContactors
Catalog No.
Min. Enclosure
Volume(4)
Inches3
120V AC –
1-Phase
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.1 (1.5)
15
35
40
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C32
100-C12
100-C23
100-C37
1655
1655
1655
240V AC –
1-Phase
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
10
20
30
40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C32
100-C09
100-C12
100-C23
100-C37
1655
1655
1655
2069
240V AC –
3-Phase
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
3.7 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
6
10
15
25
30
40
60
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-C2E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
140M-F8E-C32
140M-G8E-C45
100-C07
100-C09
100-C12
100-C23
100-C23
100-C37
100-C60
1655
1655
1655
1655
1655
2069
2069
480V AC –
3-Phase
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
4.0 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
11 (15)
3
6
10
15
20
25
30
50
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-C2E-B63
140M-C2E-C10
140M-C2E-C16
140M-D8E-C20
140M-D8E-C20
140M-F8E-C32
100-C07
100-C07
100-C09
100-C09
100-C23
100-C23
100-C23
100-C43
1655
1655
1655
1655
1655
2069
2069
2069
600V AC –
3-Phase
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
4.0 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
11 (15)
6
6
10
15
20
25
40
140M-C2E-B25
140M-C2E-B40
140M-D8E-B63
140M-D8E-C10
140M-D8E-C16
140M-D8E-C16
140M-F8E-C25
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C09
100-C16
100-C23
100-C30
1655
1655
1655
1655
2069
2069
2069
(1)
Recommended Fuse Type: UL Class J, CC, T or Type BS88; 600V (550V) or equivalent.
(2) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 140M
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings.
(3)
Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240
Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta, corner
ground, or high-resistance ground systems.
(4)
When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be
installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this
column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure.
22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-10 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Motor Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many
installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated
from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3
meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases,
long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation
thickness less than 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.). Do not route more than
three sets of motor leads in a single conduit to minimize “cross talk”. If
more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required,
shielded cable must be used.
UL installations in 50°C ambient must use 600V, 75°C or 90°C wire.
UL installations in 40°C ambient should use 600V, 75°C or 90°C wire.
Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations
are based on 75 degree C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher
temperature wire.
Unshielded
THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry
environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates
limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet
areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15
mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity.
Shielded/Armored Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor
cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain
much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration
for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive
equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other
devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution
system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location,
imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications /
networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
Power Wiring
!
ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI, etc.)
and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical
equipment. Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire
types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect
devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment
damage.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced
voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends.
For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or
installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will help
minimize the possible shock hazard from “cross coupled” power leads.
22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-11
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing
currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of
shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be
located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices
such as terminator networks. Refer to Reflected Wave in “Wiring and
Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives,” publication
DRIVES-IN001A-EN-P.
Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications
dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature,
flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition,
a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable
manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil
shield can greatly improve noise containment.
A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx
determines gauge). This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors
with a 100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield
(with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket.
Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these
types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the
newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly
with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable
charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance.
Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive,
these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead
length limits supplied is not known.
Recommended Shielded Wire
Location Rating/Type Description
Standard
(Option 1)
600V, 90°C (194°F)
XHHW2/RHW-2
Anixter
B209500-B209507,
Belden 29501-29507,
or equivalent
• Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
• Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned
copper drain wire.
• PVC jacket.
Standard
(Option 2)
Tray rated 600V, 90°C
(194°F) RHH/RHW-2
Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or
equivalent
• Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation.
• 5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.) with three
bare copper grounds in contact with shield.
• PVC jacket.
Class I & II;
Division I & II
Tray rated 600V, 90°C
(194°F) RHH/RHW-2
Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G
or equivalent
• Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and
impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum armor.
• Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall.
• Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller.
22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-12 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Reflected Wave Protection
The drive should be installed as close to the motor as possible.
Installations with long motor cables may require the addition of external
devices to limit voltage reflections at the motor (reflected wave
phenomena). See Table 1.D for recommendations.
The reflected wave data applies to all frequencies 2 to 16 kHz.
For 240V ratings, reflected wave effects do not need to be considered.
Table 1.D Maximum Cable Length Recommendations
Output Disconnect
The drive is intended to be commanded by control input signals that will
start and stop the motor. A device that routinely disconnects then
reapplies output power to the motor for the purpose of starting and
stopping the motor should not be used. If it is necessary to disconnect
power to the motor with the drive outputting power, an auxiliary contact
should be used to simultaneously disable drive control run commands.
Reflected Wave
380-480V Ratings Motor Insulation Rating Motor Cable Only(1)
(1) Longer cable lengths can be achieved by installing devices on the output of the drive.
Consult factory for recommendations.
1000 Vp-p 15 meters (49 feet)
1200 Vp-p 40 meters (131 feet)
1600 Vp-p 170 meters (558 feet)
22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-13
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Power Terminal Block
The power terminal block is covered by a finger guard. To remove:
1. Press in and hold the locking tab.
2. Slide finger guard down and out.
Replace the finger guard when wiring is complete.
Figure 1.4 Power Terminal Block (Typical)
Table 1.E Power Terminal Block Specifications
Terminal (1)
Description
R/L1, S/L2 1-Phase Input
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3-Phase Input
U/T1 To Motor U/T1
=
Switch any two motor
leads to change
forward direction.
V/T2 To Motor V/T2
W/T3 To Motor W/T3
P2, P1
DC Bus Inductor Connection (C Frame drives only.)
The C Frame drive is shipped with a jumper between
Terminals P2 and P1. Remove this jumper only when a DC
Bus Inductor will be connected. Drive will not power up
without a jumper or inductor connected.
DC+, DC- DC Bus Connection
BR+, BR- Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection
Safety Ground - PE
(1)
Important: Terminal screws may become loose during shipment. Ensure that all
terminal screws are tightened to the recommended torque before applying power to
the drive.
Frame Maximum Wire Size(1)
(1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not
recommendations.
Minimum Wire Size(1)
Torque
B 5.3 mm2 (10 AWG) 1.3 mm2 (16 AWG) 1.7-2.2 N-m (16-19 lb.-in.)
C 8.4 mm2 (8 AWG) 1.3 mm2 (16 AWG) 2.9-3.7 N-m (26-33 lb.-in.)
V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3
BR+ BR-DC- DC+
V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3 P2 P1
BR+ BR-DC- DC+
B Frame C Frame
22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-14 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Use the plugs supplied with IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives to
seal unused holes in the conduit entry plate.
Important: Completely seat the plug inner rim for the best seal.
Motor Start/Stop Precautions
Important points to remember about I/O wiring:
• Always use copper wire.
• Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended.
• Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at
least 0.3 meters (1 foot).
Important: I/O terminals labeled “Common” are not referenced to the
safety ground (PE) terminal and are designed to greatly
reduce common mode interference.
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations
I/O Wiring Recommendations
!
ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects
and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can
cause drive hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input
signals that will start and stop the motor. If used, the input device must
not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage can occur.
!
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes
solid-state components. If hazards due to accidental contact with
moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist,
an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC
line to the drive. When the AC line is removed, there will be a loss of
any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present - the
motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be
required.
!
ATTENTION: Driving the 4-20mA analog input from a voltage
source could cause component damage. Verify proper configuration
prior to applying input signals.
22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-15
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Control Wire Types
Table 1.F Recommended Control and Signal Wire(1)
I/O Terminal Block
Table 1.G I/O Terminal Block Specifications
(3)
Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not
recommendations.
Maximum Control Wire Recommendations
Do not exceed control wiring length of 30 meters (100 feet). Control
signal cable length is highly dependent on electrical environment and
installation practices. To improve noise immunity, the I/O terminal block
Common must be connected to ground terminal/protective earth. If using
the RS485 (DSI) port, I/O Terminal 16 should also be connected to
ground terminal/protective earth.
Wire Type(s)(2) Description Minimum
Insulation Rating
Belden 8760/9460
(or equiv.)
0.8 mm2
(18AWG), twisted pair, 100%
shield with drain.(1)
(1) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits,
the use of shielded wire may not be necessary, but is always recommended.
(2)
Stranded or solid wire.
300V
60 degrees C
(140 degrees F)Belden 8770
(or equiv.)
0.8 mm2(18AWG), 3 conductor, shielded for
remote pot only.
Frame Maximum Wire Size (3)
Minimum Wire Size (3)
Torque
B & C 1.3 mm2
(16 AWG) 0.2 mm2
(24 AWG) 0.5-0.8 N-m (4.4-7 lb.-in.)
22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-16 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure 1.5 Control Wiring Block Diagram
(1)
Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a coast to stop
input except when P036 [Start Source] is set to
“3-Wire” or “Momt FWD/REV” control. In three wire
control, I/O Terminal 01 is controlled by P037 [Stop
Mode]. All other stop sources are controlled by P037
[Stop Mode].
Important: The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11. Remove
this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input.
(2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input on I/O Terminal 02 to
command a start. Use a maintained input for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction.
(3) When using an opto output with an inductive load such as a relay, install a recovery diode parallel
to the relay as shown, to prevent damage to the output.
(4)
When the ENBL enable jumper is removed, I/O Terminal 01 will always act as a hardware enable,
causing a coast to stop without software interpretation.
04
05
06
07
01
02
03
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Digital Common
Digital Input 1
Digital Input 2
Digital Input 3
Stop
(1)(4)
Start/Run FWD
(2)
Direction/Run REV
Digital Input 4
Opto Common
R1
R2
R3
Relay N.O.
Relay Common
Relay N.C.
+24V DC
+10V DC
0-10V (or ±10V) Input
Analog Common
4-20mA Input
Analog Output
Opto Output 1
Opto Output 2
RS485 Shield
+24V
+10V
Typical
SNKWiring
Typical
SRCWiring
1
RS485
(DSI)
R1 R2 R3
SNK
SRC
0-10V
0-20mA
01 02 03 04 05
11 12 13 14 15
06 07 08 09
16 17 18 19
(1)
Enable Jumper
(4)
30V DC
50mA
Non-inductive
Common
24V
ENBL
Enable
(4)
Jumper
(3)
Pot must be
1-10k ohm
2 Watt Min.0-10V
0/4-20mA
Analog Output Select
SRCSNK
30V DC 125V AC 240V AC
Resistive 3.0A 3.0A 3.0A
Inductive 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A
P036 [Start Source] Stop I/O Terminal 01 Stop
Keypad Per P037 Coast
3-Wire Per P037 Per P037(4)
2-Wire Per P037 Coast
Momt FWD/REV Per P037 Per P037(4)
RS485 Port Per P037 Coast
22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-17
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table 1.H Control I/O Terminal Designations
No. Signal Default Description Param.
R1 Relay N.O. Fault Normally open contact for output relay. A055
R2 Relay Common – Common for output relay.
R3 Relay N.C. Fault Normally closed contact for output relay. A055
Analog Output Select DIP
Switch
0-10V Sets analog output to either voltage or current. Setting must match
A065 [Analog Out Sel].
Sink/Source DIP Switch Source (SRC) Inputs can be wired as Sink (SNK) or Source (SRC) via DIP Switch
setting.
01 Stop (1)
Coast The factory installed jumper or a normally closed
input must be present for the drive to start.
P036 (1)
02 Start/Run FWD Not Active Command comes from the integral keypad by default.
To disable reverse operation, see A095 [Reverse
Disable].
P036, P037
03 Direction/Run REV Not Active P036, P037,
A095
04 Digital Common – For digital inputs. Electronically isolated with digital
inputs from analog I/O and opto outputs.
05 Digital Input 1 Preset Freq Program with A051 [Digital In1 Sel]. A051
06 Digital Input 2 Preset Freq Program with A052 [Digital In2 Sel]. A052
07 Digital Input 3 Local Program with A053 [Digital In3 Sel]. A053
08 Digital Input 4 Jog Forward Program with A054 [Digital In4 Sel]. A054
09 Opto Common – For opto-coupled outputs. Electronically isolated with
opto outputs from analog I/O and digital inputs.
11 +24V DC – Referenced to Digital Common.
Drive supplied power for digital inputs.
Maximum output current is 100mA.
12 +10V DC – Referenced to Analog Common.
Drive supplied power for 0-10V external potentiometer.
Maximum output current is 15mA.
P038
13 ±10V In (2) Not Active For external 0-10V (unipolar) or ±10V (bipolar) input
supply (input impedance = 100k ohm) or
potentiometer wiper.
P038, A051-
A054, A123,
A132
14 Analog Common – For 0-10V In or 4-20mA In. Electronically isolated
with analog inputs and outputs from digital I/O and
opto outputs.
15 4-20mA In (2)
Not Active For external 4-20mA input supply
(input impedance = 250 ohm).
P038, A051-
A054, A132
16 Analog Output OutFreq 0-10 The default analog output is 0-10V. To covert to a
current value, change the Analog Output Select DIP
Switch to 0-20mA. Program with A065 [Analog Out
Sel]. Max analog value can be scaled with A066
[Analog Out High].
Maximum Load: 4-20mA = 525 ohm (10.5V)
0-10V = 1k ohm (10mA)
A065, A066
17 Opto Output 1 MotorRunning Program with A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] A058, A059,
A064
18 Opto Output 2 At Frequency Program with A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] A061, A062,
A064
19 RS485 (DSI) Shield – Terminal should be connected to safety ground - PE
when using the RS485 (DSI) communications port.
(1)
See Footnotes (1) and (4) on page 1-16.
(2) 0-10V In and 4-20mA In are distinct input channels and may be connected simultaneously.
Inputs may be used independently for speed control or jointly when operating in PID mode.
22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-18 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
I/O Wiring Examples
Input/Output Connection Example
Potentiometer
1-10k Ohm Pot.
Recommended
(2 Watt minimum)
P038 [Speed Reference] = 2 “0-10V Input”
Analog Input
0 to +10V, 100k ohm
impedance
4-20 mA, 250 ohm
impedance
Bipolar
P038 [Speed Reference]
= 2 “0-10V Input” and
A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl]
= 1 “Bi-Polar In”
Unipolar (Voltage)
P038 [Speed Reference]
= 2 “0-10V Input”
Unipolar (Current)
P038 [Speed Reference]
= 3 “4-20mA Input”
Analog Input, PTC
For Drive Fault
Wire the PTC and External Resistor (typically matched to the PTC Hot
Resistance) to I/O Terminals 12, 13, 14.
Wire R2/R3 Relay Output (SRC) to I/O Terminals 5 & 11.
A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 3 “Aux Fault”
A055 [Relay Out Sel] = 10 “Above Anlg V”
A056 [Relay Out Level] = % Voltage Trip
12
13
14
13
14
-/+ 10V
Common
13
14
+
Common 14
15
Common
+
11
12
13
14
R2
R3
05
VTrip = × 100
RPTC (hot)
RPTC (hot) + Re
Re
RPTC
22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-19
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
2 Wire SRC Control -
Non-Reversing
P036 [Start Source] =
2, 3 or 4
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the
drive will stop as
specified by P037
[Stop Mode].
If desired, a User
Supplied 24V DC
power source can be
used. Refer to the
“External Supply
(SRC)” example.
Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC)
2 Wire SNK Control -
Non-Reversing
Internal Supply (SNK)
2 Wire SRC Control -
Run FWD/Run REV
P036 [Start Source] =
2, 3 or 4
Input must be active for
the drive to run. When
input is opened, the
drive will stop as
specified by P037
[Stop Mode].
If both Run Forward
and Run Reverse
inputs are closed at the
same time, an
undetermined state
could occur.
Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC)
Input/Output Connection Example
11 01
02
Stop-Run
+24V Common
01
02
04
Stop-Run
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
01
02
04
Stop-Run
11 01
02
03
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
Common
01
02
03
04
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
+24V
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
22B-UM001.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-20 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
2 Wire SNK Control -
Run FWD/Run REV
Internal Supply (SNK)
3 Wire SRC Control -
Non-Reversing
P036 [Start Source] = 1
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P037
[Stop Mode].
Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC)
3 Wire SNK Control -
Non-Reversing
Internal Supply (SNK)
3 Wire SRC Control -
Reversing
P036 [Start Source] = 1
A momentary input will
start the drive. A stop
input to I/O Terminal 01
will stop the drive as
specified by P037
[Stop Mode]. I/O
Terminal 03
determines direction.
Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC)
Input/Output Connection Example
Stop-Run
Forward
Stop-Run
Reverse
01
02
03
04
11 01
02
Stop
Start
01
02
04
+24V Common
Stop
Start
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
Stop
Start
01
02
03
04
11 01
02
03
Stop
Start
Direction
+24V Common
Stop
Start
Direction
01
02
03
04
Each digital input draws 6 mA.
22B-UM001.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-21
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
3 Wire SNK Control -
Reversing
Internal Supply (SNK)
Opto Output (1 & 2)
A058 [Opto Out1 Sel]
determines
Opto-Output 1 (I/O
Terminal 17) operation.
A061 [Opto Out2 Sel]
determines
Opto-Output 2 (I/O
Terminal 18) operation.
When using
Opto-Output with an
inductive load such as
a relay, install a
recovery diode parallel
to the relay as shown,
to prevent damage to
the output.
Opto-Output 1
Analog Output
A065 [Analog Out Sel]
determines analog
output type and drive
conditions.
0-10V,
1k ohm minimum
0-20mA/4-20mA,
525 ohm maximum
A065 [Analog Out Sel] = 0 through 14
The Analog Output Select DIP Switch must be set to match the analog output
signal mode set in A065 [Analog Out Sel].
Input/Output Connection Example
Stop
Start
Direction
01
02
03
04
Common+24V
CR
09
17
Each Opto-Output is rated
30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive).
14
16
Common
+
22B-UM001.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-22 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Typical Multiple Drive Connection Examples
Input/Output Connection Example
Multiple Digital
Input Connections
Customer Inputs can
be wired per
External Supply
(SRC) examples on
1-19 and 1-20.
When connecting a single input such as Run, Stop, Reverse or Preset Speeds to
multiple drives, it is important to connect I/O Terminal 04 common together for all
drives. If they are to be tied into another common (such as earth ground or
separate apparatus ground) only one point of the daisy chain of I/O Terminal 04
should be connected.
Multiple Analog
Connections
When connecting a single potentiometer to multiple drives it is important to
connect I/O Terminal 14 common together for all drives. I/O Terminal 14 common
and I/O Terminal 13 (potentiometer wiper) should be daisy-chained to each drive.
All drives must be powered up for the analog signal to be read correctly.
Customer Inputs Optional Ground Connection
04020402 0402
!
ATTENTION: Digital inputs on multiple drives should not be tied
together when using SNK (Internal Supply) mode. In SNK mode, if
power is removed from one drive, inadvertent operation of other
drives that share the same I/O Common connection may occur.
Remote Potentiometer Optional Ground Connection
12 13 1413 14 13 14
22B-UM001.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-23
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is
normally determined by P038 [Speed Reference]. However, when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is
set to option 2, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and the digital input is active, or if A132 is not set to
option 0, the speed reference commanded by P038 [Speed Reference] will be overridden. See
the chart below for the override priority.
Start and Speed Reference Control
Jog Input
Enabled and Active:
A051, A052, A053
or A054 = 2, 11, 12
No
Yes
No
Local/Remote Input
Enabled and Active:
[Digital Inx Sel] = 5
No
Yes
Drive Stopped
(Not Running)
Yes
Drive will Start and Run
at Jog Speed.
Direction comes from
I/O Terminal 03 Dir/Run REV
or
Jog Forward/Jog Reverse command
Start, Speed and Direction commands
come from Integral Keypad.
Comm Select Input
Enabled and Active:
[Digital Inx Sel] = 6
No
Yes Start, Speed and Direction commands
come from RS485 (DSI) port.
0-10V Override
Enabled and Active:
[Digital Inx Sel] = 13
No
Yes
Speed commands come from 0-10V.
Start and Direction
follows P036 [Start Source]
or
Bi-Polar input when enabled.
Speed commands come from 4-20mA.
Start and Direction
follows P036 [Start Source].
4-20mA Override
Enabled and Active:
[Digital Inx Sel] = 14
No
Yes
P038 [Speed Reference]
= 4 or 5
No
Yes
Run as specified by
P038 [Speed Refernece].
Start and Direction commands come
from P036 [Start Source].
Run as specified by
A071-A077 [Preset Freq 1-7].
Start and Direction commands come
from P036 [Start Source].
A051/A052/A053
Preset Inputs Active
No
Yes
Run as specified by
A132 [PID Ref Select].
Start and Direction commands come
from P036 [Start Source].
PID Enabled:
A132 [PID Ref Select]
≠ 0
No
Yes
Run as specified by
P038 [Speed Reference].
Start and Direction commands come
from P036 [Start Source].
22B-UM001.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-24 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Accel/Decel Selection
The Accel/Decel rate can be obtained by a variety of methods. The
default rate is determined by P039 [Accel Time 1] and P040 [Decel Time
1]. Alternative Accel/Decel rates can be made through digital inputs,
RS485 (DSI) communications and/or parameters. See the chart below
for the override priority.
No
Yes
No
RS485 (DSI) Port
Controls Speed
No
Yes
Drive Stopped
(Not Running)
Yes
Either
P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1]
or
A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2]
can be selected when
RS485 (DSI) port is active.
Input is programmed
as "Accel 2 & Decel 2"
A051, A052, A053
or A054 = 1
No
Yes A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2]
is active when input is active.
Speed is controlled
by [Preset Freq x]
No
Yes
P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1];
A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2]
determined by the active
Preset Frequency.
See A070-A077 [Preset Freq 0-7]
Either
P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1]
or
A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2]
can be selected by the Digit 3 setting
of the Step Logic parameters.
See A140-A147 [Stp Logic 0-7]
Speed is controlled
by Stp Logic
No
Yes
P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1]
are used.
Drive will Start and Run
at Jog Speed.
Drive will use A079 [Jog Accel/Decel]
Jog Input
Enabled and Active:
A051, A052, A053
or A054 = 2, 11,12
22B-UM001.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-25
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
CE Conformity
Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using
harmonized European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official
Journal of the European Communities. PowerFlex Drives comply with
the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User
Manual.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at:
http://www.ab.com/certification/ce/docs.
Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
• EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC)
• EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3:
EMC product standard including specific test methods.
General Notes
• If the plastic top panel is removed or the optional conduit box is not
installed, the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side
openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top openings less than 1.0
mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV Directive.
• The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid
electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents.
• Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended.
• Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not
guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC
requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation
compliance.
EMC Instructions
22B-UM001.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-26 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Essential Requirements for CE Compliance
Conditions 1-3 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to
meet the requirements of EN61800-3.
1. Grounding as described in Figure 1.6. Refer to page 1-8 for
additional grounding recommendations.
2. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided,
shielded cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or
equivalent attenuation.
3. Allowable cable length in Table 1.I is not exceeded.
Table 1.I Allowable Cable Length
(1) Refer to Appendix B for details on optional external filters.
(2)
Equivalent to EN55011 Class A.
(3)
Equivalent to EN55011 Class B.
Figure 1.6 Connections and Grounding
(1)
First Environment Unrestricted Distribution installations require a shielded enclosure.
Keep wire length as short as possible between the enclosure entry point and the EMI
filter.
(2)
Integral EMI filters are available on 240V, 1-Phase drives.
Filter Type EN61800-3 First Environment
Restricted Distribution or
Second Environment (2)
EN61800-3 First Environment
Unrestricted Distribution (3)
Integral 10 meters (33 feet) 1 meter (3 feet)
External - S Type(1) 10 meters (33 feet) 1 meter (3 feet)
External - L Type(1)
100 meters (328 feet) 5 meters (16 feet)
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
EMI Fittings and Metal Conduit
IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
Option Kit
Shielded Enclosure
(1)
Building Structure Steel
Enclosure Ground Connection
(2)
EMI Filter
L1'
L2'
L3'
L1
L2
L3
Shielded Motor Cable
22B-UM001.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Installation/Wiring 1-27
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
EN61000-3-2
• 0.75 kW (1 HP) 240V 1-Phase and 3-Phase drives and 0.37 kW (0.5
HP) 240V 1-Phase drives are suitable for installation on a private low
voltage power network. Installations on a public low voltage power
network may require additional external harmonic mitigation.
• Other drive ratings meet the current harmonic requirements of
EN61000-3-2 without additional external mitigation.
22B-UM001.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
1-28 Installation/Wiring
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Notes:
22B-UM001.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Chapter 2
Start Up
This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 40 Drive. To
simplify drive setup, the most commonly programmed parameters are
organized in a single Basic Program Group.
Important: Read the General Precautions section before proceeding.
Before Applying Power to the Drive
❏ 1. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are
secure.
❏ 2. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated
value of the drive.
❏ 3. Verify that any digital control power is 24 volts.
❏ 4. Verify that the Sink (SNK)/Source (SRC) Setup DIP Switch is set to
match your control wiring scheme. See Figure 1.5 on page 1-16 for
location.
Important: The default control scheme is Source (SRC). The Stop
terminal is jumpered (I/O Terminals 01 and 11) to allow
starting from the keypad. If the control scheme is changed
to Sink (SNK), the jumper must be removed from I/O
Terminals 01 and 11 and installed between I/O Terminals
01 and 04.
❏ 5. Verify that the Stop input is present or the drive will not start.
Important: If I/O Terminal 01 is used as a stop input, the jumper
between I/O Terminals 01 and 11 must be removed.
!
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the
following start-up procedures. Some of the voltages present are at
incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to
equipment, only qualified service personnel should perform the
following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure
before beginning. If an event does not occur while performing this
procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove All Power including user
supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may exist even when
main AC power is not applied to the drive. Correct the malfunction
before continuing.
Prepare For Drive Start-Up
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
2-2 Start Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Applying Power to the Drive
❏ 6. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive.
❏ 7. Familiarize yourself with the integral keypad features (see page 2-4)
before setting any Program Group parameters.
If a fault appears on power up, refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4-3
for an explanation of the fault code.
Start, Stop, Direction and Speed Control
Factory default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from
the integral keypad. No programming is required to start, stop, change
direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad.
Important: To disable reverse operation, see A095 [Reverse Disable].
Changing the Speed Reference of an IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated
drive
When a Display Group parameter, for example, d001 [Output Freq] is
displayed, and P038 [Speed Ref] is set to A069 [Internal Freq], you can
change the internal frequency using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow
keys.
When the internal frequency is being adjusted, its value is displayed and
the Hertz LED flashes. Any changes are saved immediately. The display
then returns to the Display Group parameter previously shown.
TIP: By default, the speed reference of an IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X
rated drive is set to the internal frequency, A069 [Internal Freq].
FAULT
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
RUN
FWD
REV
PROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Start Up 2-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
TIP: You can also change the speed reference by editing the parameter
A069 [Internal Freq] in program mode. For details on how to enter the
program mode, see Viewing and Editing Parameters on page 2-5.
Note: The default value of A069 [Internal Freq] is 0 Hz. For IP20 rated
PowerFlex 40 drives, the default value of this parameter is 60 Hz.
Variable Torque Fan/Pump Applications
For improved motor tuning performance when using a premium efficient
motor on a variable torque load, set A084 [Boost Select] to option 2
“35.0, VT”.
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
2-4 Start Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Integral Keypad
No. LED LED State Description
➊ Run/Direction
Status
Steady Red Indicates drive is running and commanded motor direction.
Flashing Red Drive has been commanded to change direction. Indicates
actual motor direction while decelerating to zero.
➋ Alphanumeric
Display
Steady Red Indicates parameter number, parameter value, or fault code.
Flashing Red Single digit flashing indicates that digit can be edited.
All digits flashing indicates a fault condition.
➌ Displayed Units Steady Red Indicates the units of the parameter value being displayed.
➍ Program Status Steady Red Indicates parameter value can be changed.
➎ Fault Status Flashing Red Indicates drive is faulted.
➏ Pot Status Steady Green Indicates potentiometer on Integral Keypad is active.(1)
➐ Start Key Status Steady Green Indicates Start key on Integral Keypad is active.
The Reverse key is also active unless disabled by A095
[Reverse Disable].
No. Key Name Description
➑ Escape Back one step in programming menu.
Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program Mode.
Select Advance one step in programming menu.
Select a digit when viewing parameter value.
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Scroll through groups and parameters.
Increase/decrease the value of a flashing digit.
Used to adjust internal frequency of IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X
rated drives only when a Display Group parameter is shown
and P038 [Speed Reference] is set to internal frequency,
A069 [Internal Freq].
Enter Advance one step in programming menu.
Save a change to a parameter value.
➒ Potentiometer(1)
Used to control speed of drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameter P038 [Speed Reference].
Start Used to start the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameter P036 [Start Source].
Reverse Used to reverse direction of the drive. Default is active.
Controlled by parameters P036 [Start Source] and A095
[Reverse Disable].
Stop Used to stop the drive or clear a fault.
This key is always active.
Controlled by parameter P037 [Stop Mode].
(1)
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives are not equipped with a potentiometer.
FAULT
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
RUN
FWD
REV
PROGRAM
➊
➋
➍
➏
➒
➎
Menu Description
Display Group (View Only)
Consists of commonly viewed drive operating
conditions.
Basic Program Group
Consists of most commonly used
programmable functions.
Advanced Program Group
Consists of remaining programmable functions.
Fault Designator
Consists of list of codes for specific fault
conditions. Displayed only when fault is present.
➌
➑➐
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Start Up 2-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The last user-selected Display Group parameter is saved when power is removed and is displayed by
default when power is reapplied.
The following is an example of basic integral keypad and display functions. This example provides basic
navigation instructions and illustrates how to program the first Program Group parameter.
Viewing and Editing Parameters
Step Key(s) Example Displays
1. When power is applied, the last user-selected
Display Group parameter number is briefly
displayed with flashing characters. The display
then defaults to that parameter’s current value.
(Example shows the value of d001 [Output
Freq] with the drive stopped.)
2. Press Esc once to display the Display Group
parameter number shown on power-up. The
parameter number will flash.
3. Press Esc again to enter the group menu. The
group menu letter will flash.
4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll
through the group menu (d, P and A).
5. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right
digit of the last viewed parameter in that group
will flash.
6. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll
through the parameters that are in the group.
7. Press Enter or Sel to view the value of a
parameter. If you do not want to edit the value,
press Esc to return to the parameter number.
8. Press Enter or Sel to enter program mode to
edit the parameter value. The right digit will
flash and the Program LED will illuminate if the
parameter can be edited.
9. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change
the parameter value. If desired, press Sel to
move from digit to digit or bit to bit. The digit or
bit that you can change will flash.
10.Press Esc to cancel a change. The digit will
stop flashing, the previous value is restored and
the Program LED will turn off.
Or
Press Enter to save a change. The digit will stop
flashing and the Program LED will turn off.
11.Press Esc to return to the parameter list.
Continue to press Esc to back out of the
programming menu.
If pressing Esc does not change the display,
then d001 [Output Frequency] is displayed.
Press Enter or Sel to enter the group menu.
or
or
or
or
or
or
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
FAULTPROGRAM
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
2-6 Start Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The Basic Program Group (page 3-9) contains the most commonly changed parameters.
The Menu Structure below can be accessed through the following
Human Interface Module options:
Remote HIM Menu Structure
HIM Option Catalog Number
Remote Panel Mount Small, LCD Display 22-HIM-C2S
Remote Handheld, LCD Display 22-HIM-A3
User
Display
Diagnostics
HIM Reference
Increase/Decrease Hz
Main Menu:
HIM Setup
Esc Sel
Esc
Faults
Device Status
Device Version
View Fault Queue
Clear Faults
Clear Fault Queue
Device Status
STS1
STS2
STS3
STS4
Parameters
Device Version
Press
Press
Press
to move between menu items
Press to move between main menu tabs
to select a tab or menu item
to move 1 level back in the menu structure
Memory Storage HIM CopyCat Device -> HIM
Device <- HIM
Delete File
Function
File Name
File Name
File Name
File Name
File Name
PowerFlex 40
Connected DSI Devices
Device Select
Parameters
Device Cat. No.
Device Name
Series
Firmware
Group Name
Parameter Number Name
Parameter Number Name
Parameter Number Name
Sel
Parameter Name
Value Screen
Limits Screen
PowerFlex 40
Product Data
Series
Firmware
Parameters
001 Startup Display
002 Startup Param
004 User Disp Line 1
005 User Disp Line 2
006 Large Disp Param
007 LCD Contrast
008 Reset Device
009 Device Type
010 M/S Status
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Sel
Groups
Linear List
Changed Params
Files Screen
Stats Screen
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Start Up 2-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Diagnostics Menu
When a fault trips the drive, use this menu to access detailed data about
the drive.
Parameters Menu
Use this menu to access drive parameters. Parameters can be displayed
in groups, in a linear list, or only those changed from their defaults.
Device Select Menu
Use this menu to access the drive or peripheral that the drive is to access.
Memory Storage Menu
Drive data can be saved to, or recalled from HIM sets.
HIM sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile HIM memory.
HIM Setup Menu
The HIM and drive have features that you can customize.
Option Description
Faults View fault queue or fault information, clear faults or clear fault
queue.
Device Status View status information about the drive or peripheral.
Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components.
Option Description
HIM Copycat
Device -> HIM
Device <- HIM
Save data to a HIM set or load data from a HIM set to active drive
memory. A maximum of 5 HIM set can be stored.
Delete File Delete a HIM set.
Option Description
Parameters Access parameters in HIM to set display options.
Device Version View HIM version, hardware series and firmware version
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
2-8 Start Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Notes:
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Chapter 3
Programming and Parameters
Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex
40 parameters. Parameters are programmed (viewed/edited) using the
integral keypad. As an alternative, programming can also be performed
using DriveExplorer™ or DriveExecutive™ software, a personal
computer and a serial converter module. Refer to Appendix B for catalog
numbers.
To configure a drive to operate in a specific way, drive parameters may
have to be set. Three types of parameters exist:
• ENUM
ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. Each item
is represented by a number.
• Numeric Parameters
These parameters have a single numerical value (i.e. 0.1 Volts).
• Bit Parameters
Bit parameters have four individual bits associated with features or
conditions. If the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If
the bit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true.
Some parameters are marked as follows.
For information on… See page…
About Parameters 3-1
Parameter Organization 3-2
Basic Program Group 3-9
Advanced Program Group 3-14
Parameter Cross Reference – by Name 3-45
About Parameters
= Stop drive before changing this parameter.
= 32 bit parameter. Parameters marked 32 bit will have two
parameter numbers when using RS485 communications and
programming software.
32
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-2 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Refer to page 3-45 for an alphabetical listing of parameters.
Parameter Organization
AdvancedProgram Group
Display Group
BasicProgram Group
See page 3-9
Motor NP Volts P031
Motor NP Hertz P032
Motor OL Current P033
Minimum Freq P034
Maximum Freq P035
Start Source P036
Stop Mode P037
Speed Reference P038
Accel Time 1 P039
Decel Time 1 P040
Reset To Defalts P041
Voltage Class P042
Motor OL Ret P043
See page 3-3
Output Freq d001
Commanded Freq d002
Output Current d003
Output Voltage d004
DC Bus Voltage d005
Drive Status d006
Fault 1 Code d007
Fault 2 Code d008
Fault 3 Code d009
Process Display d010
Control Source d012
Contrl In Status d013
Dig In Status d014
Comm Status d015
Control SW Ver d016
Drive Type d017
Elapsed Run Time d018
Testpoint Data d019
Analog In 0-10V d020
Analog In 4-20mA d021
Output Power d022
Output Power Fctr d023
Drive Temp d024
Counter Status d025
Timer Status d026
Stp Logic Status d028
Torque Current d029
See page 3-14
Comm Loss Time A106
Comm Format A107
Language A108
Anlg Out Setpt A109
Anlg In 0-10V Lo A110
Anlg In 0-10V Hi A111
Anlg In4-20mA Lo A112
Anlg In4-20mA Hi A113
Slip Hertz @ FLA A114
Process Time Lo A115
Process Time Hi A116
Bus Reg Mode A117
Current Limit 2 A118
Skip Frequency A119
Skip Freq Band A120
Stall Fault Time A121
Analog In Loss A122
10V Bipolar Enbl A123
Var PWM Disable A124
Torque Perf Mode A125
Motor NP FLA A126
Autotune A127
IR Voltage Drop A128
Flux Current Ref A129
PID Trim Hi A130
PID Trim Lo A131
PID Ref Sel A132
PID Feedback Sel A133
PID Prop Gain A134
PID Integ Time A135
PID Diff Rate A136
PID Setpoint A137
PID Deadband A138
PID Preload A139
Stp Logic 0 A140
Stp Logic 1 A141
Stp Logic 2 A142
Stp Logic 3 A143
Stp Logic 4 A144
Stp Logic 5 A145
Stp Logic 6 A146
Stp Logic 7 A147
Stp Logic Time 0 A150
Stp Logic Time 1 A151
Stp Logic Time 2 A152
Stp Logic Time 3 A153
Stp Logic Time 4 A154
Stp Logic Time 5 A155
Stp Logic Time 6 A156
Stp Logic Time 7 A157
EM Brk Off Delay A160
EM Brk On Delay A161
MOP Reset Sel A162
DB Threshold A163
Comm Write Mode A164
Anlg Loss Delay A165
Analog In Filter A166
PID Invert Error A167
See page 3-14
Digital In1 Sel A051
Digital In2 Sel A052
Digital In3 Sel A053
Digital In4 Sel A054
Relay Out Sel A055
Relay Out Level A056
Opto Out1 Sel A058
Opto Out1 Level A059
Opto Out2 Sel A061
Opto Out2 Level A062
Opto Out Logic A064
Analog Out Sel A065
Analog Out High A066
Accel Time 2 A067
Decel Time 2 A068
Internal Freq A069
Preset Freq 0 A070
Preset Freq 1 A071
Preset Freq 2 A072
Preset Freq 3 A073
Preset Freq 4 A074
Preset Freq 5 A075
Preset Freq 6 A076
Preset Freq 7 A077
Jog Frequency A078
Jog Accel/Decel A079
DC Brake Time A080
DC Brake Level A081
DB Resistor Sel A082
S Curve % A083
Boost Select A084
Start Boost A085
Break Voltage A086
Break Frequency A087
Maximum Voltage A088
Current Limit 1 A089
Motor OL Select A090
PWM Frequency A091
Auto Rstrt Tries A092
Auto Rstrt Delay A093
Start At PowerUp A094
Reverse Disable A095
Flying Start En A096
Compensation A097
SW Current Trip A098
Process Factor A099
Fault Clear A100
Program Lock A101
Testpoint Sel A102
Comm Data Rate A103
Comm Node Addr A104
Comm Loss Action A105
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group
d001 [Output Freq] Related Parameter(s): d002, d010, P034, P035, P038
Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/P035 [Maximum Freq]
Display: 0.1 Hz
d002 [Commanded Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d013, P034, P035, P038
Value of the active frequency command. Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not
running.
Important: The frequency command can come from a number of sources. Refer to Start and Speed
Reference Control on page 1-23 for details.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/P035 [Maximum Freq]
Display: 0.1 Hz
d003 [Output Current]
The output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps × 2)
Display: 0.01 Amps
d004 [Output Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, A084, A088
Output voltage present at terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/Drive Rated Volts
Display: 1 VAC
d005 [DC Bus Voltage]
Present DC bus voltage level.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: Based on Drive Rating
Display: 1 VDC
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-4 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group (continued)
d006 [Drive Status] Related Parameter(s): A095
Present operating condition of the drive.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/1
Display: 1
1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False
Running Bit 0
Forward Bit 1
Accelerating Bit 2
Decelerating Bit 3
d007 [Fault 1 Code]
d008 [Fault 2 Code]
d009 [Fault 3 Code]
A code that represents a drive fault. The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur
(d007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults will only be recorded once.
Refer to Chapter 4 for fault code descriptions.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: F2/F122
Display: F1
d010 [Process Display] Related Parameter(s): d001, A099
32 bit parameter.
The output frequency scaled by A099 [Process Factor].
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.00/9999
Display: 0.01 – 1
32
Output
Freq
Process
Factor
Process
Display=x
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group (continued)
d012 [Control Source] Related Parameter(s): P036, P038, A051-A054
Displays the active source of the Start Command and Speed Command which are normally defined
by the settings of P036 [Start Source] and P038 [Speed Reference] but may be overridden by digital
inputs. Refer to the flowcharts on pages 1-23 and 1-24 for details.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/9
Display: 1
Start Command Digit 0
0 = Keypad
1 = 3-Wire
2 = 2-Wire
3 = 2-Wire Level Sensitive
4 = 2-Wire High Speed
5 = RS485 (DSI) Port
9 = Jog
Speed Command Digit 1
0 = Drive Potentiometer
1 = A069 [Internal Freq]
2 = 0-10V Input/Remote Potentiometer
3 = 4-20mA Input
4 = A070-A077 [Preset Freq x]
(A051 - A053 [Digital Inx Sel] must be set to 4)
5 = RS485 (DSI) Port
6 = StepLogic Control (Parameters A140 - A147)
7 = Anlg In Mult
8 = PID
9 = Jog Freq
Reserved Digit 2
Reserved Digit 3
d013 [Contrl In Status] Related Parameter(s): d002, P034, P035
Status of the control terminal block control inputs.
Important: Actual control commands may come from a source other than the control terminal block.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/1
Display: 1
1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present
Start / Run FWD Input (I/O Terminal 02) Bit 0
Direction / Run REV Input (I/O Terminal 03) Bit 1
Stop Input(1) (I/O Terminal 01) Bit 2
(1)
The stop input must be present in order to start the drive.
When this bit is a 1 the drive can be started.
When this bit is a 0 the drive will stop.
Dynamic Brake Transistor On Bit 3
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-6 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group (continued)
d014 [Dig In Status] Related Parameter(s): A051-A054
Status of the control terminal block digital inputs.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/1
Display: 1
1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present
Digital In1 Sel (I/O Terminal 05) Bit 0
Digital In2 Sel (I/O Terminal 06) Bit 1
Digital In3 Sel (I/O Terminal 07) Bit 2
Digital In4 Sel (I/O Terminal 08) Bit 3
d015 [Comm Status] Related Parameter(s): A103-A107
Status of the communications ports.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/1
Display: 1
1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False
Receiving Data Bit 0
Transmitting Data Bit 1
RS485 (DSI) Based Option Connected Bit 2
(Allen-Bradley devices only.)
Communication Error Occurred Bit 3
d016 [Control SW Ver]
Main Control Board software version.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 1.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
d017 [Drive Type]
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 1001/9999
Display: 1
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group (continued)
d018 [Elapsed Run Time]
Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/9999 Hrs
Display: 1 = 10 Hrs
d019 [Testpoint Data] Related Parameter(s): A102
The present value of the function selected in A102 [Testpoint Sel].
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1 Hex
d020 [Analog In 0-10V] Related Parameter(s): A110, A111
The present value of the voltage at I/O Terminal 13 (100.0% = 10 volts).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
d021 [Analog In 4-20mA] Related Parameter(s): A112, A113
The present value of the current at I/O Terminal 15 (0.0% = 4mA, 100.0% = 20mA).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
d022 [Output Power]
Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Power × 2)
Display: 0.01 kW
d023 [Output Powr Fctr]
The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and motor current.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/180.0 deg
Display: 0.1 deg
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-8 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Display Group (continued)
d024 [Drive Temp]
Present operating temperature of the drive power section.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/120 degC
Display: 1 degC
d025 [Counter Status]
The current value of the counter when counter is enabled.
Values Default: Read only
Min/Max: 0/9999
Display: 1
d026 [Timer Status]
32 bit parameter.
The current value of the timer when timer is enabled.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.0/9999 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
32
d028 [Stp Logic Status]
When P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 6 “Stp Logic”, this parameter will display the current step of
the StepLogic profile as defined by parameters A140-A147 [Stp Logic x].
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0/7
Display: 1
d029 [Torque Current]
The current value of the motor torque current.
Values Default: Read Only
Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps × 2)
Display: 0.01 Amps
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-9
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Basic Program Group
P031 [Motor NP Volts] Related Parameter(s): d004, A084, A085, A086, A087
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated volts.
Values Default: Based on Drive Rating
Min/Max: 20/Drive Rated Volts
Display: 1 VAC
P032 [Motor NP Hertz] Related Parameter(s): A084, A085, A086, A087, A090
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Values Default: 60 Hz
Min/Max: 15/400 Hz
Display: 1 Hz
P033 [Motor OL Current] Related Parameter(s): A055, A058, A061, A089, A090,
A098, A114, A118
Set to the maximum allowable motor current.
The drive will fault on an F7 Motor Overload if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150% for 60
seconds.
Values Default: Based on Drive Rating
Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 2)
Display: 0.1 Amps
P034 [Minimum Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d013, P035, A085,
A086, A087, A110, A112
Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously.
Values Default: 0.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
P035 [Maximum Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d013, P034, A065,
A078, A085, A086, A087, A111, A113
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the highest frequency the drive will output.
Values Default: 60 Hz
Min/Max: 0/400 Hz
Display: 1 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-10 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Basic Program Group (continued)
P036 [Start Source] Related Parameter(s): d012, P037
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the control scheme used to start the drive.
Refer to Start and Speed Reference Control on page 1-23 for details about how other drive settings
can override the setting of this parameter.
Important: For all settings except option 3, the drive must receive a leading edge from the start input
for the drive to start after a stop input, loss of power or fault condition.
Options 0 “Keypad” (Default) • Integral keypad controls drive operation.
• I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop.
• When active, the Reverse key is also active unless
disabled by A095 [Reverse Disable].
1 “3-Wire” I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = stop according to the value set in
P037 [Stop Mode].
2 “2-Wire” I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop.
3 “2-W Lvl Sens” Drive will restart after a “Stop” command when:
• Stop is removed
and
• Start is held active
4 “2-W Hi Speed” Important: There is greater potential voltage on the output
terminals when using this option.
• Outputs are kept in a ready-to-run state. The drive will
respond to a “Start” command within 10 ms.
• I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop.
5 “Comm Port” • Remote communications. Refer to Appendix C for details.
• I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop.
6 “Momt FWD/REV” • Drive will start after a momentary input from either the
Run FWD Input (I/O Terminal 02) or the Run REV Input (I/
O Terminal 03).
• I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop.
!
ATTENTION: Hazard of injury exists due to unintended operation.
When P036 [Start Source] is set to option 3, and the Run input is
maintained, the Run inputs do not need to be toggled after a Stop input for
the drive to run again. A Stop function is provided only when the Stop input
is active (open).
22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-11
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Basic Program Group (continued)
P037 [Stop Mode] Related Parameter(s): P036, A080, A081, A082, A105, A160
Active stop mode for all stop sources [e.g. keypad, run forward (I/O Terminal 02), run reverse (I/O
Terminal 03), RS485 port] except as noted below.
Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a coast to stop input except when P036 [Start Source] is set for
“3-Wire” control. When in three wire control, I/O Terminal 01 is controlled by P037 [Stop Mode].
Hardware Enable Circuitry
By default, I/O Terminal 01 is a coast to stop input. The status of the input is interpreted by drive
software. If the application requires the drive to be disabled without software interpretation, a “dedicat-
ed” hardware enable configuration can be utilized. This is accomplished by removing the ENBL
enable jumper on the control board. In this case, the drive will always coast to a stop regardless of the
settings of P036 [Start Source] and P037 [Stop Mode].
Options 0 “Ramp, CF”(1)
(Default) Ramp to Stop. “Stop” command clears active fault.
1 “Coast, CF”(1)
Coast to Stop. “Stop” command clears active fault.
2 “DC Brake, CF”(1)
DC Injection Braking Stop. “Stop” command clears active
fault.
3 “DCBrkAuto,CF”(1)
DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.
• Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A080 [DC
Brake Time].
OR
• Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is
stopped.
“Stop” command clears active fault.
4 “Ramp” Ramp to Stop.
5 “Coast” Coast to Stop.
6 “DC Brake” DC Injection Braking Stop.
7 “DC BrakeAuto” DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff.
• Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A080 [DC
Brake Time].
OR
• Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. “Stop” Command
clears active fault.
9 “Ramp+EM Brk” Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control.
(1) Stop input also clears active fault.
22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-12 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Basic Program Group (continued)
P038 [Speed Reference] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d012, d020, d021, P039, P040,
A051-A054, A069, A070-A077, A110-A113, A123, A132, A140-A147, A150-A157
Sets the source of the speed reference to the drive.
The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is
normally determined by P038 [Speed Reference]. However, when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set
to option 2, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and the digital input is active, or if A132 [PID Ref Sel] is not set
to option 0, the speed reference commanded by P038 [Speed Reference] will be overridden. Refer to
the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on speed reference control priority.
Options 0 “Drive Pot” (Default) Frequency command from the potentiometer on the integral
keypad.
Important: This option is not available with IP66, NEMA/UL
Type 4X rated drives. Internal frequency command comes
from A069 [Internal Freq].
1 “InternalFreq”
(IP66, NEMA/UL Type
4X Default)
Internal frequency command from A069 [Internal Freq]. Must
be set when using MOP function.
2 “0-10V Input” External frequency command from the 0-10V or ±10V analog
input or remote potentiometer.
3 “4-20mA Input” External frequency command from the 4-20mA analog input.
4 “Preset Freq” External frequency command as defined by A070 - A077
[Preset Freq x] when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] are
programmed as “Preset Frequencies” and the digital inputs
are active.
5 “Comm Port” External frequency command from the communications port.
Refer to Appendix C for details.
6 “Stp Logic” External frequency command as defined by A070 - A077
[Preset Freq x] and A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x].
7 “Anlg In Mult” External frequency command as defined by the product of the
analog inputs (shown in d020 [Analog In 0-10V] and d021
[Analog In 4-20mA]).
[Analog In 0-10V] × [Analog In 4-20mA] = Speed Command
Example: 100% × 50% = 50%
P039 [Accel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P038, P040, A051-A054,
A067, A070-A077, A140-A147
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
Values Default: 10.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
Accel Rate=
Speed
0
Time
P035 [Maximum Freq]
P039 or A067
[Accel Time x]
P040 or A068
[Decel Time x]
0
Acceleration
Deceleration
22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-13
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Basic Program Group (continued)
P040 [Decel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, A051-A054,
A068, A070-A077, A140-A147
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
Values Default: 10.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
Decel Rate=
Speed
0
Time
P035 [Maximum Freq]
P039 or A067
[Accel Time x]
P040 or A068
[Decel Time x]
0
Acceleration
Deceleration
P041 [Reset To Defalts]
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets all parameter values to factory defaults.
Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default)
1 “Factory Rset” • After the reset function is complete, this parameter will set
itself back to “0”.
• Causes an F48 Params Defaulted fault.
P042 [Voltage Class]
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the voltage class of 600V drives.
Options 2 “Low Voltage” 480V
3 “High Voltage”
(Default)
600V
P043 [Motor OL Ret] Related Parameter(s): P033
Enables/disables the Motor Overload Retention function. When Enabled, the value held in the motor
overload counter is saved at power-down and restored at power-up. A change to this parameter
setting resets the counter.
Options 0 “Disabled” (Default)
1 “Enabled”
22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-14 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group
A051 [Digital In1 Sel]
(I/O Terminal 05)
A052 [Digital In2 Sel]
(I/O Terminal 06)
A053 [Digital In3 Sel]
(I/O Terminal 07)
A054 [Digital In4 Sel]
(I/O Terminal 08)
Related Parameter(s): d012, d014, P038, P039, P040,
A067, A068, A070-A077, A078, A079, A118, A140-A147
Selects the function for the digital inputs. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on
speed reference control priority.
Options 0 “Not Used” Terminal has no function but can be read over network
communications via d014 [Dig In Status].
1 “Acc & Dec 2” • When active, A067 [Accel Time 2] and A068 [Decel Time
2] are used for all ramp rates except Jog.
• Can only be tied to one input.
Refer to the flowchart on page 1-24 for more information on
Accel/Decel selection.
2 “Jog” • When input is present, drive accelerates according to the
value set in A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to the
value set in A078 [Jog Frequency].
• When input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to
the value set in A079 [Jog Accel/Decel].
• A valid “Start” command will override this input.
3 “Aux Fault” When enabled, an F2 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the
input is removed.
4 “Preset Freq”
(A051 & A052 Default)
Refer to A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x].
Important: Digital Inputs have priority for frequency control
when programmed as Preset Speed and are active. Refer to
the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on speed
reference control priority.
5 “Local”
(A053 Default)
When active, sets integral keypad as start source and
potentiometer on the integral keypad as speed source.
Important: Speed source for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated
drives comes from A069 [Internal Freq].
6 “Comm Port” • When active, sets communications device as default start/
speed command source.
• Can only be tied to one input.
7 “Clear Fault” When active, clears an active fault.
8 “RampStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately ramp to a stop regardless of how
P037 [Stop Mode] is set.
9 “CoastStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately coast to a stop regardless of
how P037 [Stop Mode] is set.
10 “DCInjStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop
regardless of how P037 [Stop Mode] is set.
11 “Jog Forward”
(A054 Default)
Drive accelerates to A078 [Jog Frequency] according to A079
[Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid start will override this command.
12 “Jog Reverse” Drive accelerates to A078 [Jog Frequency] according to A079
[Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to stop when input becomes
inactive. A valid start will override this command.
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-15
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
A051 -
A054
Options
(Cont.)
13 “10V In Ctrl” Selects 0-10V or ±10V control as the frequency reference.
Start source is not changed.
14 “20mA In Ctrl” Selects 4-20mA control as the frequency reference. Start
source is not changed.
15 “PID Disable” Disables PID function. Drive uses the next valid non-PID
speed reference.
16 “MOP Up” Increases the value of A069 [Internal Freq] at the current
Accel rate if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1
“InternalFreq”.
For IP20 rated drives, the default for A069 is 60.0 Hz.
For IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives, the default for A069 is
0.0 Hz.
17 “MOP Down” Decreases the value of A069 [Internal Freq] at the current
Decel rate if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1
“InternalFreq”.
For IP20 rated drives, the default for A069 is 60.0 Hz.
For IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives, the default for A069 is
0.0 Hz.
18 “Timer Start” Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control
the relay or opto outputs.
19 “Counter In” Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay
or opto outputs.
20 “Reset Timer” Clears the active timer.
21 “Reset Countr” Clears the active counter.
22 “Rset Tim&Cnt” Clears the active timer and counter.
23 “Logic In1” Logic function input number 1. May be used to control the
relay or opto outputs (see parameters A055, A058, A061
Options 11-14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic
parameters A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x].
24 “Logic In2” Logic function input number 2. May be used to control the
relay or opto outputs (see parameters A055, A058, A061
Options 11-14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic
parameters A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x].
25 “Current Lmt2” When active, A118 [Current Limit 2] determines the drive
current limit level.
26 “Anlg Invert” Inverts the scaling of the analog input levels set in
A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] or
A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] and A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
27 “EM Brk Rlse” If EM brake function is enabled, this input releases the brake.
!
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or
material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.
22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-16 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A055 [Relay Out Sel] Related Parameter(s): P033, A056, A092, A140-A147, A150-A157,
A160, A161
Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts.
Options 0 “Ready/Fault”
(Default)
Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates
that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to
shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs.
1 “At Frequency” Drive reaches commanded frequency.
2 “MotorRunning” Motor is receiving power from the drive.
3 “Reverse” Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.
4 “Motor Overld” Motor overload condition exists.
5 “Ramp Reg” Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel
times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
6 “Above Freq” • Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in A056 [Relay
Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
7 “Above Cur” • Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in A056
[Relay Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
Important: Value for A056 [Relay Out Level] must be entered
in percent of drive rated output current.
8 “Above DCVolt” • Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in A056
[Relay Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
9 “Retries Exst” Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
10 “Above Anlg V” • Analog input voltage (I/O Terminal 13) exceeds the value
set in A056 [Relay Out Level].
• DonotuseifA123 [10VBipolarEnbl]issetto1“Bi-PolarIn”.
• This parameter setting can also be used to indicate a PTC
trip point when the input (I/O Terminal 13) is wired to a
PTC and external resistor.
• Use A056 to set threshold.
11 “Logic In 1” An input is programmed as “Logic In 1” and is active.
12 “Logic In 2” An input is programmed as “Logic In 2” and is active.
13 “Logic 1 & 2” Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.
14 “Logic 1 or 2” One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is
active.
15 “StpLogic Out” Drive enters StepLogic step with Digit 3 of Command Word
(A140 - A147) set to enable StepLogic output.
16 “Timer Out” • Timer has reached value set in A056 [Relay Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
17 “Counter Out” • Counter has reached value set in A056 [Relay Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
18 “Above PF Ang” • Power Factor angle has exceeded the value set in A056
[Relay Out Level].
• Use A056 to set threshold.
22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-17
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
A055
Options
(Cont.)
19 “Anlg In Loss” Analog input loss has occurred. Program A122 [Analog In
Loss] for desired action when input loss occurs.
20 “ParamControl” Prior to FRN 4.01, this option enables the output to be
controlled over network communications by writing to A056
[Relay Out Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.)
With FRN 4.01 and later, the logic command word bit 15 has
full control of A056. See Writing (06) Logic Command
Data on page C-4.
21 “NonRec Fault” • Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
• A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] in not enabled.
• A Non-resettable fault has occurred.
22 “EM Brk Cntrl” EM brake is energized. Program A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] and
A161 [EM Brk On Delay] for desired action.
23 “Above Fcmd” The current commanded frequency exceeds the value set in
A056 [Relay Out Level].
24 “MsgControl” With FRN 4.01 and later, this option enables the output to be
controlled over network communications by writing to A056
[Relay Out Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.)
A056 [Relay Out Level] Related Parameter(s): A055
32 bit parameter.
Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of A055 [Relay Out Sel] is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17,
18 or 20.
With FRN 4.01 and later, when the value of A055 is set to 20, the logic command word bit 15 has full
control of A056.
Values Default: 0.0
Min/Max: 0.0/9999
Display: 0.1
32
A055 Setting A056 Min/Max
6
7
8
10
16
17
18
20
23
0/400 Hz
0/180%
0/815 Volts
0/100%
0.1/9999 Secs
1/9999 Counts
1/180 degs
0/1
0/400 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-18 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] Related Parameter(s): P033, A059, A062, A092, A122, A123,
A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] A160, A161, A140-A147, A150-A157
Determines the operation of the programmable opto outputs.
Options 0 “Ready/Fault” Opto outputs are active when power is applied. This indicates
that the drive is ready for operation. Opto outputs are inactive
when power is removed or a fault occurs.
1 “At Frequency”
(A061 Default)
Drive reaches commanded frequency.
2 “MotorRunning”
(A058 Default)
Motor is receiving power from the drive.
3 “Reverse” Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction.
4 “Motor Overld” Motor overload condition exists.
5 “Ramp Reg” Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel
times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from
occurring.
6 “Above Freq” • Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in A059 or
A062 [Opto Outx Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
7 “Above Cur” • Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in A059 or
A062 [Opto Outx Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
Important: Value for A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level] must be
entered in percent of drive rated output current.
8 “Above DCVolt” • Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in A059 or
A062 [Opto Outx Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
9 “Retries Exst” Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
10 “Above Anlg V” • Analog input voltage (I/O Terminal 13) exceeds the value
set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level].
• Do not use if A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 “Bi-Polar
In”.
• This parameter setting can also be used to indicate a PTC
trip point when the input (I/O Terminal 13) is wired to a
PTC and external resistor.
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
11 “Logic In 1” An input is programmed as “Logic In 1” and is active.
12 “Logic In 2” An input is programmed as “Logic In 2” and is active.
13 “Logic 1 & 2” Both Logic inputs are programmed and active.
14 “Logic 1 or 2” One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is
active.
15 “StpLogic Out” Drive enters StepLogic step with Digit 3 of Command Word
(A140 - A147) set to enable StepLogic output.
16 “Timer Out” • Timer has reached value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx
Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
17 “Counter Out” • Counter has reached value set in A059 or A062 [Opto
Outx Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-19
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
A058,
A061
Options
(Cont.)
18 “Above PF Ang” • Power Factor angle has exceeded the value set in A059 or
A062 [Opto Outx Level].
• Use A059 or A062 to set threshold.
19 “Anlg In Loss” Analog input loss has occurred. Program A122 [Analog In
Loss] for desired action when input loss occurs.
20 “ParamControl” Prior to FRN 4.01, this option enables the output to be
controlled over network communications by writing to A059 or
A062 [Opto Outx Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.)
With FRN 4.01 and later:
Setting this option for A058 means the logic command word
bit 6 has full control of A059.
Setting this option for A059 means the logic command word
bit 7 has full control of A062.
See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page C-4.
21 “NonRec Fault” • Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded.
• A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] in not enabled.
• A Non-resettable fault has occurred.
22 “EM Brk Cntrl” EM brake is energized. Program A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] and
A161 [EM Brk On Delay] for desired action.
23 “Above Fcmd” The current commanded frequency exceeds the value set in
A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level].
24 “MsgControl” With FRN 4.01 and later:
Enables the output to be controlled over the network
communications by writing to A059 or A062 [Opto Outx
Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.)
A059 [Opto Out1 Level] Related Parameter(s): A058, A061
A062 [Opto Out2 Level]
32 bit parameter.
Determines the on/off point for the opto outputs when A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] is set to option 6,
7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18 or 20.
With FRN 4.01 and later, when the value of A058 is set to 20, the logic command word bit 6 has full
control of A059 and when the value of A061 is set to 20, bit 7 has full control of A062.
Values Default: 0.0
Min/Max: 0.0/9999
Display: 0.1
32
A058 & A061 Setting A059 & A062 Min/Max
6
7
8
10
16
17
18
20
23
0/400 Hz
0/180%
0/815 Volts
0/100%
0.1/9999 Secs
1/9999 Counts
1/180 degs
0/1
0/400 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-20 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A064 [Opto Out Logic]
Determines the logic (Normally Open/NO or Normally Closed/NC) of the opto outputs.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/3
Display: 1
A064 Option Opto Out1 Logic Opto Out2 Logic
0
1
2
3
NO (Normally Open)
NC (Normally Closed)
NO (Normally Open)
NC (Normally Closed)
NO (Normally Open)
NO (Normally Open)
NC (Normally Closed)
NC (Normally Closed)
A065 [Analog Out Sel] Related Parameter(s): P035, A066
Sets the analog output signal mode (0-10V, 0-20mA, or 4-20mA). The output is used to provide a
signal that is proportional to several drive conditions.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/23
Display: 1
Option
Output
Range
Minimum Output
Value
Maximum Output Value
A066 [Analog Out High]
DIP Switch
Position
Related
Parameter
0 “OutFreq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-10V d001
1 “OutCurr 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-10V d003
2 “OutVolt 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-10V d004
3 “OutPowr 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-10V d022
4 “TstData 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-10V d019
5 “OutFreq 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20mA d001
6 “OutCurr 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-20mA d003
7 “OutVolt 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-20mA d004
8 “OutPowr 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-20mA d022
9 “TstData 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-20mA d019
10 “OutFreq 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20mA d001
11 “OutCurr 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-20mA d003
12 “OutVolt 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-20mA d004
13 “OutPowr 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-20mA d022
14 “TstData 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-20mA d019
15 “OutTorq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-10V d029
16 “OutTorq 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-20 mA d029
17 “OutTorq 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-20 mA d029
18 “Setpnt 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-10V A109
19 “Setpnt 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-20 mA A109
20 “Setpnt 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-20 mA A109
21 “MinFreq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-10V d001
22 “MinFreq 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20 mA d001
23 “MinFreq 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20 mA d001
22B-UM001.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-21
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A066 [Analog Out High] Related Parameter(s): A065
Scales the Maximum Output Value for the A065 [Analog Out Sel] source setting.
Examples:
Values Default: 100%
Min/Max: 0/800%
Display: 1%
A066 Setting A065 Setting A065 Max. Output Value
50% 1 “OutCurr 0-10” 5V for 200% Drive Rated Output Current
90% 8 “OutPowr 0-20” 18mA for 200% Drive Rated Power
A067 [Accel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P039, A051-A054, A070-A077, A140-A147
When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except jog. Refer to the flowchart on
page 1-24 for details.
Values Default: 20.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
Accel Rate=
Speed
0
Time
P035 [Maximum Freq]
P039 or A067
[Accel Time x]
P040 or A068
[Decel Time x]
0
Acceleration
Deceleration
22B-UM001.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-22 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A068 [Decel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P040, A051-A054, A070-A077, A140-A147
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except jog. Refer to the flowchart
on page 1-24 for details.
Values Default: 20.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
Decel Rate=
Speed
0
Time
P035 [Maximum Freq]
P039 or A067
[Accel Time x]
P040 or A068
[Decel Time x]
0
Acceleration
Deceleration
A069 [Internal Freq] Related Parameter(s): P038, A162
Provides the frequency command to the drive when P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1 “Internal
Freq”. When enabled, this parameter will change the frequency command in “real time” using the
integral keypad Up Arrow or Down Arrow when in program mode.
Important: Once the desired command frequency is reached, the Enter key must be pressed to store
this value to EEPROM memory. If the ESC key is used before the Enter key, the frequency will return
to the original value following the normal accel/decel curve.
If A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 16 “MOP Up” or 17 “MOP Down” this parameter acts as the
MOP frequency reference.
Values Default: 60.0 Hz for IP20 rated drives
0.0 Hz for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-23
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A070 [Preset Freq 0](1)
A071 [Preset Freq 1]
A072 [Preset Freq 2]
A073 [Preset Freq 3]
A074 [Preset Freq 4]
A075 [Preset Freq 5]
A076 [Preset Freq 6]
A077 [Preset Freq 7]
Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, P040, A051-A053,
A067, A068, A140-A147, A150-A157
Values A070 Default:(1)
A071 Default:
A072 Default:
A073 Default:
A074 Default:
A075 Default:
A076 Default:
A077 Default:
0.0 Hz
5.0 Hz
10.0 Hz
20.0 Hz
30.0 Hz
40.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
60.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
Provides a fixed frequency command value when A051 - A053 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 4 “Preset
Frequencies”.
An active preset input will override speed command as shown in the flowchart on page 1-23.
(1)
To activate A070 [Preset Freq 0] set P038 [Speed Reference] to option 4 “Preset Freq 0-3”.
Input State
of Digital In 1
(I/O Terminal 05
when A051 = 4)
Input State
of Digital In 2
(I/O Terminal 06
when A052 = 4)
Input State
of Digital In 3
(I/O Terminal 07
when A053 = 4) Frequency Source Accel / Decel Parameter Used(2)
0 0 0 A070 [Preset Freq 0] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1]
1 0 0 A071 [Preset Freq 1] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1]
0 1 0 A072 [Preset Freq 2] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2]
1 1 0 A073 [Preset Freq 3] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2]
0 0 1 A074 [Preset Freq 4] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1]
1 0 1 A075 [Preset Freq 5] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1]
0 1 1 A076 [Preset Freq 6] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2]
1 1 1 A077 [Preset Freq 7] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2]
(2) When a Digital Input is set to “Accel 2 & Decel 2”, and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this
table.
A078 [Jog Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P035, A051-A054, A079
Sets the output frequency when a jog command is issued.
Values Default: 10.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/[Maximum Freq]
Display: 0.1 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-24 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] Related Parameter(s): A078, A051-A054
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued.
Values Default: 10.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A080 [DC Brake Time] Related Parameter(s): P037, A081
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is “injected” into the motor. Refer to parameter A081 [DC
Brake Level].
Values Default: 0.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/99.9 Secs (A setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
Display: 0.1 Secs
A081 [DC Brake Level] Related Parameter(s): P037, A080
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when P037 [Stop Mode] is set
to either “Ramp” or “DC Brake”.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 0.05
Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 1.8)
Display: 0.1 Amps
P037 DC Injection Braking Mode
Volts/Speed
Voltage
Time
Stop Command
Speed
[DC Brake Level]
[DC Brake Time]
Volts/Speed
P037 Ramp-to-Stop Mode
Time
Stop Command
[DC Brake Level]
[DC Brake Time]
Voltage
Speed
!
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists,
an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.
!
ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent
magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
22B-UM001.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-25
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A082 [DB Resistor Sel] Related Parameter(s): P037
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables external dynamic braking.
The drive is able to provide full braking indefinitely. Braking power is limited by the external DB
resistor. When this parameter is set to 1 “Normal RA Res” and an appropriate resistor is used (see
selection Table B.C), the drive provides calculated resistor overload protection. However, the drive
cannot protect against a brake IGBT failure.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/99
Display: 1
Setting Min/Max
0
1
2
3-99
“Disabled”
“Normal RA Res” (5% Duty Cycle) – Refer to Table B.C on page B-2.
“NoProtection” (100% Duty Cycle)
“x%Duty Cycle” Limited (3% – 99% of Duty Cycle)
!
ATTENTION: A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected. The
external resistor package must be self-protected from over temperature or the protective
circuit shown in Figure B.9 on page B-13, or equivalent, must be supplied.
A083 [S Curve %]
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to the ramp as S Curve. Time
is added, 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end of the ramp.
Values Default: 0% (Disabled)
Min/Max: 0/100%
Display: 1%
Example:
Accel Time = 10 Seconds
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 × 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time
50% S Curve
Target
Target/2
Accel Time
10 Seconds
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
22B-UM001.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-26 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A084 [Boost Select] Related Parameter(s): d004, P031, P032, A085,
A086, A087, A125
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve.
Active when A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”.
Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected.
Options 0 “Custom V/Hz”
1 “30.0, VT”
Variable Torque (Typical fan/pump curves.)
2 “35.0, VT”
3 “40.0, VT”
4 “45.0, VT”
5 “0.0 no IR”
Constant Torque
6 “0.0”
7 “2.5, CT”
[Default for
4.0, 5.5, 7.5 & 11 kW
(5.0, 7.5, 10 & 15 HP)
Drives]
8 “5.0, CT” (Default)
9 “7.5, CT”
10 “10.0, CT”
11 “12.5, CT”
12 “15.0, CT”
13 “17.5, CT”
14 “20.0, CT”
% P032 [Motor NP Hertz]
%P031[MotorNPVolts]
100
50
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
1/2
[MotorNPHertz]
4
3
2
1
0 50 100
Settings
5-14
22B-UM001.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-27
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A085 [Start Boost] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035,
A084, A086, A087, A088, A125
Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when A084
[Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz” and A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”.
Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected.
Values Default: 2.5%
Min/Max: 0.0/25.0%
Display: 0.1%
Frequency
Voltage
A087 [Break Frequency] P032 [Motor NP Hertz]
P035 [Maximum Freq]
A085[StartBoost]
P031 [Motor NP Volts]
A088 [Maximum Voltage]
A086[BreakVoltage]
A034 [Minimum Freq]
A086 [Break Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035,
A084, A085, A087, A088, A125
Sets the frequency where break voltage is applied when A084 [Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz” and
A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”
Values Default: 25.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A087 [Break Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035,
A084, A085, A086, A088, A125
Sets the frequency where break frequency is applied when A084 [Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz”
and A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”
Values Default: 15.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-28 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A088 [Maximum Voltage] Related Parameter(s): d004, A085, A086, A087
Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
Values Default: Drive Rated Volts
Min/Max: 20/Drive Rated Volts
Display: 1 VAC
A089 [Current Limit 1] Related Parameter(s): P033, A118
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 1.5
Min/Max: 0.1/Drive Rated Amps × 1.8
Display: 0.1 Amps
A090 [Motor OL Select] Related Parameter(s): P032, P033
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Settings 0-2 select the derating factor for the I2
t
overload function.
Options 0 “No Derate” (Default)
1 “Min Derate”
2 “Max Derate”
Min Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
No Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
%ofP033[MotorOLCurent]
Max Derate
0
80
100
60
40
20
0 2001751501251007550250 200175150125100755025 0 200175150125100755025
A091 [PWM Frequency] Related Parameter(s): A124
Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform. The chart below provides derating
guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting.
Important: Ignoring derating guidelines can cause reduced drive performance.
Values Default: 4.0 kHz
Min/Max: 2.0/16.0 kHz
Display: 0.1 kHz
68
84
88
80
76
96
100
92
72
64
60
56
52
87654321 1514 16131211109
22B-UM001.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-29
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] Related Parameter(s): A055, A058, A061, A093
Sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”.
2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than “0”.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault without restarting the drive.
1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”.
2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to “0”.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/9
Display: 1
!
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter
is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering
applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry
guidelines.
A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] Related Parameter(s): A092
Sets the time between restart attempts when A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value other than zero.
Values Default: 1.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/300.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A094 [Start At PowerUp]
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to
resume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored. Requires a digital input
configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact.
This parameter will not function if parameter P036 [Start Source] is set to 4 “2-W High Speed”.
Options 0 “Disabled” (Default)
1 “Enabled”
!
ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter
is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering
applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry
guidelines.
22B-UM001.book Page 29 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-30 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A095 [Reverse Disable] Related Parameter(s): d006
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of motor rotation to be changed. The reverse
command may come from a digital command, the keypad or a serial command. All reverse inputs
including two-wire Run Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled.
Options 0 “Rev Enabled”
(Default)
1 “Rev Disabled”
A096 [Flying Start En]
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
Options 0 “Disabled” (Default)
1 “Enabled”
A097 [Compensation]
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability.
Options 0 “Disabled”
1 “Electrical” (Default) Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities
which are exhibited as non-sinusodial motor currents. This
setting attempts to correct this condition.
2 “Mechanical” Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances
which can be excited by the drive current regulator. This
setting slows down the current regulator response and
attempts to correct this condition.
3 “Both”
A098 [SW Current Trip] Related Parameter(s): P033
Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip.
Values Default: 0.0 (Disabled)
Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 2)
Display: 0.1 Amps
A099 [Process Factor] Related Parameter(s): d010
Scales the output frequency value displayed by d010 [Process Display].
Values Default: 30.0
Min/Max: 0.1/999.9
Display: 0.1
Output
Freq
Process
Factor
Process
Display=x
22B-UM001.book Page 30 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-31
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A100 [Fault Clear]
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. Used primarily to clear a fault over network
communications.
Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default)
1 “Reset Fault”
2 “Clear Buffer” (Parameters d007-d009 [Fault x Code])
A101 [Program Lock]
Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel.
Options 0 “Unlocked” (Default)
1 “Locked”
A102 [Testpoint Sel] Related Parameter(s): d019
Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel.
Values Default: 400
Min/Max: 0/FFFF
Display: 1 Hex
A103 [Comm Data Rate] Related Parameter(s): d015
Sets the serial port rate for the RS485 (DSI) port.
Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation.
Options 0 “1200”
1 “2400”
2 “4800”
3 “9600” (Default)
4 “19.2K”
5 “38.4K”
A104 [Comm Node Addr] Related Parameter(s): d015
Sets the drive node address for the RS485 (DSI) port if using a network connection.
Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation.
Values Default: 100
Min/Max: 1/247
Display: 1
22B-UM001.book Page 31 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-32 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A105 [Comm Loss Action] Related Parameter(s): d015, P037, A106
Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication
errors.
Options 0 “Fault” (Default) Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop.
1 “Coast Stop” Stops drive via coast to stop.
2 “Stop” Stops drive via P037 [Stop Mode] setting.
3 “Continu Last” Drive continues operating at communication commanded
speed saved in RAM.
A106 [Comm Loss Time] Related Parameter(s): d015, A105
Sets the time that the drive will remain in communication loss before implementing the option selected
in A105 [Comm Loss Action].
Values Default: 5.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.1/60.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A107 [Comm Format] Related Parameter(s): d015
Selects the protocol (RTU only), data bits (8 data bits only), parity (None, Even, Odd), and stop bits (1
stop bit only) used by the RS485 port on the drive.
Refer to Appendix C for details on using the drive communication features.
Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation.
Options 0 “RTU 8-N-1” (Default)
1 “RTU 8-E-1”
2 “RTU 8-O-1”
3 “RTU 8-N-2”
4 “RTU 8-E-2”
5 “RTU 8-O-2”
A108 [Language]
Selects the language displayed by the remote communications option.
Options 1 “English” (Default)
2 “Français”
3 “Español”
4 “Italiano”
5 “Deutsch”
6 “Reserved”
7 “Português”
8 “Reserved”
9 “Reserved”
10 “Nederlands”
22B-UM001.book Page 32 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-33
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A109 [Anlg Out Setpt] Related Parameter(s): A065
When A065 [Analog Out Sel] is set to option 18, 19 or 20, this parameter sets the percentage of
analog output desired.
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] Related Parameter(s): d020, P034, P038, A122
Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P034 [Minimum Freq] if a 0-10V input is used by P038
[Speed Reference].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi].
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
0
P035 [Maximum Freq]
P034 [Minimum Freq]
A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi]
0
Speed Reference
A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] Related Parameter(s): d020, P035, P038, A122, A123
Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P035 [Maximum Freq] if a 0-10V input is used by P038
[Speed Reference].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo].
Values Default: 100.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] Related Parameter(s): d021, P034, P038
Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P034 [Minimum Freq] if a 4-20mA input is used by
P038 [Speed Reference].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi].
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
22B-UM001.book Page 33 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-34 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi] Related Parameter(s): d021, P035, P038
Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P035 [Maximum Freq] if a 4-20mA input is used by
P038 [Speed Reference].
Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo].
Values Default: 100.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A114 [Slip Hertz @ FLA] Related Parameter(s): P033
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded
output frequency based on motor current.
Values Default: 2.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/10.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
A115 [Process Time Lo] Related Parameter(s): d010, P034
Scales the time value when the drive is running at P034 [Minimum Freq]. When set to a value other
than zero, d010 [Process Display] indicates the duration of the process.
Values Default: 0.00
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
A116 [Process Time Hi] Related Parameter(s): d010, P035
Scales the time value when the drive is running at P035 [Maximum Freq]. When set to a value other
than zero, d010 [Process Display] indicates the duration of the process.
Values Default: 0.00
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
A117 [Bus Reg Mode]
Controls the operation of the drive voltage regulation, which is normally operational at decel or when
the bus voltage rises.
Refer to the Attention statement on page P-3 for important information on bus regulation.
Options 0 “Disabled”
1 “Enabled” (Default)
A118 [Current Limit 2] Related Parameter(s): P033, A051-A054, A089
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs. This parameter is only active if
A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 25 “Current Lmt2” and is active.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 1.5
Min/Max: 0.1/(Drive Rated Amps × 1.8)
Display: 0.1 Amps
22B-UM001.book Page 34 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-35
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A119 [Skip Frequency] Related Parameter(s): A120
Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.
A setting of 0 disables this parameter.
Values Default: 0 Hz
Min/Max: 0/400 Hz
Display: 1 Hz
A120 [Skip Freq Band] Related Parameter(s): A119
Determines the bandwidth around A119 [Skip Frequency]. A120 [Skip Frequency Band] is split
applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency.
A setting of 0.0 disables this parameter.
Values Default: 0.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/30.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
Frequency
Time
Skip Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
2x Skip
Frequency Band
A121 [Stall Fault Time]
Sets the time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued.
Options 0 “60 Seconds” (Default)
1 “120 Seconds”
2 “240 Seconds”
3 “360 Seconds”
4 “480 Seconds”
5 “Flt Disabled”
22B-UM001.book Page 35 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-36 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A122 [Analog In Loss] Related Parameter(s): A110, A111, A132
Selects drive action when an input signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an analog signal
less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normal operation resumes when the input signal
level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or 3mA. If using a 0-10V analog input, set A110 [Anlg In 0-10V
Lo] to a minimum of 20% (i.e. 2 volts).
Options 0 “Disabled” (Default)
1 “Fault (F29)” F29 Analog Input Loss
2 “Stop” Uses P037 [Stop Mode]
3 “Zero Ref” Drive runs at zero speed reference.
4 “Min Freq Ref” Drive runs at minimum frequency.
5 “Max Freq Ref” Drive runs at maximum frequency.
6 “Int Freq Ref” Drive runs at internal frequency.
A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl] Related Parameter(s): P038, A111
Enables/disables bipolar control. In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference.
Options 0 “Uni-Polar In” (Default) 0 to 10V only
1 “Bi-Polar In” ±10V
A124 [Var PWM Disable] Related Parameter(s): A091
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by
A091 [PWM Frequency].
Disabling this feature when low frequency conditions exist may result in IGBT stress and nuisance
tripping.
Options 0 “Enabled” (Default)
1 “Disabled”
A125 [Torque Perf Mode] Related Parameter(s): A084, A085, A086, A087, A127
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation.
Options 0 “V/Hz”
1 “Sensrls Vect” (Default)
A126 [Motor NP FLA] Related Parameter(s): A127
Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps.
Values Default: Drive Rated Amps
Min/Max: 0.1/(Drive Rated Amps × 2)
Display: 0.1 Amps
22B-UM001.book Page 36 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-37
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A127 [Autotune] Related Parameter(s): A125, A126, A128, A129
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Provides an automatic method for setting A128 [IR Voltage Drop] and A129 [Flux Current Ref], which
affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter A126 [Motor NP FLA] must be set to the motor
nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure.
Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default)
1 “Static Tune”
2 “Rotate Tune”
“Ready” (0) = Parameter returns to this setting following a “Static Tune” or “Rotate Tune.”
“Static Tune” (1) = A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for
the best possible automatic setting of A128 [IR Voltage Drop]. A start command is required following
initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to “Ready” (0) following the test, at which time another
start transition is required operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled
from the load.
“Rotate Tune” (2) = A temporary command that initiates a “Static Tune” followed by a rotational test
for the best possible automatic setting of A129 [Flux Current Ref]. A start command is required
following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to “Ready” (0) following the test, at which time
another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Important: Used when motor
is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this
procedure.
If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed.
!
ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this
procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is
recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
A128 [IR Voltage Drop] Related Parameter(s): A127
Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator.
Values Default: Based on Drive Rating
Min/Max: 0.0/230.0 VAC
Display: 0.1 VAC
A129 [Flux Current Ref] Related Parameter(s): A127
Value of amps for full motor flux.
Values Default: Based on Drive Rating
Min/Max: 0.00/[Motor NP FLA]
Display: 0.01 Amps
22B-UM001.book Page 37 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-38 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A130 [PID Trim Hi]
Sets the maximum positive value that is added to the speed reference when PID trim is used.
Values Default: 60.0
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0
Display: 0.1
A131 [PID Trim Lo]
Sets the maximum positive value that is subtracted from the PID reference when PID trim is used.
Values Default: 0.0
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0
Display: 0.1
A132 [PID Ref Sel] Related Parameter(s): P038, A122
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference. Refer to Appendix F for
details.
Options 0 “PID Disabled”
(Default)
1 “PID Setpoint”
2 “0-10V Input”
3 “4-20mA Input”
4 “Comm Port”
5 “Setpnt, Trim”
6 “0-10V, Trim”
7 “4-20mA, Trim”
8 “Comm, Trim”
A133 [PID Feedback Sel]
Select the source of the PID feedback. Refer to Appendix F for details.
Options 0 “0-10V Input” (Default) The PID will not function with a bipolar input. Negative
voltages are treated as 0 volts.
1 “4-20mA Input”
2 “Comm Port”
A134 [PID Prop Gain]
Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref
Sel].
Values Default: 0.01
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99
Display: 0.01
22B-UM001.book Page 38 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-39
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A135 [PID Integ Time]
Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref Sel].
Values Default: 0.1 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A136 [PID Diff Rate]
Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref
Sel].
Values Default: 0.01 (1/Secs)
Min/Max: 0.00/99.99 (1/Secs)
Display: 0.01 (1/Secs)
A137 [PID Setpoint]
Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref
Sel].
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/100.0%
Display: 0.1%
A138 [PID Deadband]
Sets the lower limit of the PID output.
Values Default: 0.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/10.0%
Display: 0.1%
A139 [PID Preload]
Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable.
Values Default: 0.0 Hz
Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz
Display: 0.1 Hz
22B-UM001.book Page 39 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-40 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A140 [Stp Logic 0]
A141 [Stp Logic 1]
A142 [Stp Logic 2]
A143 [Stp Logic 3]
A144 [Stp Logic 4]
A145 [Stp Logic 5]
A146 [Stp Logic 6]
A147 [Stp Logic 7]
Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, P040, A051-A054,
A055, A058, A061, A067, A068, A070-A077, A150-A157
Values Default: 00F1
Min/Max: 0001/bAFF
Display: 4 Digits
Parameters A140-A147 are only active if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 6 “Stp Logic”.
These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands. Each “step” can
be based on time, status of a Logic input or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input.
Digits 0-3 for each [Stp Logic x] parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile.
A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, parameters A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel], to 23
“Logic In1” and/or 24 “Logic In2”.
A time interval between steps can be programmed using parameters A150 - A157 [Stp Logic Time x].
See the table below for related parameters.
The speed for any step is programmed using parameters A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x].
How StepLogic Works
The StepLogic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with
A140 [Stp Logic 0].
Digit 0: Logic For Next Step
This digit defines the logic for the next step. When the condition is met the program advances to the
next step. Step 0 follows Step 7. Example: Digit 0 is set 3. When “Logic In2” becomes active, the
program advances to the next step.
Digit 1: Logic to Jump to a Different Step
For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the
step defined by Digit 2.
Digit 2: Different Step to Jump
When the condition for Digit 1 is met, the Digit 2 setting determines the next step or to end the program.
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
StepLogic Parameter
(Active when P038 = 6 “Stp Logic”)
Related Preset Frequency Parameter
(Can be activated independent of
StepLogic Parameters)
Related StepLogic Time Parameter
(Active when A140-A147 Digit 0 or 1
are set to 1, b, C, d or E)
A140 [Stp Logic 0] A070 [Preset Freq 0] A150 [Stp Logic Time 0]
A141 [Stp Logic 1] A071 [Preset Freq 1] A151 [Stp Logic Time 1]
A142 [Stp Logic 2] A072 [Preset Freq 2] A152 [Stp Logic Time 2]
A143 [Stp Logic 3] A073 [Preset Freq 3] A153 [Stp Logic Time 3]
A144 [Stp Logic 4] A074 [Preset Freq 4] A154 [Stp Logic Time 4]
A145 [Stp Logic 5] A075 [Preset Freq 5] A155 [Stp Logic Time 5]
A146 [Stp Logic 6] A076 [Preset Freq 6] A156 [Stp Logic Time 6]
A147 [Stp Logic 7] A077 [Preset Freq 7] A157 [Stp Logic Time 7]
22B-UM001.book Page 40 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-41
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Digit 3: Step Settings
This digit defines what accel/decel profile the speed command will follow and the direction of the
command for the current step. In addition, if a relay or opto output (parameters A055, A058 and A061)
is set to 15 “StpLogic Out”, this parameter can control the status of that output.
Any StepLogic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output, but you can not
control different outputs based on the condition of different StepLogic commands.
StepLogic Settings
The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each StepLogic parameter. The
following is a listing of the available settings for each digit.
Refer to Appendix E for details.
Logic For Next Step Digit 0
Logic to Jump to a Different Step Digit 1
Different Step to Jump Digit 2
Step Settings Digit 3
Digit 3 Settings
Required
Setting
Accel/Decel
Param. Used
StepLogic
Output State
Commanded
Direction
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
b
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 1
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Accel/Decel 2
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
FWD
REV
No Output
Digit 2 Settings Digit 1 and Digit 0 Settings
0 = Jump to Step 0
1 = Jump to Step 1
2 = Jump to Step 2
3 = Jump to Step 3
4 = Jump to Step 4
5 = Jump to Step 5
6 = Jump to Step 6
7 = Jump to Step 7
8 = End Program (Normal Stop)
9 = End Program (Coast to Stop)
A = End Program and Fault (F2)
0 = Skip Step (Jump Immediately)
1 = Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x]
2 = Step if “Logic In1” is Active
3 = Step if “Logic In2” is Active
4 = Step if “Logic In1” is Not Active
5 = Step if “Logic In2” is Not Active
6 = Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is Active
7 = Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is Active
8 = Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is Active
9 = Step if “Logic In1” is Active and “Logic In2” is Not Active
A = Step if “Logic In2” is Active and “Logic In1” is Not Active
b = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is Active
C = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is Active
d = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is Not Active
E = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is Not Active
F = Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings
22B-UM001.book Page 41 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-42 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A150 [Stp Logic Time 0]
A151 [Stp Logic Time 1]
A152 [Stp Logic Time 2]
A153 [Stp Logic Time 3]
A154 [Stp Logic Time 4]
A155 [Stp Logic Time 5]
A156 [Stp Logic Time 6]
A157 [Stp Logic Time 7]
Related Parameter(s): P038, A055, A058, A061,
A070-A077, A140-A147
Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding StpLogic command word is set to “Step after
Time”.
Values Default: 30.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] Related Parameter(s): P037
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before the relay or an opto output is energized
and the drive ramps to the commanded frequency.
The relay or opto output is typically connected to a user-supplied electromechanical brake coil relay.
Set P037 [Stop Mode] to 8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” or 9 “Ramp+EM Brk” to enable the electromechanical
brake option.
Set A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] to 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” to control brake
operation.
Values Default: 2.00 Secs
Min/Max: 0.01/10.00 Secs
Display: 0.01 Secs
Frequency
Time
Minimum Freq
A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] A161 [EM Brk On Delay]
Stop
Commanded
Start
Commanded
EM Brk
De-Energized (On)
Drive StopsEM Brk
Energized (Off)
RampAccel
Ramp Decel
22B-UM001.book Page 42 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-43
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A161 [EM Brk On Delay] Related Parameter(s): P037
Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before the relay or an opto output is
de-energizing and the drive stops.
The relay or opto output is typically connected to a user-supplied electromechanical brake coil relay.
Set P037 [Stop Mode] to 8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” or 9 “Ramp+EM Brk” to enable the electromechanical
brake option.
Set A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] to 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” to control brake
operation.
Values Default: 2.00 Secs
Min/Max: 0.01/10.00 Secs
Display: 0.01 Secs
A162 [MOP Reset Sel] Related Parameter(s): A069
Set the drive to save the current MOP reference command.
Options 0 “Zero MOP Ref” This option clamps A069 [Internal Freq] at 0.0 Hz when the
drive is not running.
1 “Save MOP Ref”
(Default)
Reference is saved in A069 [Internal Freq].
A163 [DB Threshold] Related Parameter(s): P037, A080, A081, A082
Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus voltage falls below the
value set in this parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not turn on. Lower values will make the Dynamic
Braking function more responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation.
Values Default 100.0%
Min/Max: 0.0/110.0%
Display: 0.0%
!
ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set a
value that causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power.
Parameter settings less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure
that the dynamic brake resistor’s wattage rating is not exceeded. In general,
values less than 90% are not needed. This parameter’s setting is especially
important if parameter A082 [DB Resistor Sel] is set to 2 “No Protection”.
22B-UM001.book Page 43 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-44 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Advanced Program Group (continued)
A164 [Comm Write Mode]
Determines whether parameter changes made over communication port are saved and stored in
Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) or RAM only. If they are stored in RAM, the values will be lost at
power-down.
Options 0 “Save” (Default)
1 “RAM Only”
!
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If a controller is programmed to
write parameter data to Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly
exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that
frequently uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless A164
[Comm Write Mode] is set to option 1.
A165 [Anlg Loss Delay] Related Parameter(s): A122
Sets the length of time after power-up during which the drive will not detect an analog signal loss. The
drive response to an analog signal loss is set in A122 [Analog In Loss].
Values Default: 0.0 Secs
Min/Max: 0.0/20.0 Secs
Display: 0.1 Secs
A166 [Analog In Filter]
Sets level of additional filtering of the analog input signals. A higher number increases filtering and
decreases bandwidth. Each setting doubles the applied filtering (1 = 2x filter, 2 = 4x filter, etc...). No
additional filtering is applied when set to “0”.
Values Default: 0
Min/Max: 0/14
Display: 1
A167 [PID Invert Error]
When set to “Inverted”, changes the sign of the PID error. This causes an increase in the drive output
frequency with PID Feedback greater than PID Setpoint, and a decrease in drive output frequency
with PID Feedback less than PID Setpoint.
Options 0 “Not Inverted” (Default)
1 “Inverted”
22B-UM001.book Page 44 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Programming and Parameters 3-45
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Parameter Cross Reference – by Name
Parameter Name No. Group
10V Bipolar Enbl A123 Advanced Program
Accel Time 1 P039 Basic Program
Accel Time 2 A067 Advanced Program
Analog In 0-10V d020 Display
Analog In 4-20mA d021 Display
Analog In Filter A166 Advanced Program
Analog In Loss A122 Advanced Program
Analog Out High A066 Advanced Program
Analog Out Sel A065 Advanced Program
Anlg In 0-10V Hi A111 Advanced Program
Anlg In 0-10V Lo A110 Advanced Program
Anlg In4-20mA Hi A113 Advanced Program
Anlg In4-20mA Lo A112 Advanced Program
Anlg Loss Delay A166 Advanced Program
Anlg Out Setpt A109 Advanced Program
Auto Rstrt Delay A093 Advanced Program
Auto Rstrt Tries A092 Advanced Program
Autotune A127 Advanced Program
Boost Select A084 Advanced Program
Break Frequency A087 Advanced Program
Break Voltage A086 Advanced Program
Bus Reg Mode A117 Advanced Program
Comm Data Rate A103 Advanced Program
Comm Format A107 Advanced Program
Comm Loss Action A105 Advanced Program
Comm Loss Time A106 Advanced Program
Comm Node Addr A104 Advanced Program
Comm Status d015 Display
Comm Write Mode A164 Advanced Program
Commanded Freq d002 Display
Compensation A097 Advanced Program
Contrl In Status d013 Display
Control Source d012 Display
Control SW Ver d016 Display
Counter Status d025 Display
Current Limit x A089, A118 Advanced Program
DB Resistor Sel A082 Advanced Program
DB Threshold A163 Advanced Program
DC Brake Level A081 Advanced Program
DC Brake Time A080 Advanced Program
DC Bus Voltage d005 Display
Decel Time 1 P040 Basic Program
Decel Time 2 A068 Advanced Program
Dig In Status d014 Display
Digital Inx Sel A051-A054 Advanced Program
Drive Status d006 Display
Drive Temp d024 Display
Drive Type d017 Display
Elapsed Run Time d018 Display
EM Brk Off Delay A160 Advanced Program
EM Brk On Delay A161 Advanced Program
Fault Clear A100 Advanced Program
Fault x Code d007-d009 Display
Flux Current Ref A129 Advanced Program
Flying Start En A096 Advanced Program
Internal Freq A069 Advanced Program
IR Voltage Drop A128 Advanced Program
Jog Accel/Decel A079 Advanced Program
Jog Frequency A078 Advanced Program
Language A108 Advanced Program
Maximum Freq P035 Basic Program
Maximum Voltage A088 Advanced Program
Minimum Freq P034 Basic Program
MOP Reset Sel A162 Advanced Program
Motor NP FLA A126 Advanced Program
Motor NP Hertz P032 Basic Program
Motor NP Volts P031 Basic Program
Motor OL Current P033 Basic Program
Motor OL Ret P043 Basic Program
Motor OL Select A090 Advanced Program
Opto Out Logic A064 Advanced Program
Opto Outx Level A059, A062 Advanced Program
Opto Outx Sel A058, A061 Advanced Program
Output Current d003 Display
Output Freq d001 Display
Output Power d022 Display
Output Powr Fctr d023 Display
Output Voltage d004 Display
PID Deadband A138 Advanced Program
PID Diff Rate A136 Advanced Program
PID Feedback Sel A133 Advanced Program
PID Integ Time A135 Advanced Program
PID Invert Error A167 Advanced Program
PID Preload A139 Advanced Program
PID Prop Gain A134 Advanced Program
PID Ref Sel A132 Advanced Program
PID Setpoint A137 Advanced Program
PID Trim Hi A130 Advanced Program
PID Trim Lo A131 Advanced Program
Preset Freq x A070-A077 Advanced Program
Process Display d010 Display
Process Factor A099 Advanced Program
Process Time Hi A116 Advanced Program
Process Time Lo A115 Advanced Program
Program Lock A101 Advanced Program
PWM Frequency A091 Advanced Program
Relay Out Level A056 Advanced Program
Relay Out Sel A055 Advanced Program
Reset To Defalts P041 Basic Program
Reverse Disable A095 Advanced Program
S Curve % A083 Advanced Program
Skip Freq Band A120 Advanced Program
Skip Frequency A119 Advanced Program
Slip Hertz @ FLA A114 Advanced Program
Stp Logic Status d028 Display
Stp Logic x A140-A147 Advanced Program
Stp Logic Time x A150-A157 Advanced Program
Speed Reference P038 Basic Program
Stall Fault Time A121 Advanced Program
Start At PowerUp A094 Advanced Program
Start Boost A085 Advanced Program
Start Source P036 Basic Program
Stop Mode P037 Basic Program
SW Current Trip A098 Advanced Program
Parameter Name No. Group
22B-UM001.book Page 45 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
3-46 Programming and Parameters
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Testpoint Data d019 Display
Testpoint Sel A102 Advanced Program
Timer Status d026 Display
Torque Current d029 Display
Torque Perf Mode A125 Advanced Program
Var PWM Disable A124 Advanced Program
Voltage Class P042 Basic Program
Parameter Name No. Group
22B-UM001.book Page 46 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Chapter 4
Troubleshooting
Chapter 4 provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the
PowerFlex 40 drive. Included is a listing and description of drive faults
(with possible solutions, when applicable).
The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any
changes will be indicated through the integral keypad.
LED Indications
See page 2-4 for information on drive status indicators and controls.
A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types.
For information on… See page… For information on… See page…
Drive Status 4-1 Fault Descriptions 4-3
Faults 4-1 Common Symptoms and
Corrective Actions
4-5
Drive Status
Faults
Type Fault Description
➀ Auto-Reset/Run When this type of fault occurs, and A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is
set to a value greater than “0,” a user-configurable timer, A093
[Auto Rstrt Delay], begins. When the timer reaches zero, the
drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition
that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset
and the drive will be restarted.
➁ Non-Resetable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is
caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault
must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
4-2 Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Fault Indication
Manually Clearing Faults
Automatically Clearing Faults
Auto Restart (Reset/Run)
The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to
automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without
user or application intervention. This allows remote or “unattended”
operation. Only certain faults are allowed to be reset. Certain faults
(Type 2) that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not
resettable.
Caution should be used when enabling this feature, since the drive will
attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming.
Condition Display
Drive is indicating a fault.
The integral keypad provides visual notification of a
fault condition by displaying the following.
• Flashing fault number
• Flashing fault indicator
Press the Escape key to regain control of the
integral keypad.
Step Key(s)
1. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be
removed so that you can use the integral keypad.
Access d007 [Fault 1 Code] to view the most recent fault information.
2. Address the condition that caused the fault.
The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared.
See Table 4.A.
3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these
methods.
• Press Stop if P037 [Stop Mode] is set to a value between “0” and “3”.
• Cycle drive power.
• Set A100 [Fault Clear] to “1” or “2”.
• Cycle digital input if A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7
“Clear Fault”.
Option / Step
Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive.
1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”.
2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than “0”.
Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault
without restarting the drive.
1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”.
2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to “0”.
FAULT
VOLTS
AMPS
HERTZ
RUN
FWD
REV
PRGOGRAM
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Troubleshooting 4-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table 4.A Fault Types, Descriptions and Actions
Fault Descriptions
No. Fault
Type(1)
Description Action
F2 Auxiliary Input ➀ Auxiliary input interlock is open. 1. Check remote wiring.
2. Verify communications
programming for intentional fault.
F3 Power Loss ➁ Excessive DC Bus voltage ripple. 1. Monitor the incoming line for
phase loss or line imbalance.
2. Check input line fuse.
F4 UnderVoltage ➀ DC bus voltage fell below the
minimum value.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low
voltage or line power interruption.
F5 OverVoltage ➀ DC bus voltage exceeded
maximum value.
Monitor the AC line for high line
voltage or transient conditions. Bus
overvoltage can also be caused by
motor regeneration. Extend the
decel time or install dynamic brake
option.
F6 Motor Stalled ➀ Drive is unable to accelerate
motor.
Increase P039 - A067 [Accel Time x]
or reduce load so drive output
current does not exceed the current
set by parameter A089 [Current
Limit 1].
F7 Motor Overload ➀ Internal electronic overload trip. 1. An excessive motor load exists.
Reduce load so drive output
current does not exceed the
current set by parameter P033
[Motor OL Current].
2. Verify A084 [Boost Select]
setting
F8 Heatsink
OvrTmp
➀ Heatsink temperature exceeds a
predefined value.
1. Check for blocked or dirty heat
sink fins. Verify that ambient
temperature has not exceeded
40°C(104°F)forIP30,NEMAUL
Type1installationsor50°C(122°F)
forIP20/Opentypeinstallations.
2. Check fan.
F12 HW OverCurrent ➁ The drive output current has
exceeded the hardware current
limit.
Check programming. Check for
excess load, improper A084 [Boost
Select] setting, DC brake volts set
too high or other causes of excess
current.
F13 Ground Fault ➁ A current path to earth ground
has been detected at one or
more of the drive output
terminals.
Check the motor and external wiring
to the drive output terminals for a
grounded condition.
F29 Analog Input
Loss
➀ An analog input is configured to
fault on signal loss. A signal loss
has occurred.
Configure with A122 [Analog In
Loss].
1. Check parameters.
2. Check for broken/loose
connections at inputs.
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
4-4 Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
(1) See page 4-1 for a description of fault types.
No. Fault
Type(1)
Description Action
F33 Auto Rstrt Tries ➁ Drive unsuccessfully attempted
to reset a fault and resume
running for the programmed
number of A092 [Auto Rstrt
Tries].
Correct the cause of the fault and
manually clear.
F38 Phase U to Gnd ➁ A phase to ground fault has been
detected between the drive and
motor in this phase.
1. Check the wiring between the
drive and motor.
2. Check motor for grounded
phase.
3. Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
F39 Phase V to Gnd
F40 Phase W to Gnd
F41 Phase UV Short ➁ Excessive current has been
detected between these two
output terminals.
1. Check the motor and drive output
terminal wiring for a shorted
condition.
2. Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
F42 Phase UW Short
F43 Phase VW Short
F48 Params
Defaulted
The drive was commanded to
write default values to EEPROM.
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to
the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters as
needed.
F63 SW OverCurrent ➀ Programmed A098 [SW Current
Trip] has been exceeded.
Check load requirements and A098
[SW Current Trip] setting.
F64 Drive Overload ➁ Drive rating of 150% for 1 minute
or 200% for 3 seconds has been
exceeded.
Reduce load or extend Accel Time.
F70 Power Unit ➁ Failure has been detected in the
drive power section.
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
F71 Net Loss The communication network has
faulted.
1. Cycle power.
2. Check communications cabling.
3. Check network adapter setting.
4. Check external network status.
F80 SVC Autotune The autotune function was either
cancelled by the user or failed.
Restart procedure.
F81 Comm Loss ➁ RS485 (DSI) port stopped
communicating.
1. If adapter was not intentionally
disconnected, check wiring to the
port. Replace wiring, port
expander, adapters or complete
drive as required.
2. Check connection.
3. An adapter was intentionally
disconnected.
4. Turn off using A105 [Comm Loss
Action].
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Troubleshooting 4-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Motor does not Start.
F100 Parameter
Checksum
➁ The checksum read from the
board does not match the
checksum calculated.
Set P041 [Reset To Defalts] to
option 1 “Reset Defaults”.
F122 I/O Board Fail ➁ Failure has been detected in the
drive control and I/O section.
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace drive if fault cannot be
cleared.
(1)
See page 4-1 for a description of fault types.
No. Fault
Type(1)
Description Action
Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No output voltage to the motor. None Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects.
Check the motor.
• Verify that the motor is
connected properly.
Check the control input signals.
• Verify that a Start signal is
present. If 2-Wire control is used,
verify that either the Run
Forward or Run Reverse signal
is active, but not both.
• Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is
active.
• Verify that P036 [Start Source]
matches your configuration.
• Verify that A095 [Reverse
Disable] is not prohibiting
movement.
Improper boost setting at initial
start-up.
None Set A084 [Boost Select] to option 2
“35.0, VT”.
Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault.
• Press Stop
• Cycle power
• Set A100 [Fault Clear] to option 1
“Clear Faults”.
• Cycle digital input if A051 - A054
[Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7
“Clear Fault”.
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
4-6 Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block.
Drive does not Start from Integral Keypad.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault.
• Press Stop
• Cycle power
• Set A100 [Fault Clear] to option 1
“Clear Faults”.
• Cycle digital input if A051 - A054
[Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7
“Clear Fault”.
Incorrect programming.
• P036 [Start Source] is set to
option 0 “Keypad” or option 5
“RS485 (DSI) Port”.
• A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is
set to option 5 “Local” and the
input is active.
None Check parameter settings.
Incorrect input wiring.
See 1-18 for wiring examples.
• 2 wire control requires Run
Forward, Run Reverse or Jog
input.
• 3 wire control requires Start and
Stop inputs
• Stop input is always required.
None Wire inputs correctly and/or install
jumper.
Incorrect Sink/Source DIP switch
setting.
None Set switch to match wiring scheme.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Integral keypad is not enabled. Green LED above Start key is
not illuminated.
• Set parameter P036 [Start
Source] to option 0 “Keypad”.
• Set parameter A051 - A054
[Digital Inx Sel] to option 5
“Local” and activate the input.
I/O Terminal 01 “Stop” input is
not present.
None Wire inputs correctly and/or install
jumper.
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Troubleshooting 4-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Drive does not respond to changes in speed command.
Motor and/or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No value is coming from the
source of the command.
The drive “Run” indicator is lit
and output is 0 Hz.
• Check d012 [Control Source] for
correct source.
• If the source is an analog input,
check wiring and use a meter to
check for presence of signal.
• Check d002 [Commanded Freq]
to verify correct command.
Incorrect reference source is
being selected via remote
device or digital inputs.
None • Check d012 [Control Source] for
correct source.
• Check d014 [Dig In Status] to
see if inputs are selecting an
alternate source. Verify settings
for A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel].
• Check P038 [Speed Reference]
for the source of the speed
reference. Reprogram as
necessary.
• Review the Speed Reference
Control chart on page 1-23.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Acceleration time is excessive. None Reprogram P039 [Accel Time 1] or
A067 [Accel Time 2].
Excess load or short
acceleration times force the
drive into current limit, slowing
or stopping acceleration.
None Compare d003 [Output Current] with
A089 [Current Limit 1].
Remove excess load or reprogram
P039 [Accel Time 1] or A067 [Accel
Time 2].
Check for improper A084 [Boost
Select] setting.
Speed command source or
value is not as expected.
None Verify d002 [Commanded Freq].
Check d012 [Control Source] for the
proper Speed Command.
Programming is preventing the
drive output from exceeding
limiting values.
None Check P035 [Maximum Freq] to
insure that speed is not limited by
programming.
Torque performance does not
match motor characteristics.
None Set motor nameplate full load amps
in parameter A126 [Motor NP FLA].
Perform A127 [Autotune] “Static
Tune” or “Rotate Tune” procedure.
Set A125 [Torque Perf Mode] to
option 0 “V/Hz”.
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
4-8 Troubleshooting
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Motor operation is unstable.
Drive will not reverse motor direction.
Drive does not power up.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Motor data was incorrectly
entered.
None 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate
data into P031, P032 and P033.
2. Enable A097 [Compensation].
3. Use A084 [Boost Select] to
reduce boost level.
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
Digital input is not selected for
reversing control.
None Check [Digital Inx Sel] (See
page 3-14). Choose correct input
and program for reversing mode.
Digital input is incorrectly
wired.
None Check input wiring. (See page 1-17)
Motor wiring is improperly
phased for reverse.
None Switch two motor leads.
Reverse is disabled. None Check A095 [Reverse Disable].
Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action
No input power to drive. None Check the power circuit.
• Check the supply voltage.
• Check all fuses and disconnects.
Jumper between I/O Terminals
P2 and P1 not installed and/or
DC Bus Inductor not
connected.
None Install jumper or connect DC Bus
Inductor.
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix A
Supplemental Drive Information
The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input
fuse and circuit breaker information. See Fusing and Circuit Breakers
below for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended
sizes based on 40 °C (104 °F) and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or
local codes may require different ratings.
Fusing
The recommended fuse types are listed below. If available current ratings
do not match those listed in the tables provided, choose the next higher
fuse rating.
• IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2(1)
, EN60269-1, Parts 1 &
2, type gG or equivalent should be used.
• UL – UL Class CC, T or J must be used.(2)
Circuit Breakers
The “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include inverse time
circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit
protectors) and 140M self-protected combination motor controllers. If
one of these is chosen as the desired protection method, the following
requirements apply:
• IEC – Both types of circuit breakers and 140M self-protected
combination motor controllers are acceptable for IEC installations.
• UL – Only inverse time circuit breakers and the specified 140M
self-protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for UL
installations.
For information on… See page…
Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings A-1
Specifications A-2
Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings
(1)
Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Parts 1 & 2: AC,
AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH.
(2)
Typical designations include; Type CC - KTK-R, FNQ-R
Type J - JKS, LPJ
Type T - JJS, JJN
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
A-2 Supplemental Drive Information
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Specifications
Drive Ratings
Catalog
Number(1)
Output Ratings Input Ratings Branch Circuit Protection
kW (HP) Amps
Voltage
Range kVA Amps Fuses
140M Motor
Protectors(3) (4)
Contactors
Min. Enclosure
Volume(5)
(in.3
)
100 - 120V AC (±10%) – 1-Phase Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output
22B-V2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 90-132 1.15 9.0 15 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655
22B-V5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 90-132 2.45 20.3 35 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 1655
22B-V6P0x104 1.1 (1.5) 6.0 90-132 3.0 24.0 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 1655
200 - 240V AC (±10%) – 1-Phase(2)
Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output
22B-A2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 180-264 1.15 6.0 10 140M-C2E-B63 100-C09 1655
22B-A5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 180-264 2.45 12.0 20 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655
22B-A8P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 8.0 180-264 4.0 18.0 30 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 1655
22B-A012x104 2.2 (3.0) 12.0 180-264 5.5 25.0 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 2069
200 - 240V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output
22B-B2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 180-264 1.15 2.5 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C07 1655
22B-B5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 180-264 2.45 5.7 10 140M-C2E-C10 100-C09 1655
22B-B8P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 8.0 180-264 4.0 9.5 15 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655
22B-B012x104 2.2 (3.0) 12.0 180-264 5.5 15.5 25 140M-C2E-C16 100-C23 1655
22B-B017x104 3.7 (5.0) 17.5 180-264 8.6 21.0 30 140M-F8E-C25 100-C23 1655
22B-B024x104 5.5 (7.5) 24.0 180-264 11.8 26.1 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 2069
22B-B033x104 7.5 (10.0) 33.0 180-264 16.3 34.6 60 140M-G8E-C45 100-C60 2069
380 - 480V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 460V 3-Phase Output
22B-D1P4x104 0.4 (0.5) 1.4 342-528 1.4 1.8 3 140M-C2E-B25 100-C07 1655
22B-D2P3x104 0.75 (1.0) 2.3 342-528 2.3 3.2 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C07 1655
22B-D4P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 4.0 342-528 4.0 5.7 10 140M-C2E-B63 100-C09 1655
22B-D6P0x104 2.2 (3.0) 6.0 342-528 5.9 7.5 15 140M-C2E-C10 100-C09 1655
22B-D010x104 4.0 (5.0) 10.5 342-528 10.3 13.0 20 140M-C2E-C16 100-C23 1655
22B-D012x104 5.5 (7.5) 12.0 342-528 11.8 14.2 25 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 2069
22B-D017x104 7.5 (10.0) 17.0 342-528 16.8 18.4 30 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 2069
22B-D024x104 11.0 (15.0) 24.0 342-528 23.4 26.0 50 140M-F8E-C32 100-C43 2069
460 - 600V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 575V 3-Phase Output
22B-E1P7x104 0.75 (1.0) 1.7 414-660 2.1 2.3 6 140M-C2E-B25 100-C09 1655
22B-E3P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 3.0 414-660 3.65 3.8 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C09 1655
22B-E4P2x104 2.2 (3.0) 4.2 414-660 5.2 5.3 10 140M-D8E-B63 100-C09 1655
22B-E6P6x104 4.0 (5.0) 6.6 414-660 8.1 8.3 15 140M-D8E-C10 100-C09 1655
22B-E9P9x104 5.5 (7.5) 9.9 414-660 12.1 11.2 20 140M-D8E-C16 100-C16 2069
22B-E012x104 7.5 (10.0) 12.2 414-660 14.9 13.7 25 140M-D8E-C16 100-C23 2069
22B-E019x104 11.0 (15.0) 19.0 414-660 23.1 24.1 40 140M-F8E-C25 100-C30 2069
(1)
In the Catalog Numbers listed “x” represents enclosure type. Specifications are valid for all
enclosure types. IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drive ratings are only available as Frame B drives. Refer
to Table B.B.
(2)
200-240V AC - 1-Phase drives are also available with an integral EMC filter. Catalog suffix
changes from N104 to N114. Filter option is not available for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives.
(3)
The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 140M
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings.
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Supplemental Drive Information A-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
(4) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240
Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta, corner
ground, or high-resistance ground systems.
(5)
When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be
installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this
column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure.
Input/Output Ratings Approvals
Output Frequency: 0-400 Hz (Programmable)
Efficiency: 97.5% (Typical)
Digital Control Inputs (Input Current = 6mA) Analog Control Inputs
SRC (Source) Mode:
18-24V = ON
0-6V = OFF
SNK (Sink) Mode:
0-6V = ON
18-24V = OFF
4-20mA Analog: 250 ohm input impedance
0-10V DC Analog: 100k ohm input impedance
External Pot: 1-10k ohms, 2 Watt minimum
Control Output
Programmable Output (form C relay)
Resistive Rating: 3.0A at 30V DC, 3.0A at 125V AC, 3.0A at 240V AC
Inductive Rating: 0.5A at 30V DC, 0.5A at 125V AC, 0.5A at 240V AC
Opto Outputs
30V DC, 50mA
Non-inductive
Analog Outputs (10 bit)
0-10V, 1k ohm Min.
4-20mA, 525 ohm Max.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Recommended Fuse Type: UL Class J, CC, T or Type BS88; 600V (550V) or equivalent.
Recommended Circuit Breakers: HMCP circuit breakers or equivalent.
Protective Features
Motor Protection: I2
t overload protection - 150% for 60 Secs, 200% for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection)
Overcurrent: 200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
Over Voltage: 100-120V AC Input – Trip occurs at 405V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line)
200-240V AC Input – Trip occurs at 405V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 290V AC incoming line)
380-460V AC Input – Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
460-600V AC Input – Trip occurs at 1005V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 711V AC incoming line)
Under Voltage: 100-120V AC Input – Trip occurs at 210V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 75V AC incoming line)
200-240V AC Input – Trip occurs at 210V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line)
380-480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
460-600V AC Input – If P042 = 3 “High Voltage” trip occurs at 487V DC bus voltage (344V AC incoming line);
If P042 = 2 “Low Voltage” trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (275V AC incoming line)
Control Ride Through: Minimum ride through is 0.5 Secs - typical value 2 Secs
Faultless Power Ride Through: 100 milliseconds
Dynamic Braking
Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings except when no brake is specified.
Refer to Appendix B for DB resistor ordering information.
UL®
LISTED 966X
IND CONT EQ
UL508C UL®
LISTED 966X
IND CONT EQ
C CSA 22.2
EMC Directive 89/336
LV: EN 50178, EN 60204
EMC: EN 61800-3, EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
A-4 Supplemental Drive Information
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Category Specification
Environment Altitude: 1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating
Maximum Surrounding Air
Temperature without derating:
IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open:
IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1:
Flange Mount:
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X:
–10 to 50° C (14 to 122° F)
–10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F)
Heatsink: –10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F)
Drive: –10 to 50° C (14 to 122° F)
–10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F)
Cooling Method
Convection:
Fan:
0.4 kW (0.5 HP) drives
All other drive ratings and 0.4 kW (0.5 HP)
1-Phase drives with Integral “S Type” EMC Filter
Storage Temperature: –40 to 85 degrees C (–40 to 185 degrees F)
Atmosphere: Important: Drive must not be installed in an
area where the ambient atmosphere contains
volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the
drive is not going to be installed for a period of
time, it must be stored in an area where it will not
be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
Shock (operating): 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0ms)
Vibration (operating): 1G peak, 5 to 2000 Hz
Control Carrier Frequency 2-16 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz.
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Analog Output:
Within ±0.05% of set output frequency.
Within 0.5% of maximum output frequency,
10-Bit resolution
±2% of full scale, 10-Bit resolution
Speed Regulation - Open Loop
with Slip Compensation:
±1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range.
Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including -
Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and
S Curve.
Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and
decel times. Each time may be programmed from
0 - 600 seconds in 0.1 second increments.
Intermittent Overload: 150% Overload capability for up to 1 minute
200% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds
Electronic Motor Overload
Protection:
Provides class 10 motor overload protection
according to NEC article 430 and motor
over-temperature protection according to NEC
article 430.126 (A) (2). UL 508C File 29572.
Electrical Voltage Tolerance: 100-120V ±10%
200-240V ±10%
380-480V ±10%
460-600V ±10%
Frequency Tolerance: 48-63 Hz
Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating. Single-phase
operation provides 35% rated current.
Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range
Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 Amps Symmetrical
Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC Rating of installed fuse/circuit
breaker
Transistor Type: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT)
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Supplemental Drive Information A-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
PowerFlex 40 Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM)
Voltage kW (HP) External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss
100–120V 0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.1 (1.5)
22
40
58
18
20
22
40
60
80
200–240V 0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.1 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
3.7 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
22
40
63
100
150
200
265
18
20
22
25
30
35
40
40
60
85
125
180
235
305
380–480V 0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.1 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
3.7 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
17
30
48
75
135
140
175
260
18
20
22
25
25
35
35
40
35
50
70
100
160
175
210
300
460–600V 0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
4.0 (5.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
30
48
75
135
140
175
260
20
22
25
25
35
35
40
50
70
100
160
175
210
300
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
A-6 Supplemental Drive Information
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Notes:
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix B
Accessories and Dimensions
Table B.A Catalog Number Description
Table B.B PowerFlex 40 Drives
Product Selection
22B - A 1P5 N 1 1 4
Drive Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure HIM Emission Class Type
Drive Ratings IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
IP20 Flange
Mount(1)
IP66, NEMA/UL
Type 4X
Input Voltage kW HP
Output
Current Catalog Number
Frame
Size Catalog Number Catalog Number
120V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
No Filter
0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-V2P3N104 B 22B-V2P3F104 22B-V2P3C104
0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-V5P0N104 B 22B-V5P0F104 22B-V5P0C104
1.1 1.5 6.0A 22B-V6P0N104 B 22B-V6P0F104 22B-V6P0C104
240V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
With Integral “S
Type” EMC
Filter
0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-A2P3N114 B – –
0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-A5P0N114 B – –
1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-A8P0N114 B – –
2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-A012N114 C – –
240V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
No Filter
0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-A2P3N104 B 22B-A2P3F104 22B-A2P3C104
0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-A5P0N104 B 22B-A5P0F104 22B-A5P0C104
1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-A8P0N104 B 22B-A8P0F104 22B-A8P0C104
2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-A012N104 C 22B-A012F104 –
240V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
No Filter
0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-B2P3N104 B 22B-B2P3F104 22B-B2P3C104
0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-B5P0N104 B 22B-B5P0F104 22B-B5P0C104
1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-B8P0N104 B 22B-B8P0F104 22B-B8P0C104
2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-B012N104 B 22B-B012F104 22B-B012C104
3.7 5.0 17.5A 22B-B017N104 B 22B-B017F104 22B-B017C104
5.5 7.5 24.0A 22B-B024N104 C 22B-B024F104 –
7.5 10.0 33.0A 22B-B033N104 C 22B-B033F104 –
480V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
No Filter
0.4 0.5 1.4A 22B-D1P4N104 B 22B-D1P4F104 22B-D1P4C104
0.75 1.0 2.3A 22B-D2P3N104 B 22B-D2P3F104 22B-D2P3C104
1.5 2.0 4.0A 22B-D4P0N104 B 22B-D4P0F104 22B-D4P0C104
2.2 3.0 6.0A 22B-D6P0N104 B 22B-D6P0F104 22B-D6P0C104
4.0 5.0 10.5A 22B-D010N104 B 22B-D010F104 22B-D010C104
5.5 7.5 12.0A 22B-D012N104 C 22B-D012F104 –
7.5 10.0 17.0A 22B-D017N104 C 22B-D017F104 –
11.0 15.0 24.0A 22B-D024N104 C 22B-D024F104 (2) –
600V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
No Filter
0.75 1.0 1.7A 22B-E1P7N104 B 22B-E1P7F104 22B-E1P7C104
1.5 2.0 3.0A 22B-E3P0N104 B 22B-E3P0F104 22B-E3P0C104
2.2 3.0 4.2A 22B-E4P2N104 B 22B-E4P2F104 22B-E4P2C104
4.0 5.0 6.6A 22B-E6P6N104 B 22B-E6P6F104 22B-E6P6C104
5.5 7.5 9.9A 22B-E9P9N104 C 22B-E9P9F104 –
7.5 10.0 12.0A 22B-E012N104 C 22B-E012F104 –
11.0 15.0 19.0A 22B-E019N104 C 22B-E019F104 –
(1) Meets IP40/54/65 (NEMA 1/12/4/4X) when installed in an enclosure of like rating.
(2) Requires use of external DC Bus Inductor or AC Line Reactor. See Table B.E for details.
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-2 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.C Dynamic Brake Modules
Drive Ratings
Catalog Number (1) (2)
(1)
The resistors listed in this tables are rated for 5% duty cycle.
(2) Use of Rockwell resistors is always recommended. The resistors listed have been carefully
selected for optimizing performance in a variety of applications. Alternative resistors may be used,
however care must be taken when making a selection. Refer to the PowerFlex Dynamic Braking
Resistor Calculator, publication PFLEX-AT001.
Input Voltage kW HP
Minimum
Resistance Ω
120V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500
0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500
1.1 1.5 48 AK-R2-091P500
240V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500
0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500
1.5 2.0 48 AK-R2-091P500
2.2 3.0 32 AK-R2-047P500
240V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500
0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500
1.5 2.0 48 AK-R2-091P500
2.2 3.0 32 AK-R2-047P500
3.7 5.0 19 AK-R2-047P500
5.5 7.5 13 AK-R2-030P1K2
7.5 10.0 10 AK-R2-030P1K2
480V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 97 AK-R2-360P500
0.75 1.0 97 AK-R2-360P500
1.5 2.0 97 AK-R2-360P500
2.2 3.0 97 AK-R2-120P1K2
4.0 5.0 77 AK-R2-120P1K2
5.5 7.5 55 AK-R2-120P1K2
7.5 10.0 39 AK-R2-120P1K2
11.0 15.0 24 AK-R2-120P1K2 (3)
(3) Requires two resistors wired in parallel.
600V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.75 1.0 120 AK-R2-360P500
1.5 2.0 120 AK-R2-360P500
2.2 3.0 82 AK-R2-120P1K2
4.0 5.0 82 AK-R2-120P1K2
5.5 7.5 51 AK-R2-120P1K2
7.5 10.0 51 AK-R2-120P1K2
11.0 15.0 51 AK-R2-120P1K2 (3)
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.D Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors
Table B.E DC Bus Inductors
Input Voltage kW HP
Fundamental
Amps
Maximum
Continuous
Amps
Inductance
mh
Watts
Loss
Catalog
Number (1)
(1)
Catalog numbers listed are for 3% impedance open style units. NEMA Type 1 and 5% impedance
reactor types are also available. Refer to publication 1321-TD001….
240V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 4 6 12.0 21 W 1321-3R4-D
0.75 1.0 8 12 3.0 29 W 1321-3R8-B
1.5 2.0 8 12 1.5 19.5 W 1321-3R8-A
2.2 3.0 12 18 1.25 26 W 1321-3R12-A
3.7 5.0 18 27 0.8 36 W 1321-3R18-A
5.5 7.5 25 37.5 0.5 48 W 1321-3R25-A
7.5 10.0 35 52.5 0.4 49 W 1321-3R35-A
480V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 2 3 20.0 11.3 W 1321-3R2-B
0.75 1.0 4 6 9.0 20 W 1321-3R4-C
1.5 2.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B
2.2 3.0 8 12 5.0 25.3 W 1321-3R8-C
4.0 5.0 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B
5.5 7.5 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B
7.5 10.0 18 27 1.5 43 W 1321-3R18-B
11.0 15.0 25 37.5 1.2 52 W 1321-3R25-B
600V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.75 1.0 2 3 20.0 11.3 W 1321-3R2-B
1.5 2.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B
2.2 3.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B
4.0 5.0 8 12 5.0 25.3 W 1321-3R8-C
5.5 7.5 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B
7.5 10.0 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B
11.0 15.0 18 27 1.5 43 W 1321-3R18-B
Input Voltage kW HP Amps
Inductance
mh MTE Catalog Number (2)
240V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
5.5 7.5 32 0.85 32RB001
7.5 10.0 40 0.5 40RB001
480V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
5.5 7.5 18 3.75 18RB004
7.5 10.0 25 4.0 25RB005
11.0 15.0 32 2.68 32RB003
600V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
5.5 7.5 12 6.0 12RB004
7.5 10.0 18 6.0 18RB005
11.0 15.0 25 4.0 25RB005
(2)
Use MTE RB Series or equivalent inductors.
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-4 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.F EMC Line Filters
Drive Ratings
S Type Filter
Catalog Number (1)
(1)
This filter is suitable for use with a cable length of at least 10 meters (33 feet) for Class A and 1
meter for Class B environments.
L Type Filter
Catalog Number (4)
(4) This filter is suitable for use with a cable length of at least 100 meters for Class A and 5 meters for
Class B environments.
Input Voltage kW HP
120V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.4 0.5 – 22-RF018-BL
0.75 1.0 – 22-RF018-BL
1.1 1.5 – 22-RF018-BL
240V 50/60 Hz
1-Phase
0.4 0.5 (2)
(2)
These ratings can be ordered with internal “S Type” filters. Refer to the Catalog Number
explanation on page P-4 and Table B.B for details.
22-RF018-BL
0.75 1.0 (2)
22-RF018-BL
1.5 2.0 (2)
22-RF018-BL
2.2 3.0 (2)
22-RF025-CL
240V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 22-RF021-BS(3)
(3)
Filter must be Series B or later.
22-RF021-BL
0.75 1.0 22-RF021-BS(3)
22-RF021-BL
1.5 2.0 22-RF021-BS(3)
22-RF021-BL
2.2 3.0 22-RF021-BS(3)
22-RF021-BL
3.7 5.0 22-RF021-BS(3)
22-RF021-BL
5.5 7.5 22-RF034-CS 22-RF034-CL
7.5 10.0 22-RF034-CS 22-RF034-CL
480V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.4 0.5 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL
0.75 1.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL
1.5 2.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL
2.2 3.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL
4.0 5.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL
5.5 7.5 22-RF018-CS 22-RF018-CL
7.5 10.0 22-RF018-CS 22-RF018-CL
11.0 15.0 22-RF026-CS 22-RF026-CL
600V 50/60 Hz
3-Phase
0.75 1.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL
1.5 2.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL
2.2 3.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL
4.0 5.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL
5.5 7.5 – 22-RF015-CL
7.5 10.0 – 22-RF015-CL
11.0 15.0 – 22-RF024-CL
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.G Human Interface Module (HIM) Option Kits and Accessories
Table B.H IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit
Item Description Catalog Number
LCD Display, Remote Panel
Mount
Digital speed control
CopyCat capable
IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only
Includes 2.9 meter cable
22-HIM-C2S
LCD Display, Remote Panel
Mount
Digital speed control
CopyCat capable
IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only
Includes 2.9 meter cable
22-HIM-C2
LCD Display, Remote Handheld Digital speed control
Full numeric keypad
CopyCat capable
IP30 (NEMA Type 1)
Includes 1.0 meter cable
Panel mount with optional Bezel Kit
22-HIM-A3
Bezel Kit Panel mount for LCD Display, Remote
Handheld unit, IP30 (NEMA Type 1)
22-HIM-B1
DSI HIM Cable
(DSI HIM to RJ45 cable)
1.0 Meter (3.3 Feet)
2.9 Meter (9.51 Feet)
22-HIM-H10
22-HIM-H30
Item Description
Drive
Frame Catalog Number
IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
Kit
Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP30/
NEMA 1/UL Type 1 enclosure. Includes
conduit box with mounting screws and
plastic top panel.
B 22-JBAB
C 22-JBAC
IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1
Kit for Communication
Option
Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP30/
NEMA 1/UL Type 1 enclosure. Includes
communication option conduit box with
mounting screws and plastic top panel.
B 22-JBCB
C 22-JBCC
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-6 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.I Communication Option Kits and Accessories
Item Description Catalog Number
Communication
Adapters
Embedded communication options for use with
the PowerFlex 4-Class drives.
Requires a Communication Adapter Cover (IP20,
NEMA/UL Type 1 only. Ordered Separately)
BACnet®
ControlNet™
DeviceNet™
EtherNet/IP™
LonWorks®
PROFIBUS™ DP
22-COMM-B
22-COMM-C
22-COMM-D
22-COMM-E
22-COMM-L
22-COMM-P
External DSI™
Communications Kit
External mounting kit for 22-COMM
communication options
22-XCOMM-DC-BASE
External Comms Power
Supply
Optional 100-240V AC Power Supply for External
DSI Communications Kit.
20-XCOMM-AC-PS1
Compact I/O Module Three channel. 1769-SM2
Communication Adapter
Cover
Cover that houses the DeviceNet Communication
Adapter (IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 only)
B Frame Drive
C Frame Drive
22B-CCB
22B-CCC
Serial Converter Module
(RS485 to RS232)
Provides serial communication via DF1 protocol
for use with DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive
software. Includes:
DSI to RS232 serial converter (1)
1203-SFC serial cable (1)
22-RJ45CBL-C20 cable (1)
DriveExplorer Lite CD (1)
22-SCM-232
DSI Cable 2.0 meter RJ45 to RJ45 cable, male to male
connectors.
22-RJ45CBL-C20
Serial Cable 2.0 meter serial cable with a locking low profile
connector to connect to the serial converter and a
9-pin sub-miniature D female connector to
connect to a computer.
1203-SFC
Null Cable Converter For use when connecting the serial converter to
DriveExplorer on a handheld PC.
1203-SNM
Splitter Cable RJ45 one to two port splitter cable AK-U0-RJ45-SC1
Terminating Resistors RJ45 120 Ohm resistors (2 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TR1
Terminal Block RJ45 Two position terminal block (5 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
DriveExplorer Software
(CD-ROM) Version 3.01
or later
Windows based software package that provides
an intuitive means for monitoring or configuring
Allen-Bradley drives and communication adapters
online.
Compatibility:
Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or
later), 2000, XP and CE(1)
(1)
See www.ab.com/drives/driveexplorer.htm for supported devices.
9306-4EXP01ENE
DriveExecutive software
(CD-ROM) Version 1.01
or later
Windows based software package that provides
an intuitive means for monitoring or configuring
Allen-Bradley drives and communication adapters
online and offline.
Compatibility:
Windows 98, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or
later), 2000 and XP
9303-4DTE01ENE
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table B.J PowerFlex 40 Frames – Ratings are in kW and (HP)
Figure B.1 IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).
Weights are in kilograms and (pounds).
Figure B.2 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 Option Kit without Communication Option
Product Dimensions
Frame
120V AC –
1-Phase
240V AC –
1-Phase
240V AC –
3-Phase
480V AC –
3-Phase
600V AC –
3-Phase
B 0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.1 (1.5)
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
3.7 (5.0)
0.4 (0.5)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
4.0 (5.0)
0.75 (1.0)
1.5 (2.0)
2.2 (3.0)
4.0 (5.0)
C(1)
2.2 (3.0) 5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
11.0 (15.0) 5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10.0)
11.0 (15.0)
(1)
IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives are not availble in Frame C drive ratings.
Frame
A B C D E F
Ship
Weight
B 100
(3.94)
180
(7.09)
136
(5.35)
87
(3.43)
168
(6.61)
87.4
(3.44)
2.2
(4.9)
C 130
(5.1)
260
(10.2)
180
(7.1)
116
(4.57)
246
(9.7)
– 4.3
(9.5)
A
E
B
D
C
F
5.5 (0.22)
33.0
(1.30)
74.3
(2.93)
109.9
(4.33)
64.1 (2.52)
79.1 (3.11)
∅ 22.2
(0.87)
25.6 (1.01)
40.6 (1.60)
60.0
(2.36)
111.2
(4.38)
152.2
(5.99)
107.0 (4.21)
66.0 (2.60)
∅ 22.2
(0.87)
∅ 28.5
(1.12)
24.0 (0.94)
Frame B - 22-JBAB
Frame C - 22-JBAC
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-8 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.3 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 Option Kit with Communication Option –
Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
64.0
(2.52)
25.0
(0.98)
∅ 22.2
(0.87)
76.3
(3.00)
105.3
(4.15)
134.3
(5.29)
50.0 (1.97)
77.5 (3.05)
22.5 (0.89)
25.0
(0.98)
45.7 (1.80)
109.8
(4.32)
144.8
(5.70)
179.8
(7.08)
69.2 (2.72)
92.2 (3.63)
108.7 (4.28)
22.2 (0.87) ∅ 22.2
(0.87)
∅ 28.5
(1.12)
60.0
(2.36)
Frame B - 22-JBCB
Frame C - 22-JBCC
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-9
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.4 PowerFlex 40 Flange Mount Drives – Dimensions are in millimeters and
(inches)
244
(9.61)
250
(9.84)
94.3
(3.71)
63.1
(2.48)
214
(8.43)
138.2
(5.44)
105.8
(4.17)
325
(12.8)
300
(11.81)
130.3
(5.13)
22B-CCC
Frame B
Frame C
22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-10 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.5 PowerFlex 40 Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions – Dimensions are in
millimeters and (inches)
210
(8.27)
98
(3.86)
160
(6.30)
145
(5.71)
49
(1.93)
31
(1.22)
7.5
(0.30)
14
(0.55)
98.5
(3.88)
197
(7.76)
6.5
(0.26)
225
(8.86)
23.5
(0.93)
5.3
(0.21)
291.5
(11.48)
164
(6.46)
180
(7.09)
90
(3.54)
307.5
(12.11)
230.6
(9.08)
153.8
(6.06)
76.9
(3.03)
8
(0.31)
8
(0.31)
5.3
(0.21)
Frame B
Frame C
22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-11
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.6 PowerFlex 40 Replacement Plate Drive Dimensions – Dimensions are in
millimeters and (inches)
125
(4.92)
204
(8.03)
180
(7.09)
192
(7.56)
96
(3.78)
9.5
(0.37)
88
(3.46)
112
(4.41)
100
(3.94)
80
(3.15)
5.3
(0.21)
155
(6.10)
284
(11.18)
260
(10.24)
272
(10.71)
136
(5.35)
9.5
(0.37)
98.5
(3.88)
123.5
(4.86)
142
(5.59)
130
(5.12)
80
(3.15)
5.3
(0.21)
22B-CCC
Frame B
Frame C
22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-12 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.7 IP66, NEMA Type/UL Type 4X – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Weights are in kilograms and (pounds).
Weight
5.2 (11.5)
165
(6.50)
146
(5.75)
6.5
(0.26)
270
(10.63)
253
(9.96)
82.5
(3.25)
46
(1.81) 23
(0.91)
89
(3.50)
124
(4.88)
198
(7.80)
28
(1.10)
22
(0.87)
22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-13
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.8 Dynamic Brake Modules – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches).
Weights are in kilograms and (pounds).
Figure B.9 Recommended External Brake Resistor Circuitry
Frame Catalog Number Weight
A AK-R2-091P500, AK-R2-047P500, AK-R2-360P500 1.1 (2.5)
B AK-R2-030P1K2, AK-R2-120P1K2 2.7 (6)
335.0
(13.19)
60.0
(2.36)
30.0
(1.18)17.0
(0.67)
59.0
(2.32)
13.0
(0.51)
405.0
(15.94)
386.0
(15.20)
316.0
(12.44)
61.0
(2.40)31.0
(1.22)
ROCKWELL
AUTOMATIONCUS
SURFACES MAY BE
ROCKWELL
AUTOMATIONCUS
Frame A Frame B
Power On
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat
Power Off
M
M
(Input Contactor) M
Three-Phase
AC Input
22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-14 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.10 Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors – Dimensions are in millimeters
and (inches). Weights are in kilograms and (pounds).
Catalog Number A B C D E Weight
1321-3R2-A 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4)
1321-3R2-B 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4)
1321-3R4-A 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 76 (3.00) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4)
1321-3R4-B 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 76 (3.00) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4)
1321-3R4-C 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 86 (3.38) 60 (2.35) 37 (1.44) 2.3 (5)
1321-3R4-D 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 92 (3.62) 66 (2.60) 37 (1.44) 2.7 (6)
1321-3R8-A 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 3.1 (7)
1321-3R8-B 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 3.6 (8)
1321-3R8-C 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 85 (3.35) 63 (2.48) 51 (2.00) 4.9 (11)
1321-3R12-A 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 4.1 (9)
1321-3R12-B 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 4.5 (10)
1321-3R18-A 152 (6.00) 133 (5.25) 79 (3.10) 54 (2.13) 51 (2.00) 4.1 (9)
1321-3R18-B 152 (6.00) 133 (5.25) 86 (3.40) 63 (2.48) 51 (2.00) 5.4 (12)
1321-3R25-A 183 (7.20) 146 (5.76) 85 (3.35) 60 (2.35) 76 (3.00) 4.9 (11)
1321-3R35-A 193 (7.60) 146 (5.76) 91 (3.60) 66 (2.60) 76 (3.00) 6.3 (14)
D
C
B
A
E
22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-15
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.11 Frame B EMC Line Filters – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Catalog Numbers: 22-RF8P0-BL, 22-RF012-BS, -BL (Series B); 22-RF018-BS;
22-RF021-BS, -BL
5.5 (0.22)17.8
(0.70) 24.0
(0.94)
78
(3.07)
100
(3.94)
50
(1.97)
29.8
(1.17)
229
(9.02)
216
(8.50)
217
(8.54)
22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-16 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.12 Frame C EMC Line Filters – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Catalog Numbers: 22-RF018-CS, -CL; 22-RF025-CL; 22-RF026-CS, -CL; 22-RF034-CS,
-CL
5.5 (0.22)17
(0.67) 30
(1.18)
90
(3.54)
130
(5.12)
60
(2.36)
32
(1.26)
309
(12.17)
297
(11.69)
297
(11.69)
22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Accessories and Dimensions B-17
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.13 Remote (Panel Mount) Small HIM – Dimensions are in millimeters and
(inches) Catalog Number: 22-HIM-C2S
93
(3.66)
25
(0.98)
2m
180
(7.09)
154
(6.06)
77
(3.03)
23.5
(0.93)
67
(2.64)
60
(2.36)
19.1
(0.75)
4.8
(0.19)
22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
B-18 Accessories and Dimensions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Figure B.14 NEMA Type 1 Bezel – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches)
Catalog Number: 22-HIM-B1
93
(3.66)25.2
(0.99)
2m
180
(7.09)
11.1
(0.44)
19.1
(0.75)
4.8
(0.19)
154
(6.06)
77
(3.03)
23.5
(0.93)
67
(2.64)
60
(2.36)
22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix C
RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 40 drives support the RS485 (DSI) protocol to allow efficient
operation with Rockwell Automation peripherals. In addition, some
Modbus functions are supported to allow simple networking. PowerFlex
40 drives can be multi-dropped on an RS485 network using Modbus
protocol in RTU mode.
For information regarding DeviceNet or other communication protocols,
refer to the appropriate user manual.
Network Wiring
Network wiring consists of a shielded 2-conductor cable that is
daisy-chained from node to node.
Figure C.1 Network Wiring Diagram
Controller
V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3
BR+ BR-DC- DC+
Master
PowerFlex 40
Node 1
4
5
PowerFlex 40
Node 2
4
5
PowerFlex 40
Node "n"
4
5
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
TxRxD+
TxRxD-120 ohm resistor
120 ohm resistor
FRONT
PIN 8
PIN 1
NOTE:The shield should be grounded at ONLY ONE location.
Shield Shield Shield
TxRxD+
TxRxD-
RS485
(DSI)
AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
RS485
(DSI)
TxRxD+
TxRxD-V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3
BR+ BR-DC- DC+
01 02 03 04 05
11 12 13 14 15
06 07 08 09
16 17 18 19
01 02 03 04 05
11 12 13 14 15
06 07 08 09
16 17 18 19
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
C-2 RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Only pins 4 and 5 on the RJ45 plug should be wired. The other pins on
the PowerFlex 40 RJ45 socket must not be connected because they
contain power, etc. for other Rockwell Automation peripheral devices.
Wiring terminations on the master controller will vary depending on the
master controller used and “TxRxD+” and “TxRxD-” are shown for
illustration purposes only. Refer to the master controller’s user manual
for network terminations. Note that there is no standard for the “+” and
“-” wires, and consequently Modbus device manufacturers interpret
them differently. If you have problems with initially establishing
communications, try swapping the two network wires at the master
controller.
Standard RS485 wiring practices apply.
• Termination resistors need to be applied at each end of the network
cable.
• RS485 repeaters may need to be used for long cable runs, or if
greater than 32 nodes are needed on the network.
• Network wiring should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3
meters (1 foot).
• Network wiring should only cross power wires at a right angle.
I/O Terminal 19 on the PowerFlex 40 is connected to the metal shield
around the RJ45 connector. It is recommended to ground this terminal
(there are two PE terminals on the drive). See Table 1.H for more
information.
Network Common is internally tied to I/O Terminal 04 (Digital
Common). Tying I/O Terminal 04 to PE ground may improve noise
immunity in some applications.
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Parameter Configuration
The following PowerFlex 40 parameters are used to configure the drive
to operate on a network.
Supported Modbus Function Codes
The peripheral interface (DSI) used on PowerFlex 40 drives supports
some of the Modbus function codes.
Important: Modbus devices can be 0-based (registers are numbered
starting at 0) or 1-based (registers are numbered starting at
1). Depending on the Modbus Master used, the register
addresses listed on the following pages may need to be
offset by +1. For example, Logic Command may be register
address 8192 for some master devices (e.g. ProSoft
3150-MCM SLC Modbus scanner) and 8193 for others
(e.g. PanelViews).
Parameter Details Reference
P036 [Start Source] Set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” if Start is controlled from
the network.
Page 3-10
P038 [Speed Reference] Set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” if the Speed Reference is
controlled from the network.
Page 3-12
A103 [Comm Data Rate] Sets the data rate for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes
on the network must be set to the same data rate.
Page 3-31
A104 [Comm Node Addr] Sets the node address for the drive on the network.
Each device on the network requires a unique node
address.
Page 3-31
A105 [Comm Loss Action] Selects the drive’s response to communication
problems.
Page 3-32
A106 [Comm Loss Time] Sets the time that the drive will remain in
communication loss before the drive implements A105
[Comm Loss Action].
Page 3-32
A107 [Comm Format] Sets the transmission mode, data bits, parity and stop
bits for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes on the network
must be set to the same setting.
Page 3-32
Modbus Function Code (Decimal) Command
03 Read Holding Registers
06 Preset (Write) Single Register
16 (10 Hexadecimal) Preset (Write) Multiple Registers
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
C-4 RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Writing (06) Logic Command Data
The PowerFlex 40 drive can be controlled via the network by sending
Function Code 06 writes to register address 8192 (Logic Command).
P036 [Start Source] must be set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” in order to
accept the commands.
In addition to being written, register address 8192 can be read using
Function Code 03.
Logic Command
Address (Decimal) Bit(s) Description
8192
0 1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop
1 1 = Start, 0 = Not Start
2 1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog
3 1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults
5,4
00 = No Command
01 = Forward Command
10 = Reverse Command
11 = No Command
6 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier.
In FRN 4.01 and later, activates Opto Output 1.
Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter
A058 is set to 20.
7 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier.
In FRN 4.01 and later, activates Opto Output 2.
Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter
A061 is set to 20.
9,8
00 = No Command
01 = Accel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Accel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Accel Rate Selected
11,10
00 = No Command
01 = Decel Rate 1 Enable
10 = Decel Rate 2 Enable
11 = Hold Decel Rate Selected
14,13,12
000 = No Command
001 = Freq. Source = P038 [Speed Reference]
010 = Freq. Source = A069 [Internal Freq]
011 = Freq. Source = Comms (Addr 8193)
100 = A070 [Preset Freq 0]
101 = A071 [Preset Freq 1]
110 = A072 [Preset Freq 2]
111 = A073 [Preset Freq 3]
15 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier.
In FRN 4.01 and later, activates C-form relay.
Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter
A055 is set to 20.
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Writing (06) Reference
The Speed Reference to a PowerFlex 40 drive can be controlled via the
network by sending Function Code 06 writes to register address 8193
(Reference). P038 [Speed Reference] must be set to 5 “RS485 (DSI)
Port” in order to accept the Speed Reference.
In addition to being written, register address 8193 can be read using
Function Code 03.
Reading (03) Logic Status Data
The PowerFlex 40 Logic Status data can be read via the network by
sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 8448 (Logic Status).
Reference
Address (Decimal) Description
8193
A decimal value entered as xxx.x where the decimal point is fixed. For
example, a decimal “100” equals 10.0 Hz and “543” equals 54.3 Hz.
Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Bit(s) Description
8448
0 1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready
1 1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active
2 1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse
3 1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse
4 1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating
5 1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating
6 1 = Alarm, 0 = No Alarm
7 1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted
8 1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference
9 1 = Reference Controlled by Comm
10 1 = Operation Cmd Controlled by Comm
11 1 = Parameters have been locked
12 Digital Input 1 Status
13 Digital Input 2 Status
14 Digital Input 3 Status(1)
(1)
This status is available only with firmware revision FRN 2.xx and higher.
15 Digital Input 4 Status(1)
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
C-6 RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Reading (03) Feedback
The Feedback (Output Frequency) from the PowerFlex 40 drive can be
read via the network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register
address 8451 (Feedback).
Reading (03) Drive Error Codes
The PowerFlex 40 Error Code data can be read via the network by
sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 8449 (Drive Error
Codes).
Feedback(2)
Address (Decimal) Description
8451
A xxx.x decimal value where the decimal point is fixed. For example, a decimal
“123” equals 12.3 Hz and “300” equals 30.0 Hz.
(2)
Returns the same data as Reading (03) Parameter d001 [Output Freq].
Logic Status
Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal) Description
8449
0 No Fault
2 Auxiliary Input
3 Power Loss
4 Undervoltage
5 Overvoltage
6 Motor Stalled
7 Motor Overload
8 Heatsink Overtemperature
12 HW Overcurrent (300%)
13 Ground Fault
29 Analog Input Loss
33 Auto Restart Tries
38 Phase U to Ground Short
39 Phase V to Ground Short
40 Phase W to Ground Short
41 Phase UV Short
42 Phase UW Short
43 Phase VW Short
63 Software Overcurrent
64 Drive Overload
70 Power Unit Fail
80 AutoTune Fail
81 Communication Loss
100 Parameter Checksum Error
122 I/O Board Fail
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive Parameters
To access drive parameters, the Modbus register address equals the
parameter number. For example, a decimal “1” is used to address
Parameter d001 [Output Freq] and decimal “39” is used to address
Parameter P039 [Accel Time 1].
Additional Information
Refer to http://www.ab.com/drives/ for additional information.
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
C-8 RS485 (DSI) Protocol
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Notes:
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix D
RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable
The PowerFlex 40 drive provides a RJ45 port to allow the connection of
a single peripheral device. The RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable can be used to
connect a second DSI peripheral device to the drive.
Connectivity Guidelines
• Two peripherals maximum can be attached to a drive.
• If a single peripheral is used, it must be connected to the Master port
(M) on the splitter and configured for “Auto” (default) or “Master.”
Parameter 9 [Device Type] on the DSI / MDI keypads and Parameter
1 [Adapter Cfg] on the Serial Converter are used to select the type
(Auto / Master / Slave).
• Do not use the RJ45 Splitter Cable with a drive that has an
internal network communication adapter installed. Since only
one additional peripheral can be added, the second peripheral can be
connected directly to the RJ45 port on the drive. The internal Comm
is always the Master, therefore the external peripheral must be
configured as “Auto” (for temporary connections) or “Slave” (for
permanent connections).
• If two peripherals will be powered up at the same time, one must be
configured as the “Master” and connected to the Master port (M) and
the other must be connected as the “Slave” and connected to the
Slave port (S).
!
ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. The
peripherals may not perform as intended if these Connectivity
Guidelines are not followed. Precautions should be taken to follow
these Connectivity Guidelines.
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
D-2 RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
DSI Cable Accessories
RJ45 Splitter Cable – Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-SC1
RJ45 Two-Position Terminal Block Adapter –
Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
RJ45 Adapter with Integrated Termination Resistor –
Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-TR1
Slave Port
Master Port
PIN 8PIN 1
MS
TB2
(PIN 5)
TB1
(PIN 4)
PIN 8
PIN 1
PIN 8
PIN 1
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable D-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Connecting One Temporary Peripheral
Connecting One Temporary Peripheral and
One Permanent Peripheral
M
S
Serial Converter
Parameter 1 [Adapter Cfg] set to "Auto"
(default) or "Master" and connected to
Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable
DSI
DSI / MDI
Hand Held
or
Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to "Auto"
(default) or "Master" and connected to
Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable
DSI / MDI Drive
Serial Converter
NEMA 4
Panel Mount Unit
or
NEMA 1 Bezel
with DSI / MDI Hand Held
Parameter 9 [Device Type]
set to "Master" and
connected to Master port (M)
on RJ45 Splitter Cable
Parameter 1 [Adapter Cfg]
set to "Auto" (default) or
"Slave" and connected to
Slave port (S)
on RJ45 Splitter Cable
DSI
M
S
DSI / MDI Drive
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
D-4 RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Connecting Two Permanent Peripherals
Connecting an RS-485 Network
or
NEMA 1 Bezel
with DSI / MDI Hand Held
NEMA 4
Panel Mount Unit
Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to
"Master" and connected to Master
port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable
Parameter 9 [Device Type]
set to "Slave" and
connected to Slave port (S)
on RJ45 Splitter Cable
M
S
DSI / MDI Drive
or
AK-U0-RJ45-TR1
Terminating Resistor
(end of network)
DSI / MDI Drives
or or
Customer supplied RJ45 male-to-RJ45 male
cables with wires connected at pins 4 and 5 only.
Both the Master (M) and Slave (S) ports on the RJ45 Splitter
Cable operate as standard RS-485 ports in this configuration.
AK-U0-RJ45-SC1
AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P
Two-position Terminal Block
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix E
StepLogic™, Basic Logic and
Timer/Counter Functions
Four PowerFlex 40 logic functions provide the capability to program
simple logic functions without a separate controller.
• StepLogic Function
Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic.
Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from
digital inputs programmed as “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” before
stepping from one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for
each of the eight steps and is used to program a time delay before
stepping from one preset speed to the next. The status of a digital
output can also be controlled based on the step being executed.
• Basic Logic Function
Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as “Logic In1” and/or
“Logic In2”. A digital output can be programmed to change state
based on the condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic
functions such as AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be
used with or without StepLogic.
• Timer Function
A digital input can be programmed for “Timer Start”. A digital
output can be programmed as a “Timer Out” with an output level
programmed to the desired time. When the timer reaches the time
programmed into the output level the output will change state. The
timer can be reset via a digital input programmed as “Reset Timer”.
• Counter Function
A digital input can be programmed for “Counter In”. A digital output
can be programmed as “Counter Out” with an output level
programmed to the desired number of counts. When the counter
reaches the count programmed into the output level the output will
change state. The counter can be reset via a digital input
programmed as “Reset Counter”.
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
E-2 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
StepLogic Using Timed Steps
To activate this function, set parameter P038 [Speed Reference] to 6 “Stp
Logic”. Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed
reference and time for each step.
• Logic is defined using parameters A140-A147 [Stp Logic x].
• Preset Speeds are set with parameters A070-A077 [Preset Freq x].
• Time of operation for each step is set with parameters A150-A157
[Stp Logic Time x].
The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse.
Figure E.1 Using Timed Steps
StepLogic Sequence
• Sequence begins with a valid start command.
• A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transition to the next step
when the corresponding StepLogic time has expired.
• Step 7 is followed by Step 0
• Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs.
Time
0
Forward
Reverse
Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions
Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic
to transition to the next step. Logic In1 and Logic In2 are defined by
programming parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] to option 23
“Logic In1” or option 24 “Logic In2”.
Example
• Run at Step 0.
• Transition to Step 1 when Logic In1 is true.
Logic senses the edge of Logic In1 when it transitions from off to on.
Logic In1 is not required to remain “on”.
• Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In1 and Logic In2 are true.
The drive senses the level of both Logic In1 and Logic In2 and
transitions to Step 2 when both are on.
• Transition to Step 3 when Logic In2 returns to a false or off state.
Inputs are not required to remain in the “on” condition except under
the logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3.
The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy
machine conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a
minimum time period and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition
to the next step.
Time
Logic In1
Logic In2
Frequency
Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3
Time
Logic In1
Logic In2
Frequency
Start Step 0 Step 1
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
E-4 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Timer Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured
with parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] set to 18 “Timer Start” and
20 “Reset Timer”.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate
when the level is reached. Level parameters A056 [Relay Out Level],
A059 [Opto Out1 Level] and A062 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired time in seconds.
Parameters A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] and A061
[Opto Out2 Sel] are set to option 16 “Timer Out” and causes the output
to change state when the preset level is reached.
Example
• Drive starts up and accelerates to 30 Hz.
• After 30Hz has been maintained for 20 seconds, a 4-20mA analog
input becomes the reference signal for speed control.
• The timer function is used to select a preset speed with a 20 second
run time that overrides the speed reference while the digital input is
active.
• Parameters are set to the following options:
– P038 [Speed Reference] = 3 “4-20mA Input”
– A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 4 “Preset Freq”
– A052 [Digital In2 Sel] = 18 “Timer Start”
– A055 [Relay Out Sel] = 16 “Timer Out”
– A056 [Relay Out Level] = 20.0 Secs
– A071 [Preset Freq 1] = 30.0 Hz
• The control terminal block is wired such that a start command will
also trigger the timer start.
• The relay output is wired to I/O Terminal 05 (Digital Input 1) so that
it forces the input on when the timer starts.
• After the timer is complete, the output is turned off releasing the
preset speed command. The drive defaults to following the analog
input reference as programmed.
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Note that a “Reset Timer” input is not required for this example since the
“Timer Start” input both clears and starts the timer.
Digital In2
Reset Counter
Limit Switch
Digital In1
Counter In
Photo Eye
Start
Output
Frequency
Relay Out
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
E-6 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Counter Function
Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are
configured with parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] set to 19
“Counter In” and 21 “Reset Counter”.
Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate
when the level is reached. Level parameters A056 [Relay Out Level],
A059 [Opto Out1 Level] and A062 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the
desired count value.
Parameters A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] and A061
[Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 17 “Counter Out” which causes the output to
change state when the level is reached.
Example
• A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line.
• An accumulator holds the packages until 5 are collected.
• A diverter arm redirects the group of 5 packages to a bundling area.
• The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit
switch that resets the counter.
• Parameters are set to the following options:
– A051 [Digital In1 Sel] set to 19 to select “Counter In”
– A052 [Digital In2 Sel] set to 21 to select “Reset Counter”
– A055 [Relay Out Sel] set to 17 to select “Counter Out”
– A056 [Relay Out Level] set to 5.0 (counts)
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
StepLogic Parameters
Table E.A Code Descriptions for Parameters A140-A147
Table E.B Digit 3 – Defines the action during the step currently executing.
Table E.C Digit 2 – Defines what step to jump to or how to end program when the
logic conditions specified in Digit 1 are met.
Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0
0 0 F 1
Setting
Accel/Decel
Parameters Used
StepLogic Output
State Commanded Direction
0 1 Off FWD
1 1 Off REV
2 1 Off No Output
3 1 On FWD
4 1 On REV
5 1 On No Output
6 2 Off FWD
7 2 Off REV
8 2 Off No Output
9 2 On FWD
A 2 On REV
b 2 On No Output
Setting Logic
0 Jump to Step 0
1 Jump to Step 1
2 Jump to Step 2
3 Jump to Step 3
4 Jump to Step 4
5 Jump to Step 5
6 Jump to Step 6
7 Jump to Step 7
8 End Program (Normal Stop)
9 End Program (Coast to Stop)
A End Program and Fault (F2)
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
E-8 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Table E.D Digit 1 – Defines what logic must be met to jump to a step other than the
very next step.
Table E.E Digit 0 – Defines what logic must be met to jump to the very next step.
Setting Description Logic
0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP
1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x]
parameter.
TIMED
2 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TRUE
3 Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TRUE
4 Step if “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) FALSE
5 Step if “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) FALSE
6 Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) OR
7 Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) AND
8 Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) NOR
9 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) and “Logic In2” is not active
(logically false)
XOR
A Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) and “Logic In1” is not active
(logically false)
XOR
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TIMED AND
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TIMED AND
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
F Do not step OR no “jump to”, so use Digit 0 logic IGNORE
Setting Description Logic
0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP
1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x]
parameter.
TIMED
2 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TRUE
3 Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TRUE
4 Step if “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) FALSE
5 Step if “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) FALSE
6 Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) OR
7 Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) AND
8 Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) NOR
9 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) and “Logic In2” is not active
(logically false)
XOR
A Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) and “Logic In1” is not active
(logically false)
XOR
b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TIMED AND
C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TIMED AND
d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR
F Use logic programmed in Digit 1 IGNORE
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Appendix F
PID Set Up
PID Loop
The PowerFlex 40 has a built-in PID (proportional, integral, differential)
control loop. The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback (such
as pressure, flow or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works
by subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error
value. The PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and
outputs a frequency to try to reduce the error value to 0. To enable the
PID loop, parameter A132 [PID Ref Sel] must be set to an option other
than 0 “PID Disabled”.
Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where
the PID loop may be used.
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
F-2 PID Set Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Exclusive Control
In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID
Output becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used
when A132 [PID Ref Sel] is set to option 1, 2, 3 or 4. This configuration
does not require a master reference, only a desired set point, such as a
flow rate for a pump.
Example
• In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired
System Pressure set point.
• The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.
Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result
in a PID Error value.
• The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor
shaft speed to correct for the PID Error value.
• The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the
system are opened and closed causing changes in flow.
• When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is
the Ramped Speed Reference.
–
+
PID Prop Gain
PID Loop
PID Integ Time
PID Diff Rate
PID Enabled
PID Fdbk
PID Ref
PID
Error +
+
+
PID
Output Accel/Decel
Ramp
Freq
Command
Pump
PID Feedback =
Pressure Transducer Signal
PID Reference =
Desired System Pressure
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PID Set Up F-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Trim Control
In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In
Trim mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as
shown. Trim Control is used when A132 [PID Ref Sel] is set to option 5,
6, 7 or 8.
Example
• In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium
set point.
• The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive.
Fluctuations in tension result in a PID Error value.
• The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed.
• As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed
Reference is trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the
Equilibrium set point.
–
+
PID Prop Gain
PID Loop
PID Integ Time
PID Diff Rate
PID Enabled
P038 [Speed Reference]
PID Fdbk
PID Ref
PID
Error +
+
+
+
PID
Output Output
Freq
+
Accel/Decel
Ramp
P038 [Speed Reference]
0 Volts
PID Feedback =
Dancer Pot Signal
10 Volts
PID Reference =
Equilibrium Set Point
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
F-4 PID Set Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
PID Reference and Feedback
Parameter A132 [PID Ref Sel] is used to enable the PID mode (A132 ¦ 0
“PID Disabled”) and to select the source of the PID Reference. If A132
[PID Ref Sel] is not set to 0 “PID Disabled”, PID can still be disabled by
select programmable digital input options (parameters A051-A054) such
as “Jog”, “Local” or “PID Disable”.
Table F.A A132 [PID Ref Sel] Options
A133 [PID Feedback Sel] is used to select the source of the PID
feedback.
Table F.B A133 [PID Feedback Sel] Options
Option Description
0 “PID Disabled” Disables the PID loop (default setting)
1 “PID Setpoint“ Selects Exclusive Control. A137 [PID Setpoint] will be used to
set the value of the PID Reference
2 “0-10V Input” Selects Exclusive Control. Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that
the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will
ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
3 “4-20mA Input” Selects Exclusive Control. Selects the 4-20mA Input.
4 “Comm Port” Selects Exclusive Control. The reference word from a
communication network (see Appendix C for details on the
reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes
the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled
so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% reference. For
example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent
over the network would represent 100% reference.
5 “Setpnt, Trim” Selects Trim Control. A137 [PID Setpoint] will be used to set
the value of the PID Reference.
6 “0-10V, Trim” Selects Trim Control. Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that the
PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will ignore
any negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
7 “4-20mA, Trim” Selects Trim Control. Selects the 4-20mA Input.
8 “Comm, Trim” Selects Trim Control. The reference word from a
communication network (see Appendix C for details on the
reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes
the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled
so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% reference. For
example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent
over the network would represent 100% reference.
Option Description
0 “0-10V Input” Selects the 0-10V Input (default setting). Note that the PID will
not function with a bipolar analog input. It will ignore any
negative voltages and treat them like a zero.
1 “4-20mA Input“ Selects the 4-20mA Input.
2 “Comm Port” The reference word from a communication network (see
Appendix C of the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for details on the
reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes
the PID Feedback. The value sent over the network is scaled
so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% Feedback. For
example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent
over the network would represent 100% Feedback.
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PID Set Up F-5
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Analog PID Reference Signals
Parameters A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] are
used to scale or invert an analog PID Reference.
Important: Firmware version FRN 2.xx also allows PID Feedback
scaling from an analog input.
Examples
Scale Function
For a 0-5 volt signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 0
volt signal = 0% PID Reference and a 5 volt signal = 100% PID
Reference.
• A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] = 0.0%
• A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] = 50.0%
• A132 [PID Ref Sel] = 0 “0-10V Input”
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
InputVolts
2
4
6
8
10
12
22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
F-6 PID Set Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Invert Function
For a 4-20mA signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a
20mA signal = 0% PID Reference and a 4mA signal = 100% PID
Reference.
• A112 [Anlg In 4-20mA Lo] = 100.0%
• A113 [Anlg In 4-20mA Hi] = 0.0%
• A132 [PID Ref Sel] = 3 “4-20mA Input”
Alternatively, you can set the value of A167 [PID Invert Error] to 1 to
change the sign of the PID error. See A167 [PID Invert Error] in Chapter
3 for more details.
PID Deadband
Parameter A138 [PID Deadband] is used to set a range, in percent, of the
PID Reference that the drive will ignore.
Example
• [PID Deadband] is set to 5.0
• The PID Reference is 25.0%
• The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20.0
and 30.0%
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
PID Reference (%)
4-20mAInput
4
8
12
16
20
24
22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PID Set Up F-7
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
PID Preload
The value set in A139 [PID Preload], in Hertz, will be pre-loaded into
the integral component of the PID at any start or enable. This will cause
the drive’s frequency command to initially jump to that preload
frequency, and the PID loop starts regulating from there.
PID Limits
A130 [PID Trim Hi] and A131 [PID Trim Lo] are used to limit the PID
output and are only used in trim mode. [PID Trim Hi] sets the maximum
frequency for the PID output in trim mode. [PID Trim Lo] sets the
reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when
the PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so
that windup does not occur.
PID Enabled
Freq Cmd
PID Output
PID Pre-load Value
PID Pre-load Value > 0
22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
F-8 PID Set Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
PID Gains
The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID
regulator.
• A134 [PID Prop Gain]
The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to
the magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the PID
regulator outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For
example, a proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of max
frequency when the PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A
larger value for [PID Prop Gain] makes the proportional component
more responsive, and a smaller value makes it less responsive.
Setting [PID Prop Gain] to 0.00 disables the proportional component
of the PID loop.
• A135 [PID Integ Time]
The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts
to error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For
example, with an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral
gain component would integrate up to 100% of max frequency when
the PID error is 100% for 2 seconds. A larger value for [PID Integ
Time] makes the integral component less responsive, and a smaller
value makes it more responsive. Setting [PID Integ Time] to 0
disables the integral component of the PID loop.
• A136 [PID Diff Rate]
The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change
of the PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the
difference between the previous error and current error. Thus, with a
large error the D has a large effect and with a small error the D has
less of an effect. This parameter is scaled so that when it is set to
1.00, the process response is 0.1% of [Maximum Freq] when the
process error is changing at 1% / second. A larger value for [PID Diff
Rate] makes the differential term have more of an effect and a small
value makes it have less of an effect. In many applications, the D
gain is not needed. Setting [PID Diff Rate] to 0.00 (factory default)
disables the differential component of the PID loop.
22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PID Set Up F-9
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains
1. Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to
disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0.
After a step change in the PID Feedback:
– If the response is too slow increase A134 [PID Prop Gain].
– If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Figure F.1),
decrease A134 [PID Prop Gain].
– Typically, A134 [PID Prop Gain] is set to some value below the
point where the PID begins to go unstable.
2. Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1).
After a step change in the PID Feedback:
– If the response is too slow (see Figure F.2), or the PID Feedback
does not become equal to the PID Reference, decrease A135
[PID Integ Time].
– If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling
out (see Figure F.3), increase A135 [PID Integ Time].
3. At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if
after determining the values for A134 [PID Prop Gain] and A135
[PID Integ Time]:
– Response is still slow after a step change, increase A136 [PID
Diff Rate].
– Response is still unstable, decrease A136 [PID Diff Rate].
22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
F-10 PID Set Up
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at
different points during adjustment of the PID Gains.
Figure F.1 Unstable
Figure F.2 Slow Response – Over Damped
Figure F.3 Oscillation – Under Damped
Figure F.4 Good Response – Critically Damped
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
PID Feedback
PID Reference
Time
22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Index
A
AC Supply
Ground, 1-7
Source, 1-5
Ungrounded, 1-5
Acceleration Rate, 1-24
Advanced Program Group
Parameters, 3-14
Ambient Temperatures, 1-3
Analog Input Loss Fault, F29, 4-3
Armored Cable, 1-10
Auto Rstrt Tries Fault, F33, 4-4
Auxiliary Input Fault, F2, 4-3
B
Before Applying Power, 2-1
Bus Capacitors, Discharging, P-3, 1-2
C
Cable Length, 1-15
Cable, Power, 1-10
Capacitors, Discharging, P-3, 1-2
Catalog Number Explanation, P-4
CE Conformity, 1-25
Checklist, Start-Up, 2-1
Circuit Breakers, 1-8
Comm Loss Fault, F81, 4-4
Command Sources for Start and
Speed, 1-23
Common Symptoms and Corrective
Action, 4-5
Contactors, 1-14
Control Wiring, 1-16
Control, 2 and 3 Wire, 1-18
Conventions, Manual, P-2
Cover, Opening, 1-1
Cross Reference, Parameter
by Name, 3-45
D
Data, Diagnostic, 2-7
Data, Saving, 2-7
Deceleration Rate, 1-24
Dimensions
Drive, B-7
Minimum Clearances, 1-3
Direction
of Drive, 2-2
of Motor, 1-13
Discharging Bus Capacitors, P-3, 1-2
Disconnecting Output Power, 1-12
Display, 2-4
Display Group Parameters, 3-3
Distribution Systems, Ungrounded,
1-5
Drive Frame Size, P-2, B-7
Drive Grounding, 1-7
Drive Overload Fault, F64, 4-4
Drive Ratings, P-4, A-1
DriveExecutive, 3-1
DriveExplorer, 3-1
E
Earthing, see Grounding
Edit Parameters, 2-5
EMC/RFI
Grounding, Filter, 1-8
Interference, 1-25
Enclosure Rating, Changing, 1-3
ESD, Static Discharge, P-3
F
Faults
Analog Input Loss, F29, 4-3
Auto Rstrt Tries, F33, 4-4
Auxiliary Input, F2, 4-3
Comm Loss, F81, 4-4
Drive Overload, F64, 4-4
Ground Fault, F13, 4-3
Heatsink OvrTmp, F8, 4-3
HW OverCurrent, F12, 4-3
I/O Board Fail, F122, 4-5
Motor Overload, F7, 4-3
Motor Stalled, F6, 4-3
Net Loss, F71, 4-4
OverVoltage, F5, 4-3
Parameter Checksum, F100, 4-5
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Index-2
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Params Defaulted, F48, 4-4
Phase Short, F41-F43, 4-4
Phase to Ground Short, F38-F40,
4-4
Power Loss, F3, 4-3
Power Unit, F70, 4-4
SVC Autotune, F80, 4-4
SW OverCurrent, F63, 4-4
UnderVoltage, F4, 4-3
File
Monitor, 3-3
Filter, RFI, 1-8
Frame Designations, P-2, A-1, B-7
Fuses
Minimum Recommendations, 1-8
Ratings, A-1
G
General Precautions, P-3
Ground Fault, F13, 4-3
Grounding
Filter, 1-8
General, 1-7
H
Heatsink OvrTmp Fault, F8, 4-3
HW OverCurrent Fault, F12, 4-3
I
I/O
Block Diagram, 1-16
Terminal Block, 1-15
Terminal Designations, 1-17
Wiring, 1-14
Wiring Examples, 1-18
Wiring Multiple Drives, 1-22
I/O Board Fail Fault, F122, 4-5
Input Contactor, 1-14
Input Fusing, 1-8
Input Potentiometer, 1-18
Input Power Conditioning, 1-6
Installation of Drive, 1-1
Integral Keypad, 2-4
Interference, EMC/RFI, 1-25
IP66 Installations, 1-14
K
Keypad, 2-4
L
LEDs, 2-4
M
Menu Structure, 2-6
Minimum Clearances, 1-3
Monitor File, 3-3
Motor
Cable Length, 1-12
Changing Forward Direction of,
1-13
Disconnect, 1-12
Motor Overload Fault, F7, 4-3
Motor Stalled Fault, F6, 4-3
Motor Starter, Bulletin 140M, 1-8
Mounting Options and Clearances,
1-3
MOV Jumper Location and Removal,
1-5
N
NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations, 1-14
Net Loss Fault, F71, 4-4
O
Opening the Drive Cover, 1-1
Operating Temperatures, 1-3
Operator Interface, 2-4
Output Disconnect, 1-12
OverVoltage Fault, F5, 4-3
P
Parameter
Descriptions, 3-1
Types, 3-1
Viewing and Editing, 2-5, 2-6
Parameter Checksum Fault, F100,
4-5
Parameter Cross Reference
by Name, 3-45
Parameters
Advanced Program Group, 3-14
Display Group, 3-3
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Index-3
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Program Group, 3-9
Params Defaulted Fault, F48, 4-4
PE Ground, 1-7
Phase Short Fault, F41-F43, 4-4
Phase to Ground Fault, F38-F40, 4-4
Potentiometer, Wiring, 1-18
Power Cables and Wiring, 1-10
Power Conditioning, 1-6
Power Loss Fault, F3, 4-3
Power Unit Fault, F70, 4-4
Powering Up the Drive, 2-1
Precautions, General, P-3
Preferences, Setting, 2-7
Product Selection, B-1
Program Group Parameters, 3-9
Programming, 3-1
PTC Analog Input Wiring, 1-18
R
Ratings, A-1
Reflective Wave Protection, 1-12
Removing Cover, 1-1
Repeated Start/Stop, 1-14
Repeated Start/Stop Precautions,
1-14
RFI, see EMC/RFI
RWR (Reflective Wave Reducer),
1-12
S
Safety Ground, 1-7
Saving Data, Viewing, 2-7
Setting Preferences, 2-7
Shielded Power Cables, 1-10
Short Circuit Protection, 1-8
Sink/Source, 1-17
Software, 3-1
Speed, Control of, 2-2
Start and Speed Reference Selection
and Control, 1-23
Start/Stop
Drive, 2-2
Motor, 1-14
Starting/Stopping, The Motor, 1-14
Start-Up Checklist, 2-1
Static Discharge, ESD, P-3
Status LEDs, 2-4
Supply Source, AC, 1-5
SVC Autotune Fault, F80, 4-4
SW OverCurrent Fault, F63, 4-4
System Grounding, 1-7
T
Terminal Block
I/O, 1-15
Power, 1-13
Three Wire Control, 1-18
Two Wire Control, 1-18
U
UnderVoltage Fault, F4, 4-3
Ungrounded Supply, 1-5
Unshielded Power Cables, 1-10
W
Watts Loss, A-5
Wiring, 1-1
Block Diagram, 1-16
Examples, 1-18
I/O Terminal Descriptions, 1-17
Potentiometer, 1-18
Power, 1-10
PTC Example, 1-18
Recommendations, 1-14
22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
Index-4
PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E
Notes:
22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
U.S. Allen-Bradley DrivesTechnical Support
Tel: (1) 262.512.8176, Fax: (1) 262.512.2222, Email: support@drives.ra.rockwell.com, Online: www.ab.com/support/abdrives
Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E – June 2013
Supersedes 22B-UM001G-EN-E - August 2008 Copyright © 2013 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
www.rockwellautomation.com
Americas:Rockwell Automation,1201 South Second Street,Milwaukee,WI 53204-2496 USA,Tel:(1) 414.382.2000,Fax:(1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa:Rockwell Automation,Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36,1170 Brussels,Belgium,Tel:(32) 2 663 0600,Fax:(32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific:Rockwell Automation,Level 14,Core F,Cyberport 3,100 Cyberport Road,Hong Kong,Tel:(852) 2887 4788,Fax:(852) 2508 1846
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM

More Related Content

PDF
Furnaces
PDF
Inductortherm furnaces
PPTX
Biw with definitions
PDF
Manual mecanica de-motos
PDF
Catalogo motores eléctricos WEG
PPTX
Induction furnace
PDF
safety induction furnace.pdf
PDF
Industrial Control Systems - PLC
Furnaces
Inductortherm furnaces
Biw with definitions
Manual mecanica de-motos
Catalogo motores eléctricos WEG
Induction furnace
safety induction furnace.pdf
Industrial Control Systems - PLC

What's hot (20)

PDF
Peterbilt 379 Full diagramas electricos.pdf
PDF
Vdocuments.mx scania serie-4-sistema-electrico
PDF
Volvo Fe Truck Wiring Diagram Service Manual Download June 2009
PDF
Manual S-10/Blazer 2008
PDF
fdocuments.in_manual-john-deer-6125.pdf
PDF
Manual taller vitara 98 jlx
PDF
Ar condicionado spheros
PDF
dr ecus null-1.pdf
PDF
Manual do mixer Mackie 1604 VLZ3 (PORTUGUÊS)
PDF
Vbt115 a2
PDF
Navistar Manual de Servicio dt466 & i530E
PDF
Eges 216 manual de diagnósticos y localización de fallas - familia de moto...
PDF
Sistema elétrico constelation
PDF
Anexos ii Merceds PLD
PDF
Atv312 manual do usuário-br-11 fev11
PDF
Manual de operador Ingersoll Rand
PDF
Zf error codes (1)
PDF
Codigos de falhas volvo fh12 d12 a
PDF
Tabela de parede linha diesel
PDF
Manual actros mpii
Peterbilt 379 Full diagramas electricos.pdf
Vdocuments.mx scania serie-4-sistema-electrico
Volvo Fe Truck Wiring Diagram Service Manual Download June 2009
Manual S-10/Blazer 2008
fdocuments.in_manual-john-deer-6125.pdf
Manual taller vitara 98 jlx
Ar condicionado spheros
dr ecus null-1.pdf
Manual do mixer Mackie 1604 VLZ3 (PORTUGUÊS)
Vbt115 a2
Navistar Manual de Servicio dt466 & i530E
Eges 216 manual de diagnósticos y localización de fallas - familia de moto...
Sistema elétrico constelation
Anexos ii Merceds PLD
Atv312 manual do usuário-br-11 fev11
Manual de operador Ingersoll Rand
Zf error codes (1)
Codigos de falhas volvo fh12 d12 a
Tabela de parede linha diesel
Manual actros mpii
Ad

Similar to Manual power flex 40 en (20)

PDF
PICOSOFT Controller Book by Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation
PDF
Panelviewplusmanual
PDF
Motorola ap 8232 access point installation guide mn000032 a01
PDF
Hp compaq-pavilion-dv1000
PDF
Motorola ap 8222 access point installation guide mn000046 a01
PDF
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
PDF
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500.pdf
PDF
PLC: Manual de usuario de PLC Micrologix1500.pdf
PDF
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
PDF
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500
PDF
Q gx developer_e
PDF
Danfoss vlt fc 101 programming guide
PDF
Motorola solutions ap6522 m access point installation guide wing 5.5 versio...
PDF
Control net modules
PDF
Pcs7 7sj6x 6md63_e_mapping_file
PDF
Ap6522 access point installation guide
PDF
agilent_2706_pdhpp_manual.pdf something out other
PDF
Moog-ServoDrives-MSD_Doc_CB40859_2020_11-en.pdf
PDF
Motorola solutions ap622 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 15780...
PDF
Motorola solutions ap 6511 access point installation guide - wi ng 5.5 versio...
PICOSOFT Controller Book by Allen-Bradley Rockwell Automation
Panelviewplusmanual
Motorola ap 8232 access point installation guide mn000032 a01
Hp compaq-pavilion-dv1000
Motorola ap 8222 access point installation guide mn000046 a01
Manual CLP Omron CP1H
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500.pdf
PLC: Manual de usuario de PLC Micrologix1500.pdf
Siemens s7 300-400-sm 338 ultrasonic position encoding module
Manual de PLC Micrologix 1500
Q gx developer_e
Danfoss vlt fc 101 programming guide
Motorola solutions ap6522 m access point installation guide wing 5.5 versio...
Control net modules
Pcs7 7sj6x 6md63_e_mapping_file
Ap6522 access point installation guide
agilent_2706_pdhpp_manual.pdf something out other
Moog-ServoDrives-MSD_Doc_CB40859_2020_11-en.pdf
Motorola solutions ap622 access point installation guide (part no. 72 e 15780...
Motorola solutions ap 6511 access point installation guide - wi ng 5.5 versio...
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
AIR BAG SYStYEM mechanical enginweering.pptx
PPT
Soldering technics Aerospace electronic assembly
PPTX
ELETRONIC-PRODUCTS-ASSEMBLY-AND-SERVICING-NC-II-WEEK-1-Copy.pptx
PPTX
Operating_Systems_Presentation_With_Icons (1).pptx
PDF
Maxon CINEMA 4D 2025 Crack Free Download Latest Version
PPTX
Subordinate_Clauses_BlueGradient_Optimized.pptx
PPTX
Computer Hardware - Technology and Livelihood Education
PPTX
Pin configuration and project related to
PPTX
vortex flow measurement in instrumentation
PDF
2- Physical Layer (06).pdfgshshshbsbshshshhs
PDF
Printing Presentation to show beginners.
PPTX
Clauses_Part1.hshshpjzjxnznxnxnndndndndndndndnndptx
PDF
Topic-1-Main-Features-of-Data-Processing.pdf
PPTX
Chapter no 8 output devices dpart 2.pptx
PPT
COA______________₹₹_₹₹33₹₹₹33₹₹₹3UNIT1V8.ppt
PPTX
SAI-CAO-24CSEN2021-PPT-UNIT-------1.pptx
PDF
Melt Flow Index Tester from Perfect Group India
PDF
20A LG INR18650HJ2 3.6V 2900mAh Battery cells for Power Tools Vacuum Cleaner
PPTX
Presentation (1).pptx gjkbhhjk hjjgtihkk
PPTX
Growth Capital Investment - Espresso Capital.pptx
AIR BAG SYStYEM mechanical enginweering.pptx
Soldering technics Aerospace electronic assembly
ELETRONIC-PRODUCTS-ASSEMBLY-AND-SERVICING-NC-II-WEEK-1-Copy.pptx
Operating_Systems_Presentation_With_Icons (1).pptx
Maxon CINEMA 4D 2025 Crack Free Download Latest Version
Subordinate_Clauses_BlueGradient_Optimized.pptx
Computer Hardware - Technology and Livelihood Education
Pin configuration and project related to
vortex flow measurement in instrumentation
2- Physical Layer (06).pdfgshshshbsbshshshhs
Printing Presentation to show beginners.
Clauses_Part1.hshshpjzjxnznxnxnndndndndndndndnndptx
Topic-1-Main-Features-of-Data-Processing.pdf
Chapter no 8 output devices dpart 2.pptx
COA______________₹₹_₹₹33₹₹₹33₹₹₹3UNIT1V8.ppt
SAI-CAO-24CSEN2021-PPT-UNIT-------1.pptx
Melt Flow Index Tester from Perfect Group India
20A LG INR18650HJ2 3.6V 2900mAh Battery cells for Power Tools Vacuum Cleaner
Presentation (1).pptx gjkbhhjk hjjgtihkk
Growth Capital Investment - Espresso Capital.pptx

Manual power flex 40 en

  • 1. Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual www.abpowerflex.com 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 2. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (Publication SGI-1.1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/literature) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable. In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment. The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams. No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual. Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc. is prohibited. Throughout this manual, when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations. Important: Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product. Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Automation, and PowerFlex are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. DriveExplorer, DriveExecutive, and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc. PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation, Inc. WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you: • identify a hazard • avoid the hazard • recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present. Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment (e.g., drive or motor) to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures. 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 3. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual since the August 2008 release. Manual Updates The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual since the April 2008 release. Manual Updates Parameter Updates The following parameters have been updated with firmware version 6.xx. Description of New or Updated Information Page(s) Minimum Enclosure Volume column and new footnotes added. 1-9, A-2 Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings topic updated. A-1 Electronic Motor Overload Protection description updated. A-4 Description of New or Updated Information Page(s) Description of A056 revised. 3-17 Description of A059/A062 revised. 3-19 Fault description for F3 revised. 4-3 A table row for electrical specifications added. A-4 Graphic for the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-1 Second last paragraph in the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-2 Text in the “Writing (06) Logic Command Data” section revised. C-4 Frequency source for logic command 001 of bits 14, 13, and 12 corrected. C-4 Text in the “Writing (06) Reference” section revised. C-5 Parameter Number Description Page [Relay Out Sel] A055 Function of option 20, ParamControl, changed. Option 24, MsgControl, added. 3-16 [Relay Out Sel] A058, A061 Function of option 20, ParamControl, changed. Option 24, MsgControl, added. 3-18 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 4. soc-2 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 40 User Manual since the January 2007 release. Manual Updates New Parameter The following parameter has been added with firmware version 5.xx. Parameter Updates The following parameters have been updated with firmware version 5.xx. Description of New or Updated Information Page(s) Input description and attention text for Multiple Digital Input Connection example corrected. 1-22 New method of changing speed reference for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives described. 2-2 Description for Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys revised. 2-4 Fault description for F3 revised. 4-3 Graphic for the “Network Wiring” section revised. C-1 Descriptions for bits 6, 7, and 15 of register address 8192 (Logic Command) updated. C-4 New information on reading register address 8192 added. C-4 New information on reading register address 8193 added. C-5 Graphic for the “Connecting an RS-485 Network” section corrected. D-4 New method for inverting sign of PID error added. F-6 Parameter Number Description Page [PID Invert Error] A167 New 3-44 Parameter Number Description Page [Control Source] d012 Options 7 and 8 added. 3-5 [Start Source] P036 Description revised for option 6. 3-10 [Relay Out Sel] A055 Description revised for option 20. 3-16 [Relay Out Level] A056 Description revised. 3-17 [Opto Outx Sel] A058, A061 Description revised for option 20. 3-18 [Opto Outx Level] A059, A062 Description revised. 3-19 [Internal Freq] A069 Default value for IP66, NEMA/ UL Type 4X drives is 0.0 Hz. Default value for IP20 rated drives is 60.0 Hz. 3-22 [PID Trim Hi] A130 Description revised. 3-38 [PID Trim Lo] A131 Description revised. 3-38 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 5. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table of Contents Preface Overview Who Should Use this Manual? . . . . . . . . . P-1 Reference Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1 Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 Drive Frame Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3 Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . P-4 Chapter 1 Installation/Wiring Opening the Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Mounting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 AC Supply Source Considerations . . . . . . 1-5 General Grounding Requirements . . . . . . 1-7 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Power Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations . 1-14 I/O Wiring Recommendations . . . . . . . . 1-14 Start and Speed Reference Control . . . . . 1-23 EMC Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25 Chapter 2 Start Up Prepare For Drive Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Integral Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Viewing and Editing Parameters. . . . . . . . 2-5 Remote HIM Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters About Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Parameter Organization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Display Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Basic Program Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Advanced Program Group. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Parameter Cross Reference – by Name. . 3-45 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Drive Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Fault Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions . . 4-5 Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings . . . A-1 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2 Appendix B Accessories and Dimensions Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Product Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 6. 2 Table of Contents PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix C RS485 (DSI) Protocol Network Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 Supported Modbus Function Codes . . . . . C-3 Writing (06) Logic Command Data. . . . . . C-4 Writing (06) Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5 Reading (03) Logic Status Data. . . . . . . . . C-5 Reading (03) Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6 Reading (03) Drive Error Codes . . . . . . . . C-6 Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7 Appendix D RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable Connectivity Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1 DSI Cable Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 Connecting One Temporary Peripheral . . . D-3 Connecting One Temporary Peripheral and One Permanent Peripheral . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 Connecting Two Permanent Peripherals . . D-4 Connecting an RS-485 Network . . . . . . . . D-4 Appendix E StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions StepLogic Using Timed Steps . . . . . . . . . . E-2 StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions . . E-3 Timer Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4 Counter Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6 Appendix F PID Set Up PID Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 PID Reference and Feedback . . . . . . . . . . F-4 Analog PID Reference Signals . . . . . . . . . F-5 Index 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 7. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install, start-up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive. This manual is intended for qualified personnel. You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices. In addition, you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions. The following manuals are recommended for general drive information: For information on… See page… Who Should Use this Manual? P-1 Reference Materials P-1 Manual Conventions P-2 Drive Frame Sizes P-2 General Precautions P-3 Catalog Number Explanation P-4 Who Should Use this Manual? Reference Materials Title Publication Available Online at … Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives DRIVES-IN001… www.rockwellautomation.com/ literature Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment DRIVES-TD001… Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control SGI-1.1 A Global Reference Guide for Reading Schematic Diagrams 100-2.10 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage 8000-4.5.2 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 8. P-2 Overview PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E • In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as; drive, PowerFlex 40 or PowerFlex 40 Drive. • Parameter numbers and names are shown in this format: • The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action: Similar PowerFlex 40 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering, dimensioning, etc. A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame sizes is provided in Appendix B. Manual Conventions P031 [Motor NP Volts] Name Number Group d = Display Group P = Basic Program Group A = Advanced Program Group Word Meaning Can Possible, able to do something Cannot Not possible, not able to do something May Permitted, allowed Must Unavoidable, you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not Recommended Drive Frame Sizes 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 9. Overview P-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E General Precautions ! ATTENTION: The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs [R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)]. Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death. Darkened display LEDs is not an indication that capacitors have discharged to safe voltage levels. ! ATTENTION: Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. ! ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, “Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage” or any other applicable ESD protection handbook. ! ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system. ! ATTENTION: The bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations, overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur. 1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages can cause uncommanded positive speed changes; 2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times However, a “Stall Fault” is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1 minute. If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be disabled (see parameter A117). In addition, installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases. 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 10. P-4 Overview PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Catalog Number Explanation Code Voltage Ph. V 120V AC 1 A 240V AC 1 B 240V AC 3 D 480V AC 3 E 600V AC 3 Code Version 3 No Brake IGBT 4 Standard Code Interface Module 1 Fixed Keypad Code Enclosure N Panel Mount - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open C Panel Mount - IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X F Flange Mount - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open H Replacement Plate Drive - IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open - Contact factory for ordering information. 1-3 4 5 6-8 9 10 11 12 (1) 13-14 22B - A 1P5 N 1 1 4 AA Drive Dash Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure HIM Emission Class Type Optional Output Current @ 100-120V 50/60 Hz Input Code Amps kW (HP) 2P3 2.3 0.4 (0.5) 5P0 5.0 0.75 (1.0) 6P0 6.0 1.1 (1.5) Code Rating 0 Not Filtered 1 Filtered Output Current @ 380-480V 50/60 Hz Input Code Amps kW (HP) 1P4 1.4 0.4 (0.5) 2P3 2.3 0.75 (1.0) 4P0 4.0 1.5 (2.0) 6P0 6.0 2.2 (3.0) 010 10.5 4.0 (5.0) 012 12 5.5 (7.5) 017 17 7.5 (10) 024 24 11 (15) Code 22B PowerFlex 40 Additional accessories, options and adapters are available. See Appendix B for details. Output Current @ 500-600V 50/60 Hz Input Code Amps kW (HP) 1P7 1.7 0.75 (1.0) 3P0 3.0 1.5 (2.0) 4P2 4.2 2.2 (3.0) 6P6 6.6 4.0 (5.0) 9P9 9.9 5.5 (7.5) 012 12.2 7.5 (10) 019 19 11 (15) Code Purpose AA Reserved for thru custom firmware ZZ Output Current @ 200-240V 50/60 Hz Input Code Amps kW (HP) 2P3 2.3 0.4 (0.5) 5P0 5.0 0.75 (1.0) 8P0 8.0 1.5 (2.0) 012 12 2.2 (3.0) 017 17.5 3.7 (5.0) 024 24 5.5 (7.5) 033 33 7.5 (10) (1) Position 12 of the Catalog Number now indicates drive type. All PowerFlex 40 drives are equipped with RS485 communication. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 11. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Chapter 1 Installation/Wiring This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 40 Drive. Most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring. Every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins. IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open 1. Press and hold in the tabs on each side of the cover. 2. Pull the cover out and up to release. For information on… See page For information on… See page Opening the Cover 1-1 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1-8 Mounting Considerations 1-3 Power Wiring 1-10 AC Supply Source Considerations 1-5 I/O Wiring Recommendations 1-14 General Grounding Requirements 1-7 EMC Instructions 1-25 ! ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation. Opening the Cover 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 12. 1-2 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X 1. Loosen the four captive cover screws. 2. Pull cover straight off chassis. IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Cover Installation 1. Squarely align the cover on the chassis. 2. Lightly tighten the four captive cover screws. 3. Torque the cover screws using an alternating pattern. ! ATTENTION: To avoid an electric shock hazard, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs [R, S, T (L1, L2, L3)] and wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge before removing the external cover. Once the cover is removed, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive. Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC– and DC+ terminals on the Power Terminal Block (refer to page 1-13 for Power Terminal descriptions). The voltage must be zero. 1 3 4 2 0.8 ±0.2 N-m (7.0 ±2.0 lb.-in.) 2 1 3 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 13. Installation/Wiring 1-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E • Mount the drive upright on a flat, vertical and level surface. • Protect the cooling fan by avoiding dust or metallic particles. • Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere. • Protect from moisture and direct sunlight. Minimum Mounting Clearances Refer to Appendix B for mounting dimensions. Ambient Operating Temperatures Table 1.A Enclosure and Clearance Requirements Mounting Considerations Frame Screw Size Screw Torque DIN Rail B M4 (#8-32) 1.56-1.96 N-m (14-17 lb.-in.) 35 mm C M5 (#10-24) 2.45-2.94 N-m (22-26 lb.-in.) – B (IP66, Type 4X) M6 (#12-24) 3.95-4.75 N-m (35-42 lb.-in.) – Ambient Temperature Enclosure Rating Minimum Mounting Clearances Minimum Maximum -10°C (14°F) 40°C (104°F) IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open Use Mounting Option A IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Use Mounting Option A IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1(1) (1) Rating requires installation of the PowerFlex 40 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 option kit. Use Mounting Option B 50°C (122°F) IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open Use Mounting Option B 25 mm (1.0 in.) 120 mm (4.7 in.) 120 mm (4.7 in.) 120 mm (4.7 in.) 120 mm (4.7 in.) Mounting Option A No clearance required between drives. Mounting Option B Closest object that may restrict air flow through the drive heat sink and chassis 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 14. 1-4 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Debris Protection A plastic top panel is included with the drive. Install the panel to prevent debris from falling through the vents of the drive housing during installation. Remove the panel for IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open applications. Storage • Store within an ambient temperature range of -40° to +85°C. • Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 95%, non-condensing. • Do not expose to a corrosive atmosphere. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 15. Installation/Wiring 1-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Ungrounded Distribution Systems Disconnecting MOVs To prevent drive damage, the MOVs connected to ground shall be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system where the line-to-ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage. To disconnect these devices, remove the jumper shown in the Figures 1.1 and 1.2. 1. Turn the screw counterclockwise to loosen. 2. Pull the jumper completely out of the drive chassis. 3. Tighten the screw to keep it in place. Figure 1.1 Jumper Location (Typical) Figure 1.2 Phase to Ground MOV Removal AC Supply Source Considerations ! ATTENTION: PowerFlex 40 drives contain protective MOVs that are referenced to ground. These devices must be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded or resistive grounded distribution system. Important: Tighten screw after jumper removal. IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4XIP20, NEMA/UL Type Open R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 1 2 3 4 Three-Phase AC Input Jumper 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 16. 1-6 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Input Power Conditioning The drive is suitable for direct connection to input power within the rated voltage of the drive (see Appendix A). Listed in Table 1.B are certain input power conditions which may cause component damage or reduction in product life. If any of the conditions exist, as described in Table 1.B, install one of the devices listed under the heading Corrective Action on the line side of the drive. Important: Only one device per branch circuit is required. It should be mounted closest to the branch and sized to handle the total current of the branch circuit. Table 1.B Input Power Conditions Input Power Condition Corrective Action Low Line Impedance (less than 1% line reactance) • Install Line Reactor(2) • or Isolation Transformer • or Bus Inductor – 5.5 & 11 kW (7.5 & 15 HP) drives only (2) Refer to Appendix B for accessory ordering information. Greater than 120 kVA supply transformer Line has power factor correction capacitors • Install Line Reactor • or Isolation Transformer Line has frequent power interruptions Line has intermittent noise spikes in excess of 6000V (lightning) Phase to ground voltage exceeds 125% of normal line to line voltage • Remove MOV jumper to ground. • or Install Isolation Transformer with grounded secondary if necessary. Ungrounded distribution system 240V open delta configuration (stinger leg)(1) (1) For drives applied on an open delta with a middle phase grounded neutral system, the phase opposite the phase that is tapped in the middle to the neutral or earth is referred to as the “stinger leg,” “high leg,” “red leg,” etc. This leg should be identified throughout the system with red or orange tape on the wire at each connection point. The stinger leg should be connected to the center Phase B on the reactor. Refer to Table B.D for specific line reactor part numbers. • Install Line Reactor 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 17. Installation/Wiring 1-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The drive Safety Ground - (PE) must be connected to system ground. Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked. Figure 1.3 Typical Grounding Ground Fault Monitoring If a system ground fault monitor (RCD) is to be used, only Type B (adjustable) devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping. Safety Ground - (PE) This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code. One of these points must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod or bus bar. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes. Motor Ground The motor ground must be connected to one of the ground terminals on the drive. Shield Termination - SHLD Either of the safety ground terminals located on the power terminal block provides a grounding point for the motor cable shield. The motor cable shield connected to one of these terminals (drive end) should also be connected to the motor frame (motor end). Use a shield terminating or EMI clamp to connect the shield to the safety ground terminal. The conduit box option may be used with a cable clamp for a grounding point for the cable shield. When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring, the shield should be grounded at the source end only, not at the drive end. General Grounding Requirements SHLD U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 18. 1-8 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E RFI Filter Grounding Using single phase drives with integral filter, or an external filter with any drive rating, may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Therefore, the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution ground. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked. The PowerFlex 40 does not provide branch short circuit protection. This product should be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker. National and local industrial safety regulations and/or electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations. Fusing The PowerFlex 40 has been UL tested and approved for use with input fuses. The ratings in the table that follows are the minimum recommended values for use with each drive rating. The devices listed in this table are provided to serve as a guide. Bulletin 140M (Self-Protected Combination Controller)/UL489 Circuit Breakers When using Bulletin 140M or UL489 rated circuit breakers, the guidelines listed below must be followed in order to meet the NEC requirements for branch circuit protection. • Bulletin 140M can be used in single and group motor applications. • Bulletin 140M can be used up stream from the drive without the need for fuses. Fuses and Circuit Breakers ! ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection, use only the recommended line fuses/circuit breakers specified in this section. 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 19. Installation/Wiring 1-9 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table 1.C Minimum Recommended Branch Circuit Protective Devices Voltage Rating Drive Rating kW (HP) Fuse Rating(1) Amps 140M Motor Protectors(2) (3) Catalog No. Recommended MCSContactors Catalog No. Min. Enclosure Volume(4) Inches3 120V AC – 1-Phase 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.1 (1.5) 15 35 40 140M-C2E-C16 140M-D8E-C20 140M-F8E-C32 100-C12 100-C23 100-C37 1655 1655 1655 240V AC – 1-Phase 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 10 20 30 40 140M-C2E-B63 140M-C2E-C16 140M-D8E-C20 140M-F8E-C32 100-C09 100-C12 100-C23 100-C37 1655 1655 1655 2069 240V AC – 3-Phase 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 3.7 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 6 10 15 25 30 40 60 140M-C2E-B40 140M-C2E-C10 140M-C2E-C16 140M-C2E-C16 140M-F8E-C25 140M-F8E-C32 140M-G8E-C45 100-C07 100-C09 100-C12 100-C23 100-C23 100-C37 100-C60 1655 1655 1655 1655 1655 2069 2069 480V AC – 3-Phase 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 4.0 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 11 (15) 3 6 10 15 20 25 30 50 140M-C2E-B25 140M-C2E-B40 140M-C2E-B63 140M-C2E-C10 140M-C2E-C16 140M-D8E-C20 140M-D8E-C20 140M-F8E-C32 100-C07 100-C07 100-C09 100-C09 100-C23 100-C23 100-C23 100-C43 1655 1655 1655 1655 1655 2069 2069 2069 600V AC – 3-Phase 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 4.0 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 11 (15) 6 6 10 15 20 25 40 140M-C2E-B25 140M-C2E-B40 140M-D8E-B63 140M-D8E-C10 140M-D8E-C16 140M-D8E-C16 140M-F8E-C25 100-C09 100-C09 100-C09 100-C09 100-C16 100-C23 100-C30 1655 1655 1655 1655 2069 2069 2069 (1) Recommended Fuse Type: UL Class J, CC, T or Type BS88; 600V (550V) or equivalent. (2) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. (3) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (4) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure. 22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 20. 1-10 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Motor Cable Types Acceptable for 200-600 Volt Installations A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than 15 mils (0.4 mm/0.015 in.). Do not route more than three sets of motor leads in a single conduit to minimize “cross talk”. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required, shielded cable must be used. UL installations in 50°C ambient must use 600V, 75°C or 90°C wire. UL installations in 40°C ambient should use 600V, 75°C or 90°C wire. Use copper wire only. Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degree C. Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire. Unshielded THHN, THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and/or conduit fill rates limits are provided. Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas. Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 mils and should not have large variations in insulation concentricity. Shielded/Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications / networking are also good candidates for shielded cable. Power Wiring ! ATTENTION: National Codes and standards (NEC, VDE, BSI, etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment. Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. ! ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from “cross coupled” power leads. 22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 21. Installation/Wiring 1-11 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications. In addition, the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks. Refer to Reflected Wave in “Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives,” publication DRIVES-IN001A-EN-P. Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation, including temperature, flexibility, moisture characteristics and chemical resistance. In addition, a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufacturer as having coverage of at least 75%. An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment. A good example of recommended cable is Belden® 295xx (xx determines gauge). This cable has four (4) XLPE insulated conductors with a 100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket. Other types of shielded cable are available, but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length. Particularly, some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield. This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance. Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive, these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known. Recommended Shielded Wire Location Rating/Type Description Standard (Option 1) 600V, 90°C (194°F) XHHW2/RHW-2 Anixter B209500-B209507, Belden 29501-29507, or equivalent • Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. • Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire. • PVC jacket. Standard (Option 2) Tray rated 600V, 90°C (194°F) RHH/RHW-2 Anixter OLF-7xxxxx or equivalent • Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation. • 5 mil single helical copper tape (25% overlap min.) with three bare copper grounds in contact with shield. • PVC jacket. Class I & II; Division I & II Tray rated 600V, 90°C (194°F) RHH/RHW-2 Anixter 7V-7xxxx-3G or equivalent • Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum armor. • Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall. • Three copper grounds on #10 AWG and smaller. 22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 22. 1-12 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Reflected Wave Protection The drive should be installed as close to the motor as possible. Installations with long motor cables may require the addition of external devices to limit voltage reflections at the motor (reflected wave phenomena). See Table 1.D for recommendations. The reflected wave data applies to all frequencies 2 to 16 kHz. For 240V ratings, reflected wave effects do not need to be considered. Table 1.D Maximum Cable Length Recommendations Output Disconnect The drive is intended to be commanded by control input signals that will start and stop the motor. A device that routinely disconnects then reapplies output power to the motor for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor should not be used. If it is necessary to disconnect power to the motor with the drive outputting power, an auxiliary contact should be used to simultaneously disable drive control run commands. Reflected Wave 380-480V Ratings Motor Insulation Rating Motor Cable Only(1) (1) Longer cable lengths can be achieved by installing devices on the output of the drive. Consult factory for recommendations. 1000 Vp-p 15 meters (49 feet) 1200 Vp-p 40 meters (131 feet) 1600 Vp-p 170 meters (558 feet) 22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 23. Installation/Wiring 1-13 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Power Terminal Block The power terminal block is covered by a finger guard. To remove: 1. Press in and hold the locking tab. 2. Slide finger guard down and out. Replace the finger guard when wiring is complete. Figure 1.4 Power Terminal Block (Typical) Table 1.E Power Terminal Block Specifications Terminal (1) Description R/L1, S/L2 1-Phase Input R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3-Phase Input U/T1 To Motor U/T1 = Switch any two motor leads to change forward direction. V/T2 To Motor V/T2 W/T3 To Motor W/T3 P2, P1 DC Bus Inductor Connection (C Frame drives only.) The C Frame drive is shipped with a jumper between Terminals P2 and P1. Remove this jumper only when a DC Bus Inductor will be connected. Drive will not power up without a jumper or inductor connected. DC+, DC- DC Bus Connection BR+, BR- Dynamic Brake Resistor Connection Safety Ground - PE (1) Important: Terminal screws may become loose during shipment. Ensure that all terminal screws are tightened to the recommended torque before applying power to the drive. Frame Maximum Wire Size(1) (1) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations. Minimum Wire Size(1) Torque B 5.3 mm2 (10 AWG) 1.3 mm2 (16 AWG) 1.7-2.2 N-m (16-19 lb.-in.) C 8.4 mm2 (8 AWG) 1.3 mm2 (16 AWG) 2.9-3.7 N-m (26-33 lb.-in.) V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3 BR+ BR-DC- DC+ V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3 P2 P1 BR+ BR-DC- DC+ B Frame C Frame 22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 24. 1-14 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Use the plugs supplied with IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives to seal unused holes in the conduit entry plate. Important: Completely seat the plug inner rim for the best seal. Motor Start/Stop Precautions Important points to remember about I/O wiring: • Always use copper wire. • Wire with an insulation rating of 600V or greater is recommended. • Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot). Important: I/O terminals labeled “Common” are not referenced to the safety ground (PE) terminal and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference. IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations I/O Wiring Recommendations ! ATTENTION: A contactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage. The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor. If used, the input device must not exceed one operation per minute or drive damage can occur. ! ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solid-state components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive. When the AC line is removed, there will be a loss of any inherent regenerative braking effect that might be present - the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be required. ! ATTENTION: Driving the 4-20mA analog input from a voltage source could cause component damage. Verify proper configuration prior to applying input signals. 22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 25. Installation/Wiring 1-15 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Control Wire Types Table 1.F Recommended Control and Signal Wire(1) I/O Terminal Block Table 1.G I/O Terminal Block Specifications (3) Maximum/minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept - these are not recommendations. Maximum Control Wire Recommendations Do not exceed control wiring length of 30 meters (100 feet). Control signal cable length is highly dependent on electrical environment and installation practices. To improve noise immunity, the I/O terminal block Common must be connected to ground terminal/protective earth. If using the RS485 (DSI) port, I/O Terminal 16 should also be connected to ground terminal/protective earth. Wire Type(s)(2) Description Minimum Insulation Rating Belden 8760/9460 (or equiv.) 0.8 mm2 (18AWG), twisted pair, 100% shield with drain.(1) (1) If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded wire may not be necessary, but is always recommended. (2) Stranded or solid wire. 300V 60 degrees C (140 degrees F)Belden 8770 (or equiv.) 0.8 mm2(18AWG), 3 conductor, shielded for remote pot only. Frame Maximum Wire Size (3) Minimum Wire Size (3) Torque B & C 1.3 mm2 (16 AWG) 0.2 mm2 (24 AWG) 0.5-0.8 N-m (4.4-7 lb.-in.) 22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 26. 1-16 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure 1.5 Control Wiring Block Diagram (1) Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a coast to stop input except when P036 [Start Source] is set to “3-Wire” or “Momt FWD/REV” control. In three wire control, I/O Terminal 01 is controlled by P037 [Stop Mode]. All other stop sources are controlled by P037 [Stop Mode]. Important: The drive is shipped with a jumper installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 11. Remove this jumper when using I/O Terminal 01 as a stop or enable input. (2) Two wire control shown. For three wire control use a momentary input on I/O Terminal 02 to command a start. Use a maintained input for I/O Terminal 03 to change direction. (3) When using an opto output with an inductive load such as a relay, install a recovery diode parallel to the relay as shown, to prevent damage to the output. (4) When the ENBL enable jumper is removed, I/O Terminal 01 will always act as a hardware enable, causing a coast to stop without software interpretation. 04 05 06 07 01 02 03 08 09 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Digital Common Digital Input 1 Digital Input 2 Digital Input 3 Stop (1)(4) Start/Run FWD (2) Direction/Run REV Digital Input 4 Opto Common R1 R2 R3 Relay N.O. Relay Common Relay N.C. +24V DC +10V DC 0-10V (or ±10V) Input Analog Common 4-20mA Input Analog Output Opto Output 1 Opto Output 2 RS485 Shield +24V +10V Typical SNKWiring Typical SRCWiring 1 RS485 (DSI) R1 R2 R3 SNK SRC 0-10V 0-20mA 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 13 14 15 06 07 08 09 16 17 18 19 (1) Enable Jumper (4) 30V DC 50mA Non-inductive Common 24V ENBL Enable (4) Jumper (3) Pot must be 1-10k ohm 2 Watt Min.0-10V 0/4-20mA Analog Output Select SRCSNK 30V DC 125V AC 240V AC Resistive 3.0A 3.0A 3.0A Inductive 0.5A 0.5A 0.5A P036 [Start Source] Stop I/O Terminal 01 Stop Keypad Per P037 Coast 3-Wire Per P037 Per P037(4) 2-Wire Per P037 Coast Momt FWD/REV Per P037 Per P037(4) RS485 Port Per P037 Coast 22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 27. Installation/Wiring 1-17 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table 1.H Control I/O Terminal Designations No. Signal Default Description Param. R1 Relay N.O. Fault Normally open contact for output relay. A055 R2 Relay Common – Common for output relay. R3 Relay N.C. Fault Normally closed contact for output relay. A055 Analog Output Select DIP Switch 0-10V Sets analog output to either voltage or current. Setting must match A065 [Analog Out Sel]. Sink/Source DIP Switch Source (SRC) Inputs can be wired as Sink (SNK) or Source (SRC) via DIP Switch setting. 01 Stop (1) Coast The factory installed jumper or a normally closed input must be present for the drive to start. P036 (1) 02 Start/Run FWD Not Active Command comes from the integral keypad by default. To disable reverse operation, see A095 [Reverse Disable]. P036, P037 03 Direction/Run REV Not Active P036, P037, A095 04 Digital Common – For digital inputs. Electronically isolated with digital inputs from analog I/O and opto outputs. 05 Digital Input 1 Preset Freq Program with A051 [Digital In1 Sel]. A051 06 Digital Input 2 Preset Freq Program with A052 [Digital In2 Sel]. A052 07 Digital Input 3 Local Program with A053 [Digital In3 Sel]. A053 08 Digital Input 4 Jog Forward Program with A054 [Digital In4 Sel]. A054 09 Opto Common – For opto-coupled outputs. Electronically isolated with opto outputs from analog I/O and digital inputs. 11 +24V DC – Referenced to Digital Common. Drive supplied power for digital inputs. Maximum output current is 100mA. 12 +10V DC – Referenced to Analog Common. Drive supplied power for 0-10V external potentiometer. Maximum output current is 15mA. P038 13 ±10V In (2) Not Active For external 0-10V (unipolar) or ±10V (bipolar) input supply (input impedance = 100k ohm) or potentiometer wiper. P038, A051- A054, A123, A132 14 Analog Common – For 0-10V In or 4-20mA In. Electronically isolated with analog inputs and outputs from digital I/O and opto outputs. 15 4-20mA In (2) Not Active For external 4-20mA input supply (input impedance = 250 ohm). P038, A051- A054, A132 16 Analog Output OutFreq 0-10 The default analog output is 0-10V. To covert to a current value, change the Analog Output Select DIP Switch to 0-20mA. Program with A065 [Analog Out Sel]. Max analog value can be scaled with A066 [Analog Out High]. Maximum Load: 4-20mA = 525 ohm (10.5V) 0-10V = 1k ohm (10mA) A065, A066 17 Opto Output 1 MotorRunning Program with A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] A058, A059, A064 18 Opto Output 2 At Frequency Program with A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] A061, A062, A064 19 RS485 (DSI) Shield – Terminal should be connected to safety ground - PE when using the RS485 (DSI) communications port. (1) See Footnotes (1) and (4) on page 1-16. (2) 0-10V In and 4-20mA In are distinct input channels and may be connected simultaneously. Inputs may be used independently for speed control or jointly when operating in PID mode. 22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 28. 1-18 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E I/O Wiring Examples Input/Output Connection Example Potentiometer 1-10k Ohm Pot. Recommended (2 Watt minimum) P038 [Speed Reference] = 2 “0-10V Input” Analog Input 0 to +10V, 100k ohm impedance 4-20 mA, 250 ohm impedance Bipolar P038 [Speed Reference] = 2 “0-10V Input” and A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl] = 1 “Bi-Polar In” Unipolar (Voltage) P038 [Speed Reference] = 2 “0-10V Input” Unipolar (Current) P038 [Speed Reference] = 3 “4-20mA Input” Analog Input, PTC For Drive Fault Wire the PTC and External Resistor (typically matched to the PTC Hot Resistance) to I/O Terminals 12, 13, 14. Wire R2/R3 Relay Output (SRC) to I/O Terminals 5 & 11. A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 3 “Aux Fault” A055 [Relay Out Sel] = 10 “Above Anlg V” A056 [Relay Out Level] = % Voltage Trip 12 13 14 13 14 -/+ 10V Common 13 14 + Common 14 15 Common + 11 12 13 14 R2 R3 05 VTrip = × 100 RPTC (hot) RPTC (hot) + Re Re RPTC 22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 29. Installation/Wiring 1-19 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E 2 Wire SRC Control - Non-Reversing P036 [Start Source] = 2, 3 or 4 Input must be active for the drive to run. When input is opened, the drive will stop as specified by P037 [Stop Mode]. If desired, a User Supplied 24V DC power source can be used. Refer to the “External Supply (SRC)” example. Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC) 2 Wire SNK Control - Non-Reversing Internal Supply (SNK) 2 Wire SRC Control - Run FWD/Run REV P036 [Start Source] = 2, 3 or 4 Input must be active for the drive to run. When input is opened, the drive will stop as specified by P037 [Stop Mode]. If both Run Forward and Run Reverse inputs are closed at the same time, an undetermined state could occur. Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC) Input/Output Connection Example 11 01 02 Stop-Run +24V Common 01 02 04 Stop-Run Each digital input draws 6 mA. 01 02 04 Stop-Run 11 01 02 03 Stop-Run Forward Stop-Run Reverse Common 01 02 03 04 Stop-Run Forward Stop-Run Reverse +24V Each digital input draws 6 mA. 22B-UM001.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 30. 1-20 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E 2 Wire SNK Control - Run FWD/Run REV Internal Supply (SNK) 3 Wire SRC Control - Non-Reversing P036 [Start Source] = 1 A momentary input will start the drive. A stop input to I/O Terminal 01 will stop the drive as specified by P037 [Stop Mode]. Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC) 3 Wire SNK Control - Non-Reversing Internal Supply (SNK) 3 Wire SRC Control - Reversing P036 [Start Source] = 1 A momentary input will start the drive. A stop input to I/O Terminal 01 will stop the drive as specified by P037 [Stop Mode]. I/O Terminal 03 determines direction. Internal Supply (SRC) External Supply (SRC) Input/Output Connection Example Stop-Run Forward Stop-Run Reverse 01 02 03 04 11 01 02 Stop Start 01 02 04 +24V Common Stop Start Each digital input draws 6 mA. Stop Start 01 02 03 04 11 01 02 03 Stop Start Direction +24V Common Stop Start Direction 01 02 03 04 Each digital input draws 6 mA. 22B-UM001.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 31. Installation/Wiring 1-21 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E 3 Wire SNK Control - Reversing Internal Supply (SNK) Opto Output (1 & 2) A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] determines Opto-Output 1 (I/O Terminal 17) operation. A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] determines Opto-Output 2 (I/O Terminal 18) operation. When using Opto-Output with an inductive load such as a relay, install a recovery diode parallel to the relay as shown, to prevent damage to the output. Opto-Output 1 Analog Output A065 [Analog Out Sel] determines analog output type and drive conditions. 0-10V, 1k ohm minimum 0-20mA/4-20mA, 525 ohm maximum A065 [Analog Out Sel] = 0 through 14 The Analog Output Select DIP Switch must be set to match the analog output signal mode set in A065 [Analog Out Sel]. Input/Output Connection Example Stop Start Direction 01 02 03 04 Common+24V CR 09 17 Each Opto-Output is rated 30V DC 50 mA (Non-inductive). 14 16 Common + 22B-UM001.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 32. 1-22 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Typical Multiple Drive Connection Examples Input/Output Connection Example Multiple Digital Input Connections Customer Inputs can be wired per External Supply (SRC) examples on 1-19 and 1-20. When connecting a single input such as Run, Stop, Reverse or Preset Speeds to multiple drives, it is important to connect I/O Terminal 04 common together for all drives. If they are to be tied into another common (such as earth ground or separate apparatus ground) only one point of the daisy chain of I/O Terminal 04 should be connected. Multiple Analog Connections When connecting a single potentiometer to multiple drives it is important to connect I/O Terminal 14 common together for all drives. I/O Terminal 14 common and I/O Terminal 13 (potentiometer wiper) should be daisy-chained to each drive. All drives must be powered up for the analog signal to be read correctly. Customer Inputs Optional Ground Connection 04020402 0402 ! ATTENTION: Digital inputs on multiple drives should not be tied together when using SNK (Internal Supply) mode. In SNK mode, if power is removed from one drive, inadvertent operation of other drives that share the same I/O Common connection may occur. Remote Potentiometer Optional Ground Connection 12 13 1413 14 13 14 22B-UM001.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 33. Installation/Wiring 1-23 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is normally determined by P038 [Speed Reference]. However, when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 2, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and the digital input is active, or if A132 is not set to option 0, the speed reference commanded by P038 [Speed Reference] will be overridden. See the chart below for the override priority. Start and Speed Reference Control Jog Input Enabled and Active: A051, A052, A053 or A054 = 2, 11, 12 No Yes No Local/Remote Input Enabled and Active: [Digital Inx Sel] = 5 No Yes Drive Stopped (Not Running) Yes Drive will Start and Run at Jog Speed. Direction comes from I/O Terminal 03 Dir/Run REV or Jog Forward/Jog Reverse command Start, Speed and Direction commands come from Integral Keypad. Comm Select Input Enabled and Active: [Digital Inx Sel] = 6 No Yes Start, Speed and Direction commands come from RS485 (DSI) port. 0-10V Override Enabled and Active: [Digital Inx Sel] = 13 No Yes Speed commands come from 0-10V. Start and Direction follows P036 [Start Source] or Bi-Polar input when enabled. Speed commands come from 4-20mA. Start and Direction follows P036 [Start Source]. 4-20mA Override Enabled and Active: [Digital Inx Sel] = 14 No Yes P038 [Speed Reference] = 4 or 5 No Yes Run as specified by P038 [Speed Refernece]. Start and Direction commands come from P036 [Start Source]. Run as specified by A071-A077 [Preset Freq 1-7]. Start and Direction commands come from P036 [Start Source]. A051/A052/A053 Preset Inputs Active No Yes Run as specified by A132 [PID Ref Select]. Start and Direction commands come from P036 [Start Source]. PID Enabled: A132 [PID Ref Select] ≠ 0 No Yes Run as specified by P038 [Speed Reference]. Start and Direction commands come from P036 [Start Source]. 22B-UM001.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 34. 1-24 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Accel/Decel Selection The Accel/Decel rate can be obtained by a variety of methods. The default rate is determined by P039 [Accel Time 1] and P040 [Decel Time 1]. Alternative Accel/Decel rates can be made through digital inputs, RS485 (DSI) communications and/or parameters. See the chart below for the override priority. No Yes No RS485 (DSI) Port Controls Speed No Yes Drive Stopped (Not Running) Yes Either P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1] or A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2] can be selected when RS485 (DSI) port is active. Input is programmed as "Accel 2 & Decel 2" A051, A052, A053 or A054 = 1 No Yes A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2] is active when input is active. Speed is controlled by [Preset Freq x] No Yes P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1]; A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2] determined by the active Preset Frequency. See A070-A077 [Preset Freq 0-7] Either P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1] or A067 [Accel Time 2]/A068 [Decel Time 2] can be selected by the Digit 3 setting of the Step Logic parameters. See A140-A147 [Stp Logic 0-7] Speed is controlled by Stp Logic No Yes P039 [Accel Time 1]/P040 [Decel Time 1] are used. Drive will Start and Run at Jog Speed. Drive will use A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] Jog Input Enabled and Active: A051, A052, A053 or A054 = 2, 11,12 22B-UM001.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 35. Installation/Wiring 1-25 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage (LV) Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities. PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User Manual. CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at: http://www.ab.com/certification/ce/docs. Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) • EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) • EN61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods. General Notes • If the plastic top panel is removed or the optional conduit box is not installed, the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) and top openings less than 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) to maintain compliance with the LV Directive. • The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents. • Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended. • Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance. EMC Instructions 22B-UM001.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 36. 1-26 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1-3 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800-3. 1. Grounding as described in Figure 1.6. Refer to page 1-8 for additional grounding recommendations. 2. Output power, control (I/O) and signal wiring must be braided, shielded cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or equivalent attenuation. 3. Allowable cable length in Table 1.I is not exceeded. Table 1.I Allowable Cable Length (1) Refer to Appendix B for details on optional external filters. (2) Equivalent to EN55011 Class A. (3) Equivalent to EN55011 Class B. Figure 1.6 Connections and Grounding (1) First Environment Unrestricted Distribution installations require a shielded enclosure. Keep wire length as short as possible between the enclosure entry point and the EMI filter. (2) Integral EMI filters are available on 240V, 1-Phase drives. Filter Type EN61800-3 First Environment Restricted Distribution or Second Environment (2) EN61800-3 First Environment Unrestricted Distribution (3) Integral 10 meters (33 feet) 1 meter (3 feet) External - S Type(1) 10 meters (33 feet) 1 meter (3 feet) External - L Type(1) 100 meters (328 feet) 5 meters (16 feet) R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 EMI Fittings and Metal Conduit IP 30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Option Kit Shielded Enclosure (1) Building Structure Steel Enclosure Ground Connection (2) EMI Filter L1' L2' L3' L1 L2 L3 Shielded Motor Cable 22B-UM001.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 37. Installation/Wiring 1-27 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E EN61000-3-2 • 0.75 kW (1 HP) 240V 1-Phase and 3-Phase drives and 0.37 kW (0.5 HP) 240V 1-Phase drives are suitable for installation on a private low voltage power network. Installations on a public low voltage power network may require additional external harmonic mitigation. • Other drive ratings meet the current harmonic requirements of EN61000-3-2 without additional external mitigation. 22B-UM001.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 38. 1-28 Installation/Wiring PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Notes: 22B-UM001.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 39. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how to start up the PowerFlex 40 Drive. To simplify drive setup, the most commonly programmed parameters are organized in a single Basic Program Group. Important: Read the General Precautions section before proceeding. Before Applying Power to the Drive ❏ 1. Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure. ❏ 2. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive. ❏ 3. Verify that any digital control power is 24 volts. ❏ 4. Verify that the Sink (SNK)/Source (SRC) Setup DIP Switch is set to match your control wiring scheme. See Figure 1.5 on page 1-16 for location. Important: The default control scheme is Source (SRC). The Stop terminal is jumpered (I/O Terminals 01 and 11) to allow starting from the keypad. If the control scheme is changed to Sink (SNK), the jumper must be removed from I/O Terminals 01 and 11 and installed between I/O Terminals 01 and 04. ❏ 5. Verify that the Stop input is present or the drive will not start. Important: If I/O Terminal 01 is used as a stop input, the jumper between I/O Terminals 01 and 11 must be removed. ! ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedures. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not Proceed. Remove All Power including user supplied control voltages. User supplied voltages may exist even when main AC power is not applied to the drive. Correct the malfunction before continuing. Prepare For Drive Start-Up 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 40. 2-2 Start Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Applying Power to the Drive ❏ 6. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. ❏ 7. Familiarize yourself with the integral keypad features (see page 2-4) before setting any Program Group parameters. If a fault appears on power up, refer to Fault Descriptions on page 4-3 for an explanation of the fault code. Start, Stop, Direction and Speed Control Factory default parameter values allow the drive to be controlled from the integral keypad. No programming is required to start, stop, change direction and control speed directly from the integral keypad. Important: To disable reverse operation, see A095 [Reverse Disable]. Changing the Speed Reference of an IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drive When a Display Group parameter, for example, d001 [Output Freq] is displayed, and P038 [Speed Ref] is set to A069 [Internal Freq], you can change the internal frequency using the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys. When the internal frequency is being adjusted, its value is displayed and the Hertz LED flashes. Any changes are saved immediately. The display then returns to the Display Group parameter previously shown. TIP: By default, the speed reference of an IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drive is set to the internal frequency, A069 [Internal Freq]. FAULT VOLTS AMPS HERTZ RUN FWD REV PROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 41. Start Up 2-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E TIP: You can also change the speed reference by editing the parameter A069 [Internal Freq] in program mode. For details on how to enter the program mode, see Viewing and Editing Parameters on page 2-5. Note: The default value of A069 [Internal Freq] is 0 Hz. For IP20 rated PowerFlex 40 drives, the default value of this parameter is 60 Hz. Variable Torque Fan/Pump Applications For improved motor tuning performance when using a premium efficient motor on a variable torque load, set A084 [Boost Select] to option 2 “35.0, VT”. 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 42. 2-4 Start Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Integral Keypad No. LED LED State Description ➊ Run/Direction Status Steady Red Indicates drive is running and commanded motor direction. Flashing Red Drive has been commanded to change direction. Indicates actual motor direction while decelerating to zero. ➋ Alphanumeric Display Steady Red Indicates parameter number, parameter value, or fault code. Flashing Red Single digit flashing indicates that digit can be edited. All digits flashing indicates a fault condition. ➌ Displayed Units Steady Red Indicates the units of the parameter value being displayed. ➍ Program Status Steady Red Indicates parameter value can be changed. ➎ Fault Status Flashing Red Indicates drive is faulted. ➏ Pot Status Steady Green Indicates potentiometer on Integral Keypad is active.(1) ➐ Start Key Status Steady Green Indicates Start key on Integral Keypad is active. The Reverse key is also active unless disabled by A095 [Reverse Disable]. No. Key Name Description ➑ Escape Back one step in programming menu. Cancel a change to a parameter value and exit Program Mode. Select Advance one step in programming menu. Select a digit when viewing parameter value. Up Arrow Down Arrow Scroll through groups and parameters. Increase/decrease the value of a flashing digit. Used to adjust internal frequency of IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives only when a Display Group parameter is shown and P038 [Speed Reference] is set to internal frequency, A069 [Internal Freq]. Enter Advance one step in programming menu. Save a change to a parameter value. ➒ Potentiometer(1) Used to control speed of drive. Default is active. Controlled by parameter P038 [Speed Reference]. Start Used to start the drive. Default is active. Controlled by parameter P036 [Start Source]. Reverse Used to reverse direction of the drive. Default is active. Controlled by parameters P036 [Start Source] and A095 [Reverse Disable]. Stop Used to stop the drive or clear a fault. This key is always active. Controlled by parameter P037 [Stop Mode]. (1) IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives are not equipped with a potentiometer. FAULT VOLTS AMPS HERTZ RUN FWD REV PROGRAM ➊ ➋ ➍ ➏ ➒ ➎ Menu Description Display Group (View Only) Consists of commonly viewed drive operating conditions. Basic Program Group Consists of most commonly used programmable functions. Advanced Program Group Consists of remaining programmable functions. Fault Designator Consists of list of codes for specific fault conditions. Displayed only when fault is present. ➌ ➑➐ 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 43. Start Up 2-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The last user-selected Display Group parameter is saved when power is removed and is displayed by default when power is reapplied. The following is an example of basic integral keypad and display functions. This example provides basic navigation instructions and illustrates how to program the first Program Group parameter. Viewing and Editing Parameters Step Key(s) Example Displays 1. When power is applied, the last user-selected Display Group parameter number is briefly displayed with flashing characters. The display then defaults to that parameter’s current value. (Example shows the value of d001 [Output Freq] with the drive stopped.) 2. Press Esc once to display the Display Group parameter number shown on power-up. The parameter number will flash. 3. Press Esc again to enter the group menu. The group menu letter will flash. 4. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the group menu (d, P and A). 5. Press Enter or Sel to enter a group. The right digit of the last viewed parameter in that group will flash. 6. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters that are in the group. 7. Press Enter or Sel to view the value of a parameter. If you do not want to edit the value, press Esc to return to the parameter number. 8. Press Enter or Sel to enter program mode to edit the parameter value. The right digit will flash and the Program LED will illuminate if the parameter can be edited. 9. Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the parameter value. If desired, press Sel to move from digit to digit or bit to bit. The digit or bit that you can change will flash. 10.Press Esc to cancel a change. The digit will stop flashing, the previous value is restored and the Program LED will turn off. Or Press Enter to save a change. The digit will stop flashing and the Program LED will turn off. 11.Press Esc to return to the parameter list. Continue to press Esc to back out of the programming menu. If pressing Esc does not change the display, then d001 [Output Frequency] is displayed. Press Enter or Sel to enter the group menu. or or or or or or VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM VOLTS AMPS HERTZ FAULTPROGRAM 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 44. 2-6 Start Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The Basic Program Group (page 3-9) contains the most commonly changed parameters. The Menu Structure below can be accessed through the following Human Interface Module options: Remote HIM Menu Structure HIM Option Catalog Number Remote Panel Mount Small, LCD Display 22-HIM-C2S Remote Handheld, LCD Display 22-HIM-A3 User Display Diagnostics HIM Reference Increase/Decrease Hz Main Menu: HIM Setup Esc Sel Esc Faults Device Status Device Version View Fault Queue Clear Faults Clear Fault Queue Device Status STS1 STS2 STS3 STS4 Parameters Device Version Press Press Press to move between menu items Press to move between main menu tabs to select a tab or menu item to move 1 level back in the menu structure Memory Storage HIM CopyCat Device -> HIM Device <- HIM Delete File Function File Name File Name File Name File Name File Name PowerFlex 40 Connected DSI Devices Device Select Parameters Device Cat. No. Device Name Series Firmware Group Name Parameter Number Name Parameter Number Name Parameter Number Name Sel Parameter Name Value Screen Limits Screen PowerFlex 40 Product Data Series Firmware Parameters 001 Startup Display 002 Startup Param 004 User Disp Line 1 005 User Disp Line 2 006 Large Disp Param 007 LCD Contrast 008 Reset Device 009 Device Type 010 M/S Status Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Sel Groups Linear List Changed Params Files Screen Stats Screen 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 45. Start Up 2-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive, use this menu to access detailed data about the drive. Parameters Menu Use this menu to access drive parameters. Parameters can be displayed in groups, in a linear list, or only those changed from their defaults. Device Select Menu Use this menu to access the drive or peripheral that the drive is to access. Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to, or recalled from HIM sets. HIM sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile HIM memory. HIM Setup Menu The HIM and drive have features that you can customize. Option Description Faults View fault queue or fault information, clear faults or clear fault queue. Device Status View status information about the drive or peripheral. Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components. Option Description HIM Copycat Device -> HIM Device <- HIM Save data to a HIM set or load data from a HIM set to active drive memory. A maximum of 5 HIM set can be stored. Delete File Delete a HIM set. Option Description Parameters Access parameters in HIM to set display options. Device Version View HIM version, hardware series and firmware version 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 46. 2-8 Start Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Notes: 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 47. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 40 parameters. Parameters are programmed (viewed/edited) using the integral keypad. As an alternative, programming can also be performed using DriveExplorer™ or DriveExecutive™ software, a personal computer and a serial converter module. Refer to Appendix B for catalog numbers. To configure a drive to operate in a specific way, drive parameters may have to be set. Three types of parameters exist: • ENUM ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items. Each item is represented by a number. • Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value (i.e. 0.1 Volts). • Bit Parameters Bit parameters have four individual bits associated with features or conditions. If the bit is 0, the feature is off or the condition is false. If the bit is 1, the feature is on or the condition is true. Some parameters are marked as follows. For information on… See page… About Parameters 3-1 Parameter Organization 3-2 Basic Program Group 3-9 Advanced Program Group 3-14 Parameter Cross Reference – by Name 3-45 About Parameters = Stop drive before changing this parameter. = 32 bit parameter. Parameters marked 32 bit will have two parameter numbers when using RS485 communications and programming software. 32 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 48. 3-2 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Refer to page 3-45 for an alphabetical listing of parameters. Parameter Organization AdvancedProgram Group Display Group BasicProgram Group See page 3-9 Motor NP Volts P031 Motor NP Hertz P032 Motor OL Current P033 Minimum Freq P034 Maximum Freq P035 Start Source P036 Stop Mode P037 Speed Reference P038 Accel Time 1 P039 Decel Time 1 P040 Reset To Defalts P041 Voltage Class P042 Motor OL Ret P043 See page 3-3 Output Freq d001 Commanded Freq d002 Output Current d003 Output Voltage d004 DC Bus Voltage d005 Drive Status d006 Fault 1 Code d007 Fault 2 Code d008 Fault 3 Code d009 Process Display d010 Control Source d012 Contrl In Status d013 Dig In Status d014 Comm Status d015 Control SW Ver d016 Drive Type d017 Elapsed Run Time d018 Testpoint Data d019 Analog In 0-10V d020 Analog In 4-20mA d021 Output Power d022 Output Power Fctr d023 Drive Temp d024 Counter Status d025 Timer Status d026 Stp Logic Status d028 Torque Current d029 See page 3-14 Comm Loss Time A106 Comm Format A107 Language A108 Anlg Out Setpt A109 Anlg In 0-10V Lo A110 Anlg In 0-10V Hi A111 Anlg In4-20mA Lo A112 Anlg In4-20mA Hi A113 Slip Hertz @ FLA A114 Process Time Lo A115 Process Time Hi A116 Bus Reg Mode A117 Current Limit 2 A118 Skip Frequency A119 Skip Freq Band A120 Stall Fault Time A121 Analog In Loss A122 10V Bipolar Enbl A123 Var PWM Disable A124 Torque Perf Mode A125 Motor NP FLA A126 Autotune A127 IR Voltage Drop A128 Flux Current Ref A129 PID Trim Hi A130 PID Trim Lo A131 PID Ref Sel A132 PID Feedback Sel A133 PID Prop Gain A134 PID Integ Time A135 PID Diff Rate A136 PID Setpoint A137 PID Deadband A138 PID Preload A139 Stp Logic 0 A140 Stp Logic 1 A141 Stp Logic 2 A142 Stp Logic 3 A143 Stp Logic 4 A144 Stp Logic 5 A145 Stp Logic 6 A146 Stp Logic 7 A147 Stp Logic Time 0 A150 Stp Logic Time 1 A151 Stp Logic Time 2 A152 Stp Logic Time 3 A153 Stp Logic Time 4 A154 Stp Logic Time 5 A155 Stp Logic Time 6 A156 Stp Logic Time 7 A157 EM Brk Off Delay A160 EM Brk On Delay A161 MOP Reset Sel A162 DB Threshold A163 Comm Write Mode A164 Anlg Loss Delay A165 Analog In Filter A166 PID Invert Error A167 See page 3-14 Digital In1 Sel A051 Digital In2 Sel A052 Digital In3 Sel A053 Digital In4 Sel A054 Relay Out Sel A055 Relay Out Level A056 Opto Out1 Sel A058 Opto Out1 Level A059 Opto Out2 Sel A061 Opto Out2 Level A062 Opto Out Logic A064 Analog Out Sel A065 Analog Out High A066 Accel Time 2 A067 Decel Time 2 A068 Internal Freq A069 Preset Freq 0 A070 Preset Freq 1 A071 Preset Freq 2 A072 Preset Freq 3 A073 Preset Freq 4 A074 Preset Freq 5 A075 Preset Freq 6 A076 Preset Freq 7 A077 Jog Frequency A078 Jog Accel/Decel A079 DC Brake Time A080 DC Brake Level A081 DB Resistor Sel A082 S Curve % A083 Boost Select A084 Start Boost A085 Break Voltage A086 Break Frequency A087 Maximum Voltage A088 Current Limit 1 A089 Motor OL Select A090 PWM Frequency A091 Auto Rstrt Tries A092 Auto Rstrt Delay A093 Start At PowerUp A094 Reverse Disable A095 Flying Start En A096 Compensation A097 SW Current Trip A098 Process Factor A099 Fault Clear A100 Program Lock A101 Testpoint Sel A102 Comm Data Rate A103 Comm Node Addr A104 Comm Loss Action A105 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 49. Programming and Parameters 3-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group d001 [Output Freq] Related Parameter(s): d002, d010, P034, P035, P038 Output frequency present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/P035 [Maximum Freq] Display: 0.1 Hz d002 [Commanded Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d013, P034, P035, P038 Value of the active frequency command. Displays the commanded frequency even if the drive is not running. Important: The frequency command can come from a number of sources. Refer to Start and Speed Reference Control on page 1-23 for details. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/P035 [Maximum Freq] Display: 0.1 Hz d003 [Output Current] The output current present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps × 2) Display: 0.01 Amps d004 [Output Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, A084, A088 Output voltage present at terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/Drive Rated Volts Display: 1 VAC d005 [DC Bus Voltage] Present DC bus voltage level. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: Based on Drive Rating Display: 1 VDC 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 50. 3-4 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group (continued) d006 [Drive Status] Related Parameter(s): A095 Present operating condition of the drive. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/1 Display: 1 1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False Running Bit 0 Forward Bit 1 Accelerating Bit 2 Decelerating Bit 3 d007 [Fault 1 Code] d008 [Fault 2 Code] d009 [Fault 3 Code] A code that represents a drive fault. The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur (d007 [Fault 1 Code] = the most recent fault). Repetitive faults will only be recorded once. Refer to Chapter 4 for fault code descriptions. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: F2/F122 Display: F1 d010 [Process Display] Related Parameter(s): d001, A099 32 bit parameter. The output frequency scaled by A099 [Process Factor]. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.00/9999 Display: 0.01 – 1 32 Output Freq Process Factor Process Display=x 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 51. Programming and Parameters 3-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group (continued) d012 [Control Source] Related Parameter(s): P036, P038, A051-A054 Displays the active source of the Start Command and Speed Command which are normally defined by the settings of P036 [Start Source] and P038 [Speed Reference] but may be overridden by digital inputs. Refer to the flowcharts on pages 1-23 and 1-24 for details. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/9 Display: 1 Start Command Digit 0 0 = Keypad 1 = 3-Wire 2 = 2-Wire 3 = 2-Wire Level Sensitive 4 = 2-Wire High Speed 5 = RS485 (DSI) Port 9 = Jog Speed Command Digit 1 0 = Drive Potentiometer 1 = A069 [Internal Freq] 2 = 0-10V Input/Remote Potentiometer 3 = 4-20mA Input 4 = A070-A077 [Preset Freq x] (A051 - A053 [Digital Inx Sel] must be set to 4) 5 = RS485 (DSI) Port 6 = StepLogic Control (Parameters A140 - A147) 7 = Anlg In Mult 8 = PID 9 = Jog Freq Reserved Digit 2 Reserved Digit 3 d013 [Contrl In Status] Related Parameter(s): d002, P034, P035 Status of the control terminal block control inputs. Important: Actual control commands may come from a source other than the control terminal block. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/1 Display: 1 1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present Start / Run FWD Input (I/O Terminal 02) Bit 0 Direction / Run REV Input (I/O Terminal 03) Bit 1 Stop Input(1) (I/O Terminal 01) Bit 2 (1) The stop input must be present in order to start the drive. When this bit is a 1 the drive can be started. When this bit is a 0 the drive will stop. Dynamic Brake Transistor On Bit 3 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 52. 3-6 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group (continued) d014 [Dig In Status] Related Parameter(s): A051-A054 Status of the control terminal block digital inputs. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/1 Display: 1 1 = Input Present, 0 = Input Not Present Digital In1 Sel (I/O Terminal 05) Bit 0 Digital In2 Sel (I/O Terminal 06) Bit 1 Digital In3 Sel (I/O Terminal 07) Bit 2 Digital In4 Sel (I/O Terminal 08) Bit 3 d015 [Comm Status] Related Parameter(s): A103-A107 Status of the communications ports. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/1 Display: 1 1 = Condition True, 0 = Condition False Receiving Data Bit 0 Transmitting Data Bit 1 RS485 (DSI) Based Option Connected Bit 2 (Allen-Bradley devices only.) Communication Error Occurred Bit 3 d016 [Control SW Ver] Main Control Board software version. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 1.00/99.99 Display: 0.01 d017 [Drive Type] Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 1001/9999 Display: 1 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 53. Programming and Parameters 3-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group (continued) d018 [Elapsed Run Time] Accumulated time drive is outputting power. Time is displayed in 10 hour increments. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/9999 Hrs Display: 1 = 10 Hrs d019 [Testpoint Data] Related Parameter(s): A102 The present value of the function selected in A102 [Testpoint Sel]. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/FFFF Display: 1 Hex d020 [Analog In 0-10V] Related Parameter(s): A110, A111 The present value of the voltage at I/O Terminal 13 (100.0% = 10 volts). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% d021 [Analog In 4-20mA] Related Parameter(s): A112, A113 The present value of the current at I/O Terminal 15 (0.0% = 4mA, 100.0% = 20mA). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% d022 [Output Power] Output power present at T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W). Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Power × 2) Display: 0.01 kW d023 [Output Powr Fctr] The angle in electrical degrees between motor voltage and motor current. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/180.0 deg Display: 0.1 deg 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 54. 3-8 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Display Group (continued) d024 [Drive Temp] Present operating temperature of the drive power section. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/120 degC Display: 1 degC d025 [Counter Status] The current value of the counter when counter is enabled. Values Default: Read only Min/Max: 0/9999 Display: 1 d026 [Timer Status] 32 bit parameter. The current value of the timer when timer is enabled. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.0/9999 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs 32 d028 [Stp Logic Status] When P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 6 “Stp Logic”, this parameter will display the current step of the StepLogic profile as defined by parameters A140-A147 [Stp Logic x]. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0/7 Display: 1 d029 [Torque Current] The current value of the motor torque current. Values Default: Read Only Min/Max: 0.00/(Drive Rated Amps × 2) Display: 0.01 Amps 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 55. Programming and Parameters 3-9 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Basic Program Group P031 [Motor NP Volts] Related Parameter(s): d004, A084, A085, A086, A087 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Set to the motor nameplate rated volts. Values Default: Based on Drive Rating Min/Max: 20/Drive Rated Volts Display: 1 VAC P032 [Motor NP Hertz] Related Parameter(s): A084, A085, A086, A087, A090 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency. Values Default: 60 Hz Min/Max: 15/400 Hz Display: 1 Hz P033 [Motor OL Current] Related Parameter(s): A055, A058, A061, A089, A090, A098, A114, A118 Set to the maximum allowable motor current. The drive will fault on an F7 Motor Overload if the value of this parameter is exceeded by 150% for 60 seconds. Values Default: Based on Drive Rating Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 2) Display: 0.1 Amps P034 [Minimum Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d013, P035, A085, A086, A087, A110, A112 Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously. Values Default: 0.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d013, P034, A065, A078, A085, A086, A087, A111, A113 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Sets the highest frequency the drive will output. Values Default: 60 Hz Min/Max: 0/400 Hz Display: 1 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 56. 3-10 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Basic Program Group (continued) P036 [Start Source] Related Parameter(s): d012, P037 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Sets the control scheme used to start the drive. Refer to Start and Speed Reference Control on page 1-23 for details about how other drive settings can override the setting of this parameter. Important: For all settings except option 3, the drive must receive a leading edge from the start input for the drive to start after a stop input, loss of power or fault condition. Options 0 “Keypad” (Default) • Integral keypad controls drive operation. • I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop. • When active, the Reverse key is also active unless disabled by A095 [Reverse Disable]. 1 “3-Wire” I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = stop according to the value set in P037 [Stop Mode]. 2 “2-Wire” I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop. 3 “2-W Lvl Sens” Drive will restart after a “Stop” command when: • Stop is removed and • Start is held active 4 “2-W Hi Speed” Important: There is greater potential voltage on the output terminals when using this option. • Outputs are kept in a ready-to-run state. The drive will respond to a “Start” command within 10 ms. • I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop. 5 “Comm Port” • Remote communications. Refer to Appendix C for details. • I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop. 6 “Momt FWD/REV” • Drive will start after a momentary input from either the Run FWD Input (I/O Terminal 02) or the Run REV Input (I/ O Terminal 03). • I/O Terminal 1 “Stop” = coast to stop. ! ATTENTION: Hazard of injury exists due to unintended operation. When P036 [Start Source] is set to option 3, and the Run input is maintained, the Run inputs do not need to be toggled after a Stop input for the drive to run again. A Stop function is provided only when the Stop input is active (open). 22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 57. Programming and Parameters 3-11 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Basic Program Group (continued) P037 [Stop Mode] Related Parameter(s): P036, A080, A081, A082, A105, A160 Active stop mode for all stop sources [e.g. keypad, run forward (I/O Terminal 02), run reverse (I/O Terminal 03), RS485 port] except as noted below. Important: I/O Terminal 01 is always a coast to stop input except when P036 [Start Source] is set for “3-Wire” control. When in three wire control, I/O Terminal 01 is controlled by P037 [Stop Mode]. Hardware Enable Circuitry By default, I/O Terminal 01 is a coast to stop input. The status of the input is interpreted by drive software. If the application requires the drive to be disabled without software interpretation, a “dedicat- ed” hardware enable configuration can be utilized. This is accomplished by removing the ENBL enable jumper on the control board. In this case, the drive will always coast to a stop regardless of the settings of P036 [Start Source] and P037 [Stop Mode]. Options 0 “Ramp, CF”(1) (Default) Ramp to Stop. “Stop” command clears active fault. 1 “Coast, CF”(1) Coast to Stop. “Stop” command clears active fault. 2 “DC Brake, CF”(1) DC Injection Braking Stop. “Stop” command clears active fault. 3 “DCBrkAuto,CF”(1) DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff. • Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A080 [DC Brake Time]. OR • Drive shuts off if the drive detects that the motor is stopped. “Stop” command clears active fault. 4 “Ramp” Ramp to Stop. 5 “Coast” Coast to Stop. 6 “DC Brake” DC Injection Braking Stop. 7 “DC BrakeAuto” DC Injection Braking Stop with Auto Shutoff. • Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in A080 [DC Brake Time]. OR • Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded. 8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. “Stop” Command clears active fault. 9 “Ramp+EM Brk” Ramp to Stop with EM Brake Control. (1) Stop input also clears active fault. 22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 58. 3-12 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Basic Program Group (continued) P038 [Speed Reference] Related Parameter(s): d001, d002, d012, d020, d021, P039, P040, A051-A054, A069, A070-A077, A110-A113, A123, A132, A140-A147, A150-A157 Sets the source of the speed reference to the drive. The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is normally determined by P038 [Speed Reference]. However, when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 2, 4, 5, 6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 and the digital input is active, or if A132 [PID Ref Sel] is not set to option 0, the speed reference commanded by P038 [Speed Reference] will be overridden. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on speed reference control priority. Options 0 “Drive Pot” (Default) Frequency command from the potentiometer on the integral keypad. Important: This option is not available with IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives. Internal frequency command comes from A069 [Internal Freq]. 1 “InternalFreq” (IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Default) Internal frequency command from A069 [Internal Freq]. Must be set when using MOP function. 2 “0-10V Input” External frequency command from the 0-10V or ±10V analog input or remote potentiometer. 3 “4-20mA Input” External frequency command from the 4-20mA analog input. 4 “Preset Freq” External frequency command as defined by A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x] when A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] are programmed as “Preset Frequencies” and the digital inputs are active. 5 “Comm Port” External frequency command from the communications port. Refer to Appendix C for details. 6 “Stp Logic” External frequency command as defined by A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x] and A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x]. 7 “Anlg In Mult” External frequency command as defined by the product of the analog inputs (shown in d020 [Analog In 0-10V] and d021 [Analog In 4-20mA]). [Analog In 0-10V] × [Analog In 4-20mA] = Speed Command Example: 100% × 50% = 50% P039 [Accel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P038, P040, A051-A054, A067, A070-A077, A140-A147 Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases. Values Default: 10.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs Maximum Freq Accel Time Accel Rate= Speed 0 Time P035 [Maximum Freq] P039 or A067 [Accel Time x] P040 or A068 [Decel Time x] 0 Acceleration Deceleration 22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 59. Programming and Parameters 3-13 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Basic Program Group (continued) P040 [Decel Time 1] Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, A051-A054, A068, A070-A077, A140-A147 Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases. Values Default: 10.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs Maximum Freq Decel Time Decel Rate= Speed 0 Time P035 [Maximum Freq] P039 or A067 [Accel Time x] P040 or A068 [Decel Time x] 0 Acceleration Deceleration P041 [Reset To Defalts] Stop drive before changing this parameter. Resets all parameter values to factory defaults. Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default) 1 “Factory Rset” • After the reset function is complete, this parameter will set itself back to “0”. • Causes an F48 Params Defaulted fault. P042 [Voltage Class] Stop drive before changing this parameter. Sets the voltage class of 600V drives. Options 2 “Low Voltage” 480V 3 “High Voltage” (Default) 600V P043 [Motor OL Ret] Related Parameter(s): P033 Enables/disables the Motor Overload Retention function. When Enabled, the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power-down and restored at power-up. A change to this parameter setting resets the counter. Options 0 “Disabled” (Default) 1 “Enabled” 22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 60. 3-14 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group A051 [Digital In1 Sel] (I/O Terminal 05) A052 [Digital In2 Sel] (I/O Terminal 06) A053 [Digital In3 Sel] (I/O Terminal 07) A054 [Digital In4 Sel] (I/O Terminal 08) Related Parameter(s): d012, d014, P038, P039, P040, A067, A068, A070-A077, A078, A079, A118, A140-A147 Selects the function for the digital inputs. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on speed reference control priority. Options 0 “Not Used” Terminal has no function but can be read over network communications via d014 [Dig In Status]. 1 “Acc & Dec 2” • When active, A067 [Accel Time 2] and A068 [Decel Time 2] are used for all ramp rates except Jog. • Can only be tied to one input. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-24 for more information on Accel/Decel selection. 2 “Jog” • When input is present, drive accelerates according to the value set in A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to the value set in A078 [Jog Frequency]. • When input is removed, drive ramps to a stop according to the value set in A079 [Jog Accel/Decel]. • A valid “Start” command will override this input. 3 “Aux Fault” When enabled, an F2 Auxiliary Input fault will occur when the input is removed. 4 “Preset Freq” (A051 & A052 Default) Refer to A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x]. Important: Digital Inputs have priority for frequency control when programmed as Preset Speed and are active. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-23 for more information on speed reference control priority. 5 “Local” (A053 Default) When active, sets integral keypad as start source and potentiometer on the integral keypad as speed source. Important: Speed source for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives comes from A069 [Internal Freq]. 6 “Comm Port” • When active, sets communications device as default start/ speed command source. • Can only be tied to one input. 7 “Clear Fault” When active, clears an active fault. 8 “RampStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately ramp to a stop regardless of how P037 [Stop Mode] is set. 9 “CoastStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately coast to a stop regardless of how P037 [Stop Mode] is set. 10 “DCInjStop,CF” Causes drive to immediately begin a DC Injection stop regardless of how P037 [Stop Mode] is set. 11 “Jog Forward” (A054 Default) Drive accelerates to A078 [Jog Frequency] according to A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command. 12 “Jog Reverse” Drive accelerates to A078 [Jog Frequency] according to A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] and ramps to stop when input becomes inactive. A valid start will override this command. Stop drive before changing this parameter. 22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 61. Programming and Parameters 3-15 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E A051 - A054 Options (Cont.) 13 “10V In Ctrl” Selects 0-10V or ±10V control as the frequency reference. Start source is not changed. 14 “20mA In Ctrl” Selects 4-20mA control as the frequency reference. Start source is not changed. 15 “PID Disable” Disables PID function. Drive uses the next valid non-PID speed reference. 16 “MOP Up” Increases the value of A069 [Internal Freq] at the current Accel rate if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1 “InternalFreq”. For IP20 rated drives, the default for A069 is 60.0 Hz. For IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives, the default for A069 is 0.0 Hz. 17 “MOP Down” Decreases the value of A069 [Internal Freq] at the current Decel rate if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1 “InternalFreq”. For IP20 rated drives, the default for A069 is 60.0 Hz. For IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives, the default for A069 is 0.0 Hz. 18 “Timer Start” Clears and starts the timer function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs. 19 “Counter In” Starts the counter function. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs. 20 “Reset Timer” Clears the active timer. 21 “Reset Countr” Clears the active counter. 22 “Rset Tim&Cnt” Clears the active timer and counter. 23 “Logic In1” Logic function input number 1. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (see parameters A055, A058, A061 Options 11-14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x]. 24 “Logic In2” Logic function input number 2. May be used to control the relay or opto outputs (see parameters A055, A058, A061 Options 11-14). May be used in conjunction with StepLogic parameters A140 - A147 [Stp Logic x]. 25 “Current Lmt2” When active, A118 [Current Limit 2] determines the drive current limit level. 26 “Anlg Invert” Inverts the scaling of the analog input levels set in A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] or A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] and A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi]. 27 “EM Brk Rlse” If EM brake function is enabled, this input releases the brake. ! ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used. 22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 62. 3-16 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A055 [Relay Out Sel] Related Parameter(s): P033, A056, A092, A140-A147, A150-A157, A160, A161 Sets the condition that changes the state of the output relay contacts. Options 0 “Ready/Fault” (Default) Relay changes state when power is applied. This indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Relay returns drive to shelf state when power is removed or a fault occurs. 1 “At Frequency” Drive reaches commanded frequency. 2 “MotorRunning” Motor is receiving power from the drive. 3 “Reverse” Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction. 4 “Motor Overld” Motor overload condition exists. 5 “Ramp Reg” Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring. 6 “Above Freq” • Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. 7 “Above Cur” • Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. Important: Value for A056 [Relay Out Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output current. 8 “Above DCVolt” • Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. 9 “Retries Exst” Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. 10 “Above Anlg V” • Analog input voltage (I/O Terminal 13) exceeds the value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • DonotuseifA123 [10VBipolarEnbl]issetto1“Bi-PolarIn”. • This parameter setting can also be used to indicate a PTC trip point when the input (I/O Terminal 13) is wired to a PTC and external resistor. • Use A056 to set threshold. 11 “Logic In 1” An input is programmed as “Logic In 1” and is active. 12 “Logic In 2” An input is programmed as “Logic In 2” and is active. 13 “Logic 1 & 2” Both Logic inputs are programmed and active. 14 “Logic 1 or 2” One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active. 15 “StpLogic Out” Drive enters StepLogic step with Digit 3 of Command Word (A140 - A147) set to enable StepLogic output. 16 “Timer Out” • Timer has reached value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. 17 “Counter Out” • Counter has reached value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. 18 “Above PF Ang” • Power Factor angle has exceeded the value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. • Use A056 to set threshold. 22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 63. Programming and Parameters 3-17 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E A055 Options (Cont.) 19 “Anlg In Loss” Analog input loss has occurred. Program A122 [Analog In Loss] for desired action when input loss occurs. 20 “ParamControl” Prior to FRN 4.01, this option enables the output to be controlled over network communications by writing to A056 [Relay Out Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.) With FRN 4.01 and later, the logic command word bit 15 has full control of A056. See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page C-4. 21 “NonRec Fault” • Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. • A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] in not enabled. • A Non-resettable fault has occurred. 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” EM brake is energized. Program A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] and A161 [EM Brk On Delay] for desired action. 23 “Above Fcmd” The current commanded frequency exceeds the value set in A056 [Relay Out Level]. 24 “MsgControl” With FRN 4.01 and later, this option enables the output to be controlled over network communications by writing to A056 [Relay Out Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.) A056 [Relay Out Level] Related Parameter(s): A055 32 bit parameter. Sets the trip point for the digital output relay if the value of A055 [Relay Out Sel] is 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18 or 20. With FRN 4.01 and later, when the value of A055 is set to 20, the logic command word bit 15 has full control of A056. Values Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/9999 Display: 0.1 32 A055 Setting A056 Min/Max 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 20 23 0/400 Hz 0/180% 0/815 Volts 0/100% 0.1/9999 Secs 1/9999 Counts 1/180 degs 0/1 0/400 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 64. 3-18 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] Related Parameter(s): P033, A059, A062, A092, A122, A123, A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] A160, A161, A140-A147, A150-A157 Determines the operation of the programmable opto outputs. Options 0 “Ready/Fault” Opto outputs are active when power is applied. This indicates that the drive is ready for operation. Opto outputs are inactive when power is removed or a fault occurs. 1 “At Frequency” (A061 Default) Drive reaches commanded frequency. 2 “MotorRunning” (A058 Default) Motor is receiving power from the drive. 3 “Reverse” Drive is commanded to run in reverse direction. 4 “Motor Overld” Motor overload condition exists. 5 “Ramp Reg” Ramp regulator is modifying the programmed accel/decel times to avoid an overcurrent or overvoltage fault from occurring. 6 “Above Freq” • Drive exceeds the frequency (Hz) value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 7 “Above Cur” • Drive exceeds the current (% Amps) value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. Important: Value for A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level] must be entered in percent of drive rated output current. 8 “Above DCVolt” • Drive exceeds the DC bus voltage value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 9 “Retries Exst” Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. 10 “Above Anlg V” • Analog input voltage (I/O Terminal 13) exceeds the value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Do not use if A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl] is set to 1 “Bi-Polar In”. • This parameter setting can also be used to indicate a PTC trip point when the input (I/O Terminal 13) is wired to a PTC and external resistor. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 11 “Logic In 1” An input is programmed as “Logic In 1” and is active. 12 “Logic In 2” An input is programmed as “Logic In 2” and is active. 13 “Logic 1 & 2” Both Logic inputs are programmed and active. 14 “Logic 1 or 2” One or both Logic inputs are programmed and one or both is active. 15 “StpLogic Out” Drive enters StepLogic step with Digit 3 of Command Word (A140 - A147) set to enable StepLogic output. 16 “Timer Out” • Timer has reached value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 17 “Counter Out” • Counter has reached value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 65. Programming and Parameters 3-19 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E A058, A061 Options (Cont.) 18 “Above PF Ang” • Power Factor angle has exceeded the value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. • Use A059 or A062 to set threshold. 19 “Anlg In Loss” Analog input loss has occurred. Program A122 [Analog In Loss] for desired action when input loss occurs. 20 “ParamControl” Prior to FRN 4.01, this option enables the output to be controlled over network communications by writing to A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.) With FRN 4.01 and later: Setting this option for A058 means the logic command word bit 6 has full control of A059. Setting this option for A059 means the logic command word bit 7 has full control of A062. See Writing (06) Logic Command Data on page C-4. 21 “NonRec Fault” • Value set in A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is exceeded. • A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] in not enabled. • A Non-resettable fault has occurred. 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” EM brake is energized. Program A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] and A161 [EM Brk On Delay] for desired action. 23 “Above Fcmd” The current commanded frequency exceeds the value set in A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. 24 “MsgControl” With FRN 4.01 and later: Enables the output to be controlled over the network communications by writing to A059 or A062 [Opto Outx Level]. (0 = Off, 1 = On.) A059 [Opto Out1 Level] Related Parameter(s): A058, A061 A062 [Opto Out2 Level] 32 bit parameter. Determines the on/off point for the opto outputs when A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] is set to option 6, 7, 8, 10, 16, 17, 18 or 20. With FRN 4.01 and later, when the value of A058 is set to 20, the logic command word bit 6 has full control of A059 and when the value of A061 is set to 20, bit 7 has full control of A062. Values Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/9999 Display: 0.1 32 A058 & A061 Setting A059 & A062 Min/Max 6 7 8 10 16 17 18 20 23 0/400 Hz 0/180% 0/815 Volts 0/100% 0.1/9999 Secs 1/9999 Counts 1/180 degs 0/1 0/400 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 19 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 66. 3-20 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A064 [Opto Out Logic] Determines the logic (Normally Open/NO or Normally Closed/NC) of the opto outputs. Values Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/3 Display: 1 A064 Option Opto Out1 Logic Opto Out2 Logic 0 1 2 3 NO (Normally Open) NC (Normally Closed) NO (Normally Open) NC (Normally Closed) NO (Normally Open) NO (Normally Open) NC (Normally Closed) NC (Normally Closed) A065 [Analog Out Sel] Related Parameter(s): P035, A066 Sets the analog output signal mode (0-10V, 0-20mA, or 4-20mA). The output is used to provide a signal that is proportional to several drive conditions. Values Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/23 Display: 1 Option Output Range Minimum Output Value Maximum Output Value A066 [Analog Out High] DIP Switch Position Related Parameter 0 “OutFreq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-10V d001 1 “OutCurr 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-10V d003 2 “OutVolt 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-10V d004 3 “OutPowr 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-10V d022 4 “TstData 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-10V d019 5 “OutFreq 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20mA d001 6 “OutCurr 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-20mA d003 7 “OutVolt 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-20mA d004 8 “OutPowr 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-20mA d022 9 “TstData 0-20” 0-20mA 0 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-20mA d019 10 “OutFreq 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Hz P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20mA d001 11 “OutCurr 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated Output Current 0-20mA d003 12 “OutVolt 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 Volts 120% Drive Rated Output Volts 0-20mA d004 13 “OutPowr 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0 kW 200% Drive Rated Power 0-20mA d022 14 “TstData 4-20” 4-20mA 4 mA = 0000 65535 (Hex FFFF) 0-20mA d019 15 “OutTorq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-10V d029 16 “OutTorq 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-20 mA d029 17 “OutTorq 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0 Amps 200% Drive Rated FLA 0-20 mA d029 18 “Setpnt 0-10” 0-10V 0V = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-10V A109 19 “Setpnt 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-20 mA A109 20 “Setpnt 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = 0% 100.0% Setpoint Setting 0-20 mA A109 21 “MinFreq 0-10” 0-10V 0V = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-10V d001 22 “MinFreq 0-20” 0-20 mA 0 mA = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20 mA d001 23 “MinFreq 4-20” 4-20 mA 4 mA = Min. Freq P035 [Maximum Freq] 0-20 mA d001 22B-UM001.book Page 20 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 67. Programming and Parameters 3-21 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A066 [Analog Out High] Related Parameter(s): A065 Scales the Maximum Output Value for the A065 [Analog Out Sel] source setting. Examples: Values Default: 100% Min/Max: 0/800% Display: 1% A066 Setting A065 Setting A065 Max. Output Value 50% 1 “OutCurr 0-10” 5V for 200% Drive Rated Output Current 90% 8 “OutPowr 0-20” 18mA for 200% Drive Rated Power A067 [Accel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P039, A051-A054, A070-A077, A140-A147 When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except jog. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-24 for details. Values Default: 20.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/600.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs Maximum Freq Accel Time Accel Rate= Speed 0 Time P035 [Maximum Freq] P039 or A067 [Accel Time x] P040 or A068 [Decel Time x] 0 Acceleration Deceleration 22B-UM001.book Page 21 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 68. 3-22 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A068 [Decel Time 2] Related Parameter(s): P040, A051-A054, A070-A077, A140-A147 When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except jog. Refer to the flowchart on page 1-24 for details. Values Default: 20.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs Maximum Freq Decel Time Decel Rate= Speed 0 Time P035 [Maximum Freq] P039 or A067 [Accel Time x] P040 or A068 [Decel Time x] 0 Acceleration Deceleration A069 [Internal Freq] Related Parameter(s): P038, A162 Provides the frequency command to the drive when P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 1 “Internal Freq”. When enabled, this parameter will change the frequency command in “real time” using the integral keypad Up Arrow or Down Arrow when in program mode. Important: Once the desired command frequency is reached, the Enter key must be pressed to store this value to EEPROM memory. If the ESC key is used before the Enter key, the frequency will return to the original value following the normal accel/decel curve. If A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 16 “MOP Up” or 17 “MOP Down” this parameter acts as the MOP frequency reference. Values Default: 60.0 Hz for IP20 rated drives 0.0 Hz for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drives Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 22 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 69. Programming and Parameters 3-23 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A070 [Preset Freq 0](1) A071 [Preset Freq 1] A072 [Preset Freq 2] A073 [Preset Freq 3] A074 [Preset Freq 4] A075 [Preset Freq 5] A076 [Preset Freq 6] A077 [Preset Freq 7] Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, P040, A051-A053, A067, A068, A140-A147, A150-A157 Values A070 Default:(1) A071 Default: A072 Default: A073 Default: A074 Default: A075 Default: A076 Default: A077 Default: 0.0 Hz 5.0 Hz 10.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 30.0 Hz 40.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 60.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz Provides a fixed frequency command value when A051 - A053 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 4 “Preset Frequencies”. An active preset input will override speed command as shown in the flowchart on page 1-23. (1) To activate A070 [Preset Freq 0] set P038 [Speed Reference] to option 4 “Preset Freq 0-3”. Input State of Digital In 1 (I/O Terminal 05 when A051 = 4) Input State of Digital In 2 (I/O Terminal 06 when A052 = 4) Input State of Digital In 3 (I/O Terminal 07 when A053 = 4) Frequency Source Accel / Decel Parameter Used(2) 0 0 0 A070 [Preset Freq 0] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1] 1 0 0 A071 [Preset Freq 1] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1] 0 1 0 A072 [Preset Freq 2] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2] 1 1 0 A073 [Preset Freq 3] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2] 0 0 1 A074 [Preset Freq 4] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1] 1 0 1 A075 [Preset Freq 5] [Accel Time 1] / [Decel Time 1] 0 1 1 A076 [Preset Freq 6] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2] 1 1 1 A077 [Preset Freq 7] [Accel Time 2] / [Decel Time 2] (2) When a Digital Input is set to “Accel 2 & Decel 2”, and the input is active, that input overrides the settings in this table. A078 [Jog Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P035, A051-A054, A079 Sets the output frequency when a jog command is issued. Values Default: 10.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/[Maximum Freq] Display: 0.1 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 23 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 70. 3-24 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A079 [Jog Accel/Decel] Related Parameter(s): A078, A051-A054 Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued. Values Default: 10.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.1/600.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A080 [DC Brake Time] Related Parameter(s): P037, A081 Sets the length of time that DC brake current is “injected” into the motor. Refer to parameter A081 [DC Brake Level]. Values Default: 0.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/99.9 Secs (A setting of 99.9 = Continuous) Display: 0.1 Secs A081 [DC Brake Level] Related Parameter(s): P037, A080 Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when P037 [Stop Mode] is set to either “Ramp” or “DC Brake”. Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 0.05 Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 1.8) Display: 0.1 Amps P037 DC Injection Braking Mode Volts/Speed Voltage Time Stop Command Speed [DC Brake Level] [DC Brake Time] Volts/Speed P037 Ramp-to-Stop Mode Time Stop Command [DC Brake Level] [DC Brake Time] Voltage Speed ! ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used. ! ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking. 22B-UM001.book Page 24 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 71. Programming and Parameters 3-25 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A082 [DB Resistor Sel] Related Parameter(s): P037 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables external dynamic braking. The drive is able to provide full braking indefinitely. Braking power is limited by the external DB resistor. When this parameter is set to 1 “Normal RA Res” and an appropriate resistor is used (see selection Table B.C), the drive provides calculated resistor overload protection. However, the drive cannot protect against a brake IGBT failure. Values Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/99 Display: 1 Setting Min/Max 0 1 2 3-99 “Disabled” “Normal RA Res” (5% Duty Cycle) – Refer to Table B.C on page B-2. “NoProtection” (100% Duty Cycle) “x%Duty Cycle” Limited (3% – 99% of Duty Cycle) ! ATTENTION: A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected. The external resistor package must be self-protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown in Figure B.9 on page B-13, or equivalent, must be supplied. A083 [S Curve %] Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to the ramp as S Curve. Time is added, 1/2 at the beginning and 1/2 at the end of the ramp. Values Default: 0% (Disabled) Min/Max: 0/100% Display: 1% Example: Accel Time = 10 Seconds S Curve Setting = 50% S Curve Time = 10 × 0.5 = 5 Seconds Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds 1/2 S Curve Time 2.5 Seconds Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time 50% S Curve Target Target/2 Accel Time 10 Seconds 1/2 S Curve Time 2.5 Seconds 22B-UM001.book Page 25 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 72. 3-26 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A084 [Boost Select] Related Parameter(s): d004, P031, P032, A085, A086, A087, A125 Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve. Active when A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”. Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected. Options 0 “Custom V/Hz” 1 “30.0, VT” Variable Torque (Typical fan/pump curves.) 2 “35.0, VT” 3 “40.0, VT” 4 “45.0, VT” 5 “0.0 no IR” Constant Torque 6 “0.0” 7 “2.5, CT” [Default for 4.0, 5.5, 7.5 & 11 kW (5.0, 7.5, 10 & 15 HP) Drives] 8 “5.0, CT” (Default) 9 “7.5, CT” 10 “10.0, CT” 11 “12.5, CT” 12 “15.0, CT” 13 “17.5, CT” 14 “20.0, CT” % P032 [Motor NP Hertz] %P031[MotorNPVolts] 100 50 1/2 [Motor NP Volts] 1/2 [MotorNPHertz] 4 3 2 1 0 50 100 Settings 5-14 22B-UM001.book Page 26 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 73. Programming and Parameters 3-27 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A085 [Start Boost] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035, A084, A086, A087, A088, A125 Sets the boost voltage (% of P031 [Motor NP Volts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve when A084 [Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz” and A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz”. Drive may add additional voltage unless Option 5 is selected. Values Default: 2.5% Min/Max: 0.0/25.0% Display: 0.1% Frequency Voltage A087 [Break Frequency] P032 [Motor NP Hertz] P035 [Maximum Freq] A085[StartBoost] P031 [Motor NP Volts] A088 [Maximum Voltage] A086[BreakVoltage] A034 [Minimum Freq] A086 [Break Voltage] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035, A084, A085, A087, A088, A125 Sets the frequency where break voltage is applied when A084 [Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz” and A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz” Values Default: 25.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% A087 [Break Frequency] Related Parameter(s): P031, P032, P034, P035, A084, A085, A086, A088, A125 Sets the frequency where break frequency is applied when A084 [Boost Select] = 0 “Custom V/Hz” and A125 [Torque Perf Mode] = 0 “V/Hz” Values Default: 15.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 27 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 74. 3-28 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A088 [Maximum Voltage] Related Parameter(s): d004, A085, A086, A087 Sets the highest voltage the drive will output. Values Default: Drive Rated Volts Min/Max: 20/Drive Rated Volts Display: 1 VAC A089 [Current Limit 1] Related Parameter(s): P033, A118 Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs. Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 1.5 Min/Max: 0.1/Drive Rated Amps × 1.8 Display: 0.1 Amps A090 [Motor OL Select] Related Parameter(s): P032, P033 Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Settings 0-2 select the derating factor for the I2 t overload function. Options 0 “No Derate” (Default) 1 “Min Derate” 2 “Max Derate” Min Derate 0 80 100 60 40 20 No Derate 0 80 100 60 40 20 %ofP033[MotorOLCurent] Max Derate 0 80 100 60 40 20 0 2001751501251007550250 200175150125100755025 0 200175150125100755025 A091 [PWM Frequency] Related Parameter(s): A124 Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform. The chart below provides derating guidelines based on the PWM frequency setting. Important: Ignoring derating guidelines can cause reduced drive performance. Values Default: 4.0 kHz Min/Max: 2.0/16.0 kHz Display: 0.1 kHz 68 84 88 80 76 96 100 92 72 64 60 56 52 87654321 1514 16131211109 22B-UM001.book Page 28 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 75. Programming and Parameters 3-29 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] Related Parameter(s): A055, A058, A061, A093 Sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart. Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive. 1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”. 2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than “0”. Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault without restarting the drive. 1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”. 2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to “0”. Values Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/9 Display: 1 ! ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines. A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] Related Parameter(s): A092 Sets the time between restart attempts when A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value other than zero. Values Default: 1.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/300.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A094 [Start At PowerUp] Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables a feature that allows a Start or Run command to automatically cause the drive to resume running at commanded speed after drive input power is restored. Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact. This parameter will not function if parameter P036 [Start Source] is set to 4 “2-W High Speed”. Options 0 “Disabled” (Default) 1 “Enabled” ! ATTENTION: Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national and international codes, standards, regulations or industry guidelines. 22B-UM001.book Page 29 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 76. 3-30 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A095 [Reverse Disable] Related Parameter(s): d006 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of motor rotation to be changed. The reverse command may come from a digital command, the keypad or a serial command. All reverse inputs including two-wire Run Reverse will be ignored with reverse disabled. Options 0 “Rev Enabled” (Default) 1 “Rev Disabled” A096 [Flying Start En] Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM. Options 0 “Disabled” (Default) 1 “Enabled” A097 [Compensation] Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability. Options 0 “Disabled” 1 “Electrical” (Default) Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusodial motor currents. This setting attempts to correct this condition. 2 “Mechanical” Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator. This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition. 3 “Both” A098 [SW Current Trip] Related Parameter(s): P033 Enables/disables a software instantaneous (within 100 ms) current trip. Values Default: 0.0 (Disabled) Min/Max: 0.0/(Drive Rated Amps × 2) Display: 0.1 Amps A099 [Process Factor] Related Parameter(s): d010 Scales the output frequency value displayed by d010 [Process Display]. Values Default: 30.0 Min/Max: 0.1/999.9 Display: 0.1 Output Freq Process Factor Process Display=x 22B-UM001.book Page 30 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 77. Programming and Parameters 3-31 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A100 [Fault Clear] Stop drive before changing this parameter. Resets a fault and clears the fault queue. Used primarily to clear a fault over network communications. Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default) 1 “Reset Fault” 2 “Clear Buffer” (Parameters d007-d009 [Fault x Code]) A101 [Program Lock] Protects parameters against change by unauthorized personnel. Options 0 “Unlocked” (Default) 1 “Locked” A102 [Testpoint Sel] Related Parameter(s): d019 Used by Rockwell Automation field service personnel. Values Default: 400 Min/Max: 0/FFFF Display: 1 Hex A103 [Comm Data Rate] Related Parameter(s): d015 Sets the serial port rate for the RS485 (DSI) port. Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation. Options 0 “1200” 1 “2400” 2 “4800” 3 “9600” (Default) 4 “19.2K” 5 “38.4K” A104 [Comm Node Addr] Related Parameter(s): d015 Sets the drive node address for the RS485 (DSI) port if using a network connection. Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation. Values Default: 100 Min/Max: 1/247 Display: 1 22B-UM001.book Page 31 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 78. 3-32 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A105 [Comm Loss Action] Related Parameter(s): d015, P037, A106 Selects the drive’s response to a loss of the communication connection or excessive communication errors. Options 0 “Fault” (Default) Drive will fault on an F81 Comm Loss and coast to stop. 1 “Coast Stop” Stops drive via coast to stop. 2 “Stop” Stops drive via P037 [Stop Mode] setting. 3 “Continu Last” Drive continues operating at communication commanded speed saved in RAM. A106 [Comm Loss Time] Related Parameter(s): d015, A105 Sets the time that the drive will remain in communication loss before implementing the option selected in A105 [Comm Loss Action]. Values Default: 5.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.1/60.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A107 [Comm Format] Related Parameter(s): d015 Selects the protocol (RTU only), data bits (8 data bits only), parity (None, Even, Odd), and stop bits (1 stop bit only) used by the RS485 port on the drive. Refer to Appendix C for details on using the drive communication features. Important: Power to drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation. Options 0 “RTU 8-N-1” (Default) 1 “RTU 8-E-1” 2 “RTU 8-O-1” 3 “RTU 8-N-2” 4 “RTU 8-E-2” 5 “RTU 8-O-2” A108 [Language] Selects the language displayed by the remote communications option. Options 1 “English” (Default) 2 “Français” 3 “Español” 4 “Italiano” 5 “Deutsch” 6 “Reserved” 7 “Português” 8 “Reserved” 9 “Reserved” 10 “Nederlands” 22B-UM001.book Page 32 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 79. Programming and Parameters 3-33 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A109 [Anlg Out Setpt] Related Parameter(s): A065 When A065 [Analog Out Sel] is set to option 18, 19 or 20, this parameter sets the percentage of analog output desired. Values Default: 0.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] Related Parameter(s): d020, P034, P038, A122 Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P034 [Minimum Freq] if a 0-10V input is used by P038 [Speed Reference]. Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi]. Values Default: 0.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% 0 P035 [Maximum Freq] P034 [Minimum Freq] A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] 0 Speed Reference A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] Related Parameter(s): d020, P035, P038, A122, A123 Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P035 [Maximum Freq] if a 0-10V input is used by P038 [Speed Reference]. Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo]. Values Default: 100.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo] Related Parameter(s): d021, P034, P038 Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P034 [Minimum Freq] if a 4-20mA input is used by P038 [Speed Reference]. Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value larger than A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi]. Values Default: 0.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% 22B-UM001.book Page 33 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 80. 3-34 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A113 [Anlg In4-20mA Hi] Related Parameter(s): d021, P035, P038 Sets the analog input level that corresponds to P035 [Maximum Freq] if a 4-20mA input is used by P038 [Speed Reference]. Analog inversion can be accomplished by setting this value smaller than A112 [Anlg In4-20mA Lo]. Values Default: 100.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% A114 [Slip Hertz @ FLA] Related Parameter(s): P033 Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current. Values Default: 2.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/10.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz A115 [Process Time Lo] Related Parameter(s): d010, P034 Scales the time value when the drive is running at P034 [Minimum Freq]. When set to a value other than zero, d010 [Process Display] indicates the duration of the process. Values Default: 0.00 Min/Max: 0.00/99.99 Display: 0.01 A116 [Process Time Hi] Related Parameter(s): d010, P035 Scales the time value when the drive is running at P035 [Maximum Freq]. When set to a value other than zero, d010 [Process Display] indicates the duration of the process. Values Default: 0.00 Min/Max: 0.00/99.99 Display: 0.01 A117 [Bus Reg Mode] Controls the operation of the drive voltage regulation, which is normally operational at decel or when the bus voltage rises. Refer to the Attention statement on page P-3 for important information on bus regulation. Options 0 “Disabled” 1 “Enabled” (Default) A118 [Current Limit 2] Related Parameter(s): P033, A051-A054, A089 Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs. This parameter is only active if A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to 25 “Current Lmt2” and is active. Values Default: Drive Rated Amps × 1.5 Min/Max: 0.1/(Drive Rated Amps × 1.8) Display: 0.1 Amps 22B-UM001.book Page 34 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 81. Programming and Parameters 3-35 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A119 [Skip Frequency] Related Parameter(s): A120 Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate. A setting of 0 disables this parameter. Values Default: 0 Hz Min/Max: 0/400 Hz Display: 1 Hz A120 [Skip Freq Band] Related Parameter(s): A119 Determines the bandwidth around A119 [Skip Frequency]. A120 [Skip Frequency Band] is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0 disables this parameter. Values Default: 0.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/30.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz Frequency Time Skip Frequency Command Frequency Drive Output Frequency 2x Skip Frequency Band A121 [Stall Fault Time] Sets the time that the drive will remain in stall mode before a fault is issued. Options 0 “60 Seconds” (Default) 1 “120 Seconds” 2 “240 Seconds” 3 “360 Seconds” 4 “480 Seconds” 5 “Flt Disabled” 22B-UM001.book Page 35 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 82. 3-36 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A122 [Analog In Loss] Related Parameter(s): A110, A111, A132 Selects drive action when an input signal loss is detected. Signal loss is defined as an analog signal less than 1V or 2mA. The signal loss event ends and normal operation resumes when the input signal level is greater than or equal to 1.5V or 3mA. If using a 0-10V analog input, set A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] to a minimum of 20% (i.e. 2 volts). Options 0 “Disabled” (Default) 1 “Fault (F29)” F29 Analog Input Loss 2 “Stop” Uses P037 [Stop Mode] 3 “Zero Ref” Drive runs at zero speed reference. 4 “Min Freq Ref” Drive runs at minimum frequency. 5 “Max Freq Ref” Drive runs at maximum frequency. 6 “Int Freq Ref” Drive runs at internal frequency. A123 [10V Bipolar Enbl] Related Parameter(s): P038, A111 Enables/disables bipolar control. In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference. Options 0 “Uni-Polar In” (Default) 0 to 10V only 1 “Bi-Polar In” ±10V A124 [Var PWM Disable] Related Parameter(s): A091 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables a feature that varies the carrier frequency for the PWM output waveform defined by A091 [PWM Frequency]. Disabling this feature when low frequency conditions exist may result in IGBT stress and nuisance tripping. Options 0 “Enabled” (Default) 1 “Disabled” A125 [Torque Perf Mode] Related Parameter(s): A084, A085, A086, A087, A127 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables sensorless vector control operation. Options 0 “V/Hz” 1 “Sensrls Vect” (Default) A126 [Motor NP FLA] Related Parameter(s): A127 Set to the motor nameplate rated full load amps. Values Default: Drive Rated Amps Min/Max: 0.1/(Drive Rated Amps × 2) Display: 0.1 Amps 22B-UM001.book Page 36 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 83. Programming and Parameters 3-37 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A127 [Autotune] Related Parameter(s): A125, A126, A128, A129 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Provides an automatic method for setting A128 [IR Voltage Drop] and A129 [Flux Current Ref], which affect sensorless vector performance. Parameter A126 [Motor NP FLA] must be set to the motor nameplate full load amps before running the Autotune procedure. Options 0 “Ready/Idle” (Default) 1 “Static Tune” 2 “Rotate Tune” “Ready” (0) = Parameter returns to this setting following a “Static Tune” or “Rotate Tune.” “Static Tune” (1) = A temporary command that initiates a non-rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of A128 [IR Voltage Drop]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to “Ready” (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required operate the drive in normal mode. Used when motor cannot be uncoupled from the load. “Rotate Tune” (2) = A temporary command that initiates a “Static Tune” followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of A129 [Flux Current Ref]. A start command is required following initiation of this setting. The parameter returns to “Ready” (0) following the test, at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode. Important: Used when motor is uncoupled from the load. Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure. If the Autotune routine fails, an F80 SVC Autotune fault is displayed. ! ATTENTION: Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure. To guard against possible injury and/or equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding. A128 [IR Voltage Drop] Related Parameter(s): A127 Value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator. Values Default: Based on Drive Rating Min/Max: 0.0/230.0 VAC Display: 0.1 VAC A129 [Flux Current Ref] Related Parameter(s): A127 Value of amps for full motor flux. Values Default: Based on Drive Rating Min/Max: 0.00/[Motor NP FLA] Display: 0.01 Amps 22B-UM001.book Page 37 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 84. 3-38 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A130 [PID Trim Hi] Sets the maximum positive value that is added to the speed reference when PID trim is used. Values Default: 60.0 Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Display: 0.1 A131 [PID Trim Lo] Sets the maximum positive value that is subtracted from the PID reference when PID trim is used. Values Default: 0.0 Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Display: 0.1 A132 [PID Ref Sel] Related Parameter(s): P038, A122 Stop drive before changing this parameter. Enables/disables PID mode and selects the source of the PID reference. Refer to Appendix F for details. Options 0 “PID Disabled” (Default) 1 “PID Setpoint” 2 “0-10V Input” 3 “4-20mA Input” 4 “Comm Port” 5 “Setpnt, Trim” 6 “0-10V, Trim” 7 “4-20mA, Trim” 8 “Comm, Trim” A133 [PID Feedback Sel] Select the source of the PID feedback. Refer to Appendix F for details. Options 0 “0-10V Input” (Default) The PID will not function with a bipolar input. Negative voltages are treated as 0 volts. 1 “4-20mA Input” 2 “Comm Port” A134 [PID Prop Gain] Sets the value for the PID proportional component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref Sel]. Values Default: 0.01 Min/Max: 0.00/99.99 Display: 0.01 22B-UM001.book Page 38 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 85. Programming and Parameters 3-39 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A135 [PID Integ Time] Sets the value for the PID integral component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref Sel]. Values Default: 0.1 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A136 [PID Diff Rate] Sets the value for the PID differential component when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref Sel]. Values Default: 0.01 (1/Secs) Min/Max: 0.00/99.99 (1/Secs) Display: 0.01 (1/Secs) A137 [PID Setpoint] Provides an internal fixed value for process setpoint when the PID mode is enabled by A132 [PID Ref Sel]. Values Default: 0.0% Min/Max: 0.0/100.0% Display: 0.1% A138 [PID Deadband] Sets the lower limit of the PID output. Values Default: 0.0% Min/Max: 0.0/10.0% Display: 0.1% A139 [PID Preload] Sets the value used to preload the integral component on start or enable. Values Default: 0.0 Hz Min/Max: 0.0/400.0 Hz Display: 0.1 Hz 22B-UM001.book Page 39 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 86. 3-40 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A140 [Stp Logic 0] A141 [Stp Logic 1] A142 [Stp Logic 2] A143 [Stp Logic 3] A144 [Stp Logic 4] A145 [Stp Logic 5] A146 [Stp Logic 6] A147 [Stp Logic 7] Related Parameter(s): P038, P039, P040, A051-A054, A055, A058, A061, A067, A068, A070-A077, A150-A157 Values Default: 00F1 Min/Max: 0001/bAFF Display: 4 Digits Parameters A140-A147 are only active if P038 [Speed Reference] is set to 6 “Stp Logic”. These parameters can be used to create a custom profile of frequency commands. Each “step” can be based on time, status of a Logic input or a combination of time and the status of a Logic input. Digits 0-3 for each [Stp Logic x] parameter must be programmed according to the desired profile. A Logic input is established by setting a digital input, parameters A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel], to 23 “Logic In1” and/or 24 “Logic In2”. A time interval between steps can be programmed using parameters A150 - A157 [Stp Logic Time x]. See the table below for related parameters. The speed for any step is programmed using parameters A070 - A077 [Preset Freq x]. How StepLogic Works The StepLogic sequence begins with a valid start command. A normal sequence always begins with A140 [Stp Logic 0]. Digit 0: Logic For Next Step This digit defines the logic for the next step. When the condition is met the program advances to the next step. Step 0 follows Step 7. Example: Digit 0 is set 3. When “Logic In2” becomes active, the program advances to the next step. Digit 1: Logic to Jump to a Different Step For all settings other than F, when the condition is met, the program overrides Digit 0 and jumps to the step defined by Digit 2. Digit 2: Different Step to Jump When the condition for Digit 1 is met, the Digit 2 setting determines the next step or to end the program. Stop drive before changing this parameter. StepLogic Parameter (Active when P038 = 6 “Stp Logic”) Related Preset Frequency Parameter (Can be activated independent of StepLogic Parameters) Related StepLogic Time Parameter (Active when A140-A147 Digit 0 or 1 are set to 1, b, C, d or E) A140 [Stp Logic 0] A070 [Preset Freq 0] A150 [Stp Logic Time 0] A141 [Stp Logic 1] A071 [Preset Freq 1] A151 [Stp Logic Time 1] A142 [Stp Logic 2] A072 [Preset Freq 2] A152 [Stp Logic Time 2] A143 [Stp Logic 3] A073 [Preset Freq 3] A153 [Stp Logic Time 3] A144 [Stp Logic 4] A074 [Preset Freq 4] A154 [Stp Logic Time 4] A145 [Stp Logic 5] A075 [Preset Freq 5] A155 [Stp Logic Time 5] A146 [Stp Logic 6] A076 [Preset Freq 6] A156 [Stp Logic Time 6] A147 [Stp Logic 7] A077 [Preset Freq 7] A157 [Stp Logic Time 7] 22B-UM001.book Page 40 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 87. Programming and Parameters 3-41 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Digit 3: Step Settings This digit defines what accel/decel profile the speed command will follow and the direction of the command for the current step. In addition, if a relay or opto output (parameters A055, A058 and A061) is set to 15 “StpLogic Out”, this parameter can control the status of that output. Any StepLogic parameter can be programmed to control a relay or opto output, but you can not control different outputs based on the condition of different StepLogic commands. StepLogic Settings The logic for each function is determined by the four digits for each StepLogic parameter. The following is a listing of the available settings for each digit. Refer to Appendix E for details. Logic For Next Step Digit 0 Logic to Jump to a Different Step Digit 1 Different Step to Jump Digit 2 Step Settings Digit 3 Digit 3 Settings Required Setting Accel/Decel Param. Used StepLogic Output State Commanded Direction 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A b Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 1 Accel/Decel 2 Accel/Decel 2 Accel/Decel 2 Accel/Decel 2 Accel/Decel 2 Accel/Decel 2 Off Off Off On On On Off Off Off On On On FWD REV No Output FWD REV No Output FWD REV No Output FWD REV No Output Digit 2 Settings Digit 1 and Digit 0 Settings 0 = Jump to Step 0 1 = Jump to Step 1 2 = Jump to Step 2 3 = Jump to Step 3 4 = Jump to Step 4 5 = Jump to Step 5 6 = Jump to Step 6 7 = Jump to Step 7 8 = End Program (Normal Stop) 9 = End Program (Coast to Stop) A = End Program and Fault (F2) 0 = Skip Step (Jump Immediately) 1 = Step Based on [Stp Logic Time x] 2 = Step if “Logic In1” is Active 3 = Step if “Logic In2” is Active 4 = Step if “Logic In1” is Not Active 5 = Step if “Logic In2” is Not Active 6 = Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is Active 7 = Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is Active 8 = Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is Active 9 = Step if “Logic In1” is Active and “Logic In2” is Not Active A = Step if “Logic In2” is Active and “Logic In1” is Not Active b = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is Active C = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is Active d = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is Not Active E = Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is Not Active F = Do Not Step/Ignore Digit 2 Settings 22B-UM001.book Page 41 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 88. 3-42 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A150 [Stp Logic Time 0] A151 [Stp Logic Time 1] A152 [Stp Logic Time 2] A153 [Stp Logic Time 3] A154 [Stp Logic Time 4] A155 [Stp Logic Time 5] A156 [Stp Logic Time 6] A157 [Stp Logic Time 7] Related Parameter(s): P038, A055, A058, A061, A070-A077, A140-A147 Sets the time to remain in each step if the corresponding StpLogic command word is set to “Step after Time”. Values Default: 30.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/999.9 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] Related Parameter(s): P037 Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before the relay or an opto output is energized and the drive ramps to the commanded frequency. The relay or opto output is typically connected to a user-supplied electromechanical brake coil relay. Set P037 [Stop Mode] to 8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” or 9 “Ramp+EM Brk” to enable the electromechanical brake option. Set A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] to 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” to control brake operation. Values Default: 2.00 Secs Min/Max: 0.01/10.00 Secs Display: 0.01 Secs Frequency Time Minimum Freq A160 [EM Brk Off Delay] A161 [EM Brk On Delay] Stop Commanded Start Commanded EM Brk De-Energized (On) Drive StopsEM Brk Energized (Off) RampAccel Ramp Decel 22B-UM001.book Page 42 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 89. Programming and Parameters 3-43 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A161 [EM Brk On Delay] Related Parameter(s): P037 Sets the time the drive remains at minimum frequency before the relay or an opto output is de-energizing and the drive stops. The relay or opto output is typically connected to a user-supplied electromechanical brake coil relay. Set P037 [Stop Mode] to 8 “Ramp+EM B,CF” or 9 “Ramp+EM Brk” to enable the electromechanical brake option. Set A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 or A061 [Opto Outx Sel] to 22 “EM Brk Cntrl” to control brake operation. Values Default: 2.00 Secs Min/Max: 0.01/10.00 Secs Display: 0.01 Secs A162 [MOP Reset Sel] Related Parameter(s): A069 Set the drive to save the current MOP reference command. Options 0 “Zero MOP Ref” This option clamps A069 [Internal Freq] at 0.0 Hz when the drive is not running. 1 “Save MOP Ref” (Default) Reference is saved in A069 [Internal Freq]. A163 [DB Threshold] Related Parameter(s): P037, A080, A081, A082 Sets the DC bus Voltage Threshold for Dynamic Brake operation. If the DC bus voltage falls below the value set in this parameter, the Dynamic Brake will not turn on. Lower values will make the Dynamic Braking function more responsive but may result in nuisance Dynamic Brake activation. Values Default 100.0% Min/Max: 0.0/110.0% Display: 0.0% ! ATTENTION: Equipment damage may result if this parameter is set a value that causes the dynamic braking resistor to dissipate excessive power. Parameter settings less than 100% should be carefully evaluated to ensure that the dynamic brake resistor’s wattage rating is not exceeded. In general, values less than 90% are not needed. This parameter’s setting is especially important if parameter A082 [DB Resistor Sel] is set to 2 “No Protection”. 22B-UM001.book Page 43 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 90. 3-44 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Advanced Program Group (continued) A164 [Comm Write Mode] Determines whether parameter changes made over communication port are saved and stored in Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) or RAM only. If they are stored in RAM, the values will be lost at power-down. Options 0 “Save” (Default) 1 “RAM Only” ! ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. If a controller is programmed to write parameter data to Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) frequently, the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction. Do not create a program that frequently uses configurable outputs to write parameter data to NVS unless A164 [Comm Write Mode] is set to option 1. A165 [Anlg Loss Delay] Related Parameter(s): A122 Sets the length of time after power-up during which the drive will not detect an analog signal loss. The drive response to an analog signal loss is set in A122 [Analog In Loss]. Values Default: 0.0 Secs Min/Max: 0.0/20.0 Secs Display: 0.1 Secs A166 [Analog In Filter] Sets level of additional filtering of the analog input signals. A higher number increases filtering and decreases bandwidth. Each setting doubles the applied filtering (1 = 2x filter, 2 = 4x filter, etc...). No additional filtering is applied when set to “0”. Values Default: 0 Min/Max: 0/14 Display: 1 A167 [PID Invert Error] When set to “Inverted”, changes the sign of the PID error. This causes an increase in the drive output frequency with PID Feedback greater than PID Setpoint, and a decrease in drive output frequency with PID Feedback less than PID Setpoint. Options 0 “Not Inverted” (Default) 1 “Inverted” 22B-UM001.book Page 44 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 91. Programming and Parameters 3-45 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Parameter Cross Reference – by Name Parameter Name No. Group 10V Bipolar Enbl A123 Advanced Program Accel Time 1 P039 Basic Program Accel Time 2 A067 Advanced Program Analog In 0-10V d020 Display Analog In 4-20mA d021 Display Analog In Filter A166 Advanced Program Analog In Loss A122 Advanced Program Analog Out High A066 Advanced Program Analog Out Sel A065 Advanced Program Anlg In 0-10V Hi A111 Advanced Program Anlg In 0-10V Lo A110 Advanced Program Anlg In4-20mA Hi A113 Advanced Program Anlg In4-20mA Lo A112 Advanced Program Anlg Loss Delay A166 Advanced Program Anlg Out Setpt A109 Advanced Program Auto Rstrt Delay A093 Advanced Program Auto Rstrt Tries A092 Advanced Program Autotune A127 Advanced Program Boost Select A084 Advanced Program Break Frequency A087 Advanced Program Break Voltage A086 Advanced Program Bus Reg Mode A117 Advanced Program Comm Data Rate A103 Advanced Program Comm Format A107 Advanced Program Comm Loss Action A105 Advanced Program Comm Loss Time A106 Advanced Program Comm Node Addr A104 Advanced Program Comm Status d015 Display Comm Write Mode A164 Advanced Program Commanded Freq d002 Display Compensation A097 Advanced Program Contrl In Status d013 Display Control Source d012 Display Control SW Ver d016 Display Counter Status d025 Display Current Limit x A089, A118 Advanced Program DB Resistor Sel A082 Advanced Program DB Threshold A163 Advanced Program DC Brake Level A081 Advanced Program DC Brake Time A080 Advanced Program DC Bus Voltage d005 Display Decel Time 1 P040 Basic Program Decel Time 2 A068 Advanced Program Dig In Status d014 Display Digital Inx Sel A051-A054 Advanced Program Drive Status d006 Display Drive Temp d024 Display Drive Type d017 Display Elapsed Run Time d018 Display EM Brk Off Delay A160 Advanced Program EM Brk On Delay A161 Advanced Program Fault Clear A100 Advanced Program Fault x Code d007-d009 Display Flux Current Ref A129 Advanced Program Flying Start En A096 Advanced Program Internal Freq A069 Advanced Program IR Voltage Drop A128 Advanced Program Jog Accel/Decel A079 Advanced Program Jog Frequency A078 Advanced Program Language A108 Advanced Program Maximum Freq P035 Basic Program Maximum Voltage A088 Advanced Program Minimum Freq P034 Basic Program MOP Reset Sel A162 Advanced Program Motor NP FLA A126 Advanced Program Motor NP Hertz P032 Basic Program Motor NP Volts P031 Basic Program Motor OL Current P033 Basic Program Motor OL Ret P043 Basic Program Motor OL Select A090 Advanced Program Opto Out Logic A064 Advanced Program Opto Outx Level A059, A062 Advanced Program Opto Outx Sel A058, A061 Advanced Program Output Current d003 Display Output Freq d001 Display Output Power d022 Display Output Powr Fctr d023 Display Output Voltage d004 Display PID Deadband A138 Advanced Program PID Diff Rate A136 Advanced Program PID Feedback Sel A133 Advanced Program PID Integ Time A135 Advanced Program PID Invert Error A167 Advanced Program PID Preload A139 Advanced Program PID Prop Gain A134 Advanced Program PID Ref Sel A132 Advanced Program PID Setpoint A137 Advanced Program PID Trim Hi A130 Advanced Program PID Trim Lo A131 Advanced Program Preset Freq x A070-A077 Advanced Program Process Display d010 Display Process Factor A099 Advanced Program Process Time Hi A116 Advanced Program Process Time Lo A115 Advanced Program Program Lock A101 Advanced Program PWM Frequency A091 Advanced Program Relay Out Level A056 Advanced Program Relay Out Sel A055 Advanced Program Reset To Defalts P041 Basic Program Reverse Disable A095 Advanced Program S Curve % A083 Advanced Program Skip Freq Band A120 Advanced Program Skip Frequency A119 Advanced Program Slip Hertz @ FLA A114 Advanced Program Stp Logic Status d028 Display Stp Logic x A140-A147 Advanced Program Stp Logic Time x A150-A157 Advanced Program Speed Reference P038 Basic Program Stall Fault Time A121 Advanced Program Start At PowerUp A094 Advanced Program Start Boost A085 Advanced Program Start Source P036 Basic Program Stop Mode P037 Basic Program SW Current Trip A098 Advanced Program Parameter Name No. Group 22B-UM001.book Page 45 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 92. 3-46 Programming and Parameters PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Testpoint Data d019 Display Testpoint Sel A102 Advanced Program Timer Status d026 Display Torque Current d029 Display Torque Perf Mode A125 Advanced Program Var PWM Disable A124 Advanced Program Voltage Class P042 Basic Program Parameter Name No. Group 22B-UM001.book Page 46 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 93. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 40 drive. Included is a listing and description of drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable). The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored. Any changes will be indicated through the integral keypad. LED Indications See page 2-4 for information on drive status indicators and controls. A fault is a condition that stops the drive. There are two fault types. For information on… See page… For information on… See page… Drive Status 4-1 Fault Descriptions 4-3 Faults 4-1 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 4-5 Drive Status Faults Type Fault Description ➀ Auto-Reset/Run When this type of fault occurs, and A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] is set to a value greater than “0,” a user-configurable timer, A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay], begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted. ➁ Non-Resetable This type of fault may require drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 94. 4-2 Troubleshooting PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Fault Indication Manually Clearing Faults Automatically Clearing Faults Auto Restart (Reset/Run) The Auto Restart feature provides the ability for the drive to automatically perform a fault reset followed by a start attempt without user or application intervention. This allows remote or “unattended” operation. Only certain faults are allowed to be reset. Certain faults (Type 2) that indicate possible drive component malfunction are not resettable. Caution should be used when enabling this feature, since the drive will attempt to issue its own start command based on user selected programming. Condition Display Drive is indicating a fault. The integral keypad provides visual notification of a fault condition by displaying the following. • Flashing fault number • Flashing fault indicator Press the Escape key to regain control of the integral keypad. Step Key(s) 1. Press Esc to acknowledge the fault. The fault information will be removed so that you can use the integral keypad. Access d007 [Fault 1 Code] to view the most recent fault information. 2. Address the condition that caused the fault. The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. See Table 4.A. 3. After corrective action has been taken, clear the fault by one of these methods. • Press Stop if P037 [Stop Mode] is set to a value between “0” and “3”. • Cycle drive power. • Set A100 [Fault Clear] to “1” or “2”. • Cycle digital input if A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7 “Clear Fault”. Option / Step Clear a Type 1 fault and restart the drive. 1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”. 2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to a value other than “0”. Clear an OverVoltage, UnderVoltage or Heatsink OvrTmp fault without restarting the drive. 1. Set A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries] to a value other than “0”. 2. Set A093 [Auto Rstrt Delay] to “0”. FAULT VOLTS AMPS HERTZ RUN FWD REV PRGOGRAM 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 95. Troubleshooting 4-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table 4.A Fault Types, Descriptions and Actions Fault Descriptions No. Fault Type(1) Description Action F2 Auxiliary Input ➀ Auxiliary input interlock is open. 1. Check remote wiring. 2. Verify communications programming for intentional fault. F3 Power Loss ➁ Excessive DC Bus voltage ripple. 1. Monitor the incoming line for phase loss or line imbalance. 2. Check input line fuse. F4 UnderVoltage ➀ DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value. Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption. F5 OverVoltage ➀ DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value. Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration. Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option. F6 Motor Stalled ➀ Drive is unable to accelerate motor. Increase P039 - A067 [Accel Time x] or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by parameter A089 [Current Limit 1]. F7 Motor Overload ➀ Internal electronic overload trip. 1. An excessive motor load exists. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by parameter P033 [Motor OL Current]. 2. Verify A084 [Boost Select] setting F8 Heatsink OvrTmp ➀ Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value. 1. Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40°C(104°F)forIP30,NEMAUL Type1installationsor50°C(122°F) forIP20/Opentypeinstallations. 2. Check fan. F12 HW OverCurrent ➁ The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit. Check programming. Check for excess load, improper A084 [Boost Select] setting, DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current. F13 Ground Fault ➁ A current path to earth ground has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals. Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition. F29 Analog Input Loss ➀ An analog input is configured to fault on signal loss. A signal loss has occurred. Configure with A122 [Analog In Loss]. 1. Check parameters. 2. Check for broken/loose connections at inputs. 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 96. 4-4 Troubleshooting PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E (1) See page 4-1 for a description of fault types. No. Fault Type(1) Description Action F33 Auto Rstrt Tries ➁ Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of A092 [Auto Rstrt Tries]. Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear. F38 Phase U to Gnd ➁ A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase. 1. Check the wiring between the drive and motor. 2. Check motor for grounded phase. 3. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared. F39 Phase V to Gnd F40 Phase W to Gnd F41 Phase UV Short ➁ Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals. 1. Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition. 2. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared. F42 Phase UW Short F43 Phase VW Short F48 Params Defaulted The drive was commanded to write default values to EEPROM. 1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive. 2. Program the drive parameters as needed. F63 SW OverCurrent ➀ Programmed A098 [SW Current Trip] has been exceeded. Check load requirements and A098 [SW Current Trip] setting. F64 Drive Overload ➁ Drive rating of 150% for 1 minute or 200% for 3 seconds has been exceeded. Reduce load or extend Accel Time. F70 Power Unit ➁ Failure has been detected in the drive power section. 1. Cycle power. 2. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared. F71 Net Loss The communication network has faulted. 1. Cycle power. 2. Check communications cabling. 3. Check network adapter setting. 4. Check external network status. F80 SVC Autotune The autotune function was either cancelled by the user or failed. Restart procedure. F81 Comm Loss ➁ RS485 (DSI) port stopped communicating. 1. If adapter was not intentionally disconnected, check wiring to the port. Replace wiring, port expander, adapters or complete drive as required. 2. Check connection. 3. An adapter was intentionally disconnected. 4. Turn off using A105 [Comm Loss Action]. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 97. Troubleshooting 4-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Motor does not Start. F100 Parameter Checksum ➁ The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated. Set P041 [Reset To Defalts] to option 1 “Reset Defaults”. F122 I/O Board Fail ➁ Failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section. 1. Cycle power. 2. Replace drive if fault cannot be cleared. (1) See page 4-1 for a description of fault types. No. Fault Type(1) Description Action Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action No output voltage to the motor. None Check the power circuit. • Check the supply voltage. • Check all fuses and disconnects. Check the motor. • Verify that the motor is connected properly. Check the control input signals. • Verify that a Start signal is present. If 2-Wire control is used, verify that either the Run Forward or Run Reverse signal is active, but not both. • Verify that I/O Terminal 01 is active. • Verify that P036 [Start Source] matches your configuration. • Verify that A095 [Reverse Disable] is not prohibiting movement. Improper boost setting at initial start-up. None Set A084 [Boost Select] to option 2 “35.0, VT”. Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault. • Press Stop • Cycle power • Set A100 [Fault Clear] to option 1 “Clear Faults”. • Cycle digital input if A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7 “Clear Fault”. 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 98. 4-6 Troubleshooting PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block. Drive does not Start from Integral Keypad. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action Drive is Faulted Flashing red status light Clear fault. • Press Stop • Cycle power • Set A100 [Fault Clear] to option 1 “Clear Faults”. • Cycle digital input if A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 7 “Clear Fault”. Incorrect programming. • P036 [Start Source] is set to option 0 “Keypad” or option 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port”. • A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] is set to option 5 “Local” and the input is active. None Check parameter settings. Incorrect input wiring. See 1-18 for wiring examples. • 2 wire control requires Run Forward, Run Reverse or Jog input. • 3 wire control requires Start and Stop inputs • Stop input is always required. None Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper. Incorrect Sink/Source DIP switch setting. None Set switch to match wiring scheme. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action Integral keypad is not enabled. Green LED above Start key is not illuminated. • Set parameter P036 [Start Source] to option 0 “Keypad”. • Set parameter A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel] to option 5 “Local” and activate the input. I/O Terminal 01 “Stop” input is not present. None Wire inputs correctly and/or install jumper. 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 99. Troubleshooting 4-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Drive does not respond to changes in speed command. Motor and/or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action No value is coming from the source of the command. The drive “Run” indicator is lit and output is 0 Hz. • Check d012 [Control Source] for correct source. • If the source is an analog input, check wiring and use a meter to check for presence of signal. • Check d002 [Commanded Freq] to verify correct command. Incorrect reference source is being selected via remote device or digital inputs. None • Check d012 [Control Source] for correct source. • Check d014 [Dig In Status] to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source. Verify settings for A051 - A054 [Digital Inx Sel]. • Check P038 [Speed Reference] for the source of the speed reference. Reprogram as necessary. • Review the Speed Reference Control chart on page 1-23. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action Acceleration time is excessive. None Reprogram P039 [Accel Time 1] or A067 [Accel Time 2]. Excess load or short acceleration times force the drive into current limit, slowing or stopping acceleration. None Compare d003 [Output Current] with A089 [Current Limit 1]. Remove excess load or reprogram P039 [Accel Time 1] or A067 [Accel Time 2]. Check for improper A084 [Boost Select] setting. Speed command source or value is not as expected. None Verify d002 [Commanded Freq]. Check d012 [Control Source] for the proper Speed Command. Programming is preventing the drive output from exceeding limiting values. None Check P035 [Maximum Freq] to insure that speed is not limited by programming. Torque performance does not match motor characteristics. None Set motor nameplate full load amps in parameter A126 [Motor NP FLA]. Perform A127 [Autotune] “Static Tune” or “Rotate Tune” procedure. Set A125 [Torque Perf Mode] to option 0 “V/Hz”. 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 100. 4-8 Troubleshooting PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Motor operation is unstable. Drive will not reverse motor direction. Drive does not power up. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action Motor data was incorrectly entered. None 1. Correctly enter motor nameplate data into P031, P032 and P033. 2. Enable A097 [Compensation]. 3. Use A084 [Boost Select] to reduce boost level. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action Digital input is not selected for reversing control. None Check [Digital Inx Sel] (See page 3-14). Choose correct input and program for reversing mode. Digital input is incorrectly wired. None Check input wiring. (See page 1-17) Motor wiring is improperly phased for reverse. None Switch two motor leads. Reverse is disabled. None Check A095 [Reverse Disable]. Cause(s) Indication Corrective Action No input power to drive. None Check the power circuit. • Check the supply voltage. • Check all fuses and disconnects. Jumper between I/O Terminals P2 and P1 not installed and/or DC Bus Inductor not connected. None Install jumper or connect DC Bus Inductor. 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 101. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information The tables on the following pages provide recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information. See Fusing and Circuit Breakers below for UL and IEC requirements. Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 °C (104 °F) and the U.S. N.E.C. Other country, state or local codes may require different ratings. Fusing The recommended fuse types are listed below. If available current ratings do not match those listed in the tables provided, choose the next higher fuse rating. • IEC – BS88 (British Standard) Parts 1 & 2(1) , EN60269-1, Parts 1 & 2, type gG or equivalent should be used. • UL – UL Class CC, T or J must be used.(2) Circuit Breakers The “non-fuse” listings in the following tables include inverse time circuit breakers, instantaneous trip circuit breakers (motor circuit protectors) and 140M self-protected combination motor controllers. If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method, the following requirements apply: • IEC – Both types of circuit breakers and 140M self-protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for IEC installations. • UL – Only inverse time circuit breakers and the specified 140M self-protected combination motor controllers are acceptable for UL installations. For information on… See page… Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings A-1 Specifications A-2 Drive, Fuse & Circuit Breaker Ratings (1) Typical designations include, but may not be limited to the following; Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD, DD, ED, EFS, EF, FF, FG, GF, GG, GH. (2) Typical designations include; Type CC - KTK-R, FNQ-R Type J - JKS, LPJ Type T - JJS, JJN 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 102. A-2 Supplemental Drive Information PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Specifications Drive Ratings Catalog Number(1) Output Ratings Input Ratings Branch Circuit Protection kW (HP) Amps Voltage Range kVA Amps Fuses 140M Motor Protectors(3) (4) Contactors Min. Enclosure Volume(5) (in.3 ) 100 - 120V AC (±10%) – 1-Phase Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output 22B-V2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 90-132 1.15 9.0 15 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655 22B-V5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 90-132 2.45 20.3 35 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 1655 22B-V6P0x104 1.1 (1.5) 6.0 90-132 3.0 24.0 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 1655 200 - 240V AC (±10%) – 1-Phase(2) Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output 22B-A2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 180-264 1.15 6.0 10 140M-C2E-B63 100-C09 1655 22B-A5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 180-264 2.45 12.0 20 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655 22B-A8P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 8.0 180-264 4.0 18.0 30 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 1655 22B-A012x104 2.2 (3.0) 12.0 180-264 5.5 25.0 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 2069 200 - 240V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 230V 3-Phase Output 22B-B2P3x104 0.4 (0.5) 2.3 180-264 1.15 2.5 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C07 1655 22B-B5P0x104 0.75 (1.0) 5.0 180-264 2.45 5.7 10 140M-C2E-C10 100-C09 1655 22B-B8P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 8.0 180-264 4.0 9.5 15 140M-C2E-C16 100-C12 1655 22B-B012x104 2.2 (3.0) 12.0 180-264 5.5 15.5 25 140M-C2E-C16 100-C23 1655 22B-B017x104 3.7 (5.0) 17.5 180-264 8.6 21.0 30 140M-F8E-C25 100-C23 1655 22B-B024x104 5.5 (7.5) 24.0 180-264 11.8 26.1 40 140M-F8E-C32 100-C37 2069 22B-B033x104 7.5 (10.0) 33.0 180-264 16.3 34.6 60 140M-G8E-C45 100-C60 2069 380 - 480V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 460V 3-Phase Output 22B-D1P4x104 0.4 (0.5) 1.4 342-528 1.4 1.8 3 140M-C2E-B25 100-C07 1655 22B-D2P3x104 0.75 (1.0) 2.3 342-528 2.3 3.2 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C07 1655 22B-D4P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 4.0 342-528 4.0 5.7 10 140M-C2E-B63 100-C09 1655 22B-D6P0x104 2.2 (3.0) 6.0 342-528 5.9 7.5 15 140M-C2E-C10 100-C09 1655 22B-D010x104 4.0 (5.0) 10.5 342-528 10.3 13.0 20 140M-C2E-C16 100-C23 1655 22B-D012x104 5.5 (7.5) 12.0 342-528 11.8 14.2 25 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 2069 22B-D017x104 7.5 (10.0) 17.0 342-528 16.8 18.4 30 140M-D8E-C20 100-C23 2069 22B-D024x104 11.0 (15.0) 24.0 342-528 23.4 26.0 50 140M-F8E-C32 100-C43 2069 460 - 600V AC (±10%) – 3-Phase Input, 0 - 575V 3-Phase Output 22B-E1P7x104 0.75 (1.0) 1.7 414-660 2.1 2.3 6 140M-C2E-B25 100-C09 1655 22B-E3P0x104 1.5 (2.0) 3.0 414-660 3.65 3.8 6 140M-C2E-B40 100-C09 1655 22B-E4P2x104 2.2 (3.0) 4.2 414-660 5.2 5.3 10 140M-D8E-B63 100-C09 1655 22B-E6P6x104 4.0 (5.0) 6.6 414-660 8.1 8.3 15 140M-D8E-C10 100-C09 1655 22B-E9P9x104 5.5 (7.5) 9.9 414-660 12.1 11.2 20 140M-D8E-C16 100-C16 2069 22B-E012x104 7.5 (10.0) 12.2 414-660 14.9 13.7 25 140M-D8E-C16 100-C23 2069 22B-E019x104 11.0 (15.0) 19.0 414-660 23.1 24.1 40 140M-F8E-C25 100-C30 2069 (1) In the Catalog Numbers listed “x” represents enclosure type. Specifications are valid for all enclosure types. IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X drive ratings are only available as Frame B drives. Refer to Table B.B. (2) 200-240V AC - 1-Phase drives are also available with an integral EMC filter. Catalog suffix changes from N104 to N114. Filter option is not available for IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives. (3) The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector Circuit Breakers may vary. See Bulletin 140M Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Application Ratings. 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 103. Supplemental Drive Information A-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E (4) Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta, 240 Wye or Delta, 480Y/277 or 600Y/347. Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta/Delta, corner ground, or high-resistance ground systems. (5) When using a Manual Self-Protected (Type E) Combination Motor Controller, the drive must be installed in a ventilated or non-ventilated enclosure with the minimum volume specified in this column. Application specific thermal considerations may require a larger enclosure. Input/Output Ratings Approvals Output Frequency: 0-400 Hz (Programmable) Efficiency: 97.5% (Typical) Digital Control Inputs (Input Current = 6mA) Analog Control Inputs SRC (Source) Mode: 18-24V = ON 0-6V = OFF SNK (Sink) Mode: 0-6V = ON 18-24V = OFF 4-20mA Analog: 250 ohm input impedance 0-10V DC Analog: 100k ohm input impedance External Pot: 1-10k ohms, 2 Watt minimum Control Output Programmable Output (form C relay) Resistive Rating: 3.0A at 30V DC, 3.0A at 125V AC, 3.0A at 240V AC Inductive Rating: 0.5A at 30V DC, 0.5A at 125V AC, 0.5A at 240V AC Opto Outputs 30V DC, 50mA Non-inductive Analog Outputs (10 bit) 0-10V, 1k ohm Min. 4-20mA, 525 ohm Max. Fuses and Circuit Breakers Recommended Fuse Type: UL Class J, CC, T or Type BS88; 600V (550V) or equivalent. Recommended Circuit Breakers: HMCP circuit breakers or equivalent. Protective Features Motor Protection: I2 t overload protection - 150% for 60 Secs, 200% for 3 Secs (Provides Class 10 protection) Overcurrent: 200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault Over Voltage: 100-120V AC Input – Trip occurs at 405V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line) 200-240V AC Input – Trip occurs at 405V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 290V AC incoming line) 380-460V AC Input – Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line) 460-600V AC Input – Trip occurs at 1005V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 711V AC incoming line) Under Voltage: 100-120V AC Input – Trip occurs at 210V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 75V AC incoming line) 200-240V AC Input – Trip occurs at 210V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 150V AC incoming line) 380-480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line) 460-600V AC Input – If P042 = 3 “High Voltage” trip occurs at 487V DC bus voltage (344V AC incoming line); If P042 = 2 “Low Voltage” trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (275V AC incoming line) Control Ride Through: Minimum ride through is 0.5 Secs - typical value 2 Secs Faultless Power Ride Through: 100 milliseconds Dynamic Braking Internal brake IGBT included with all ratings except when no brake is specified. Refer to Appendix B for DB resistor ordering information. UL® LISTED 966X IND CONT EQ UL508C UL® LISTED 966X IND CONT EQ C CSA 22.2 EMC Directive 89/336 LV: EN 50178, EN 60204 EMC: EN 61800-3, EN 50081-1, EN 50082-2 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 104. A-4 Supplemental Drive Information PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Category Specification Environment Altitude: 1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature without derating: IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open: IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1: Flange Mount: IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X: –10 to 50° C (14 to 122° F) –10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F) Heatsink: –10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F) Drive: –10 to 50° C (14 to 122° F) –10 to 40° C (14 to 104° F) Cooling Method Convection: Fan: 0.4 kW (0.5 HP) drives All other drive ratings and 0.4 kW (0.5 HP) 1-Phase drives with Integral “S Type” EMC Filter Storage Temperature: –40 to 85 degrees C (–40 to 185 degrees F) Atmosphere: Important: Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas, vapors or dust. If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time, it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing Shock (operating): 15G peak for 11ms duration (±1.0ms) Vibration (operating): 1G peak, 5 to 2000 Hz Control Carrier Frequency 2-16 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz. Frequency Accuracy Digital Input: Analog Input: Analog Output: Within ±0.05% of set output frequency. Within 0.5% of maximum output frequency, 10-Bit resolution ±2% of full scale, 10-Bit resolution Speed Regulation - Open Loop with Slip Compensation: ±1% of base speed across a 60:1 speed range. Stop Modes: Multiple programmable stop modes including - Ramp, Coast, DC-Brake, Ramp-to-Hold and S Curve. Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0 - 600 seconds in 0.1 second increments. Intermittent Overload: 150% Overload capability for up to 1 minute 200% Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Electronic Motor Overload Protection: Provides class 10 motor overload protection according to NEC article 430 and motor over-temperature protection according to NEC article 430.126 (A) (2). UL 508C File 29572. Electrical Voltage Tolerance: 100-120V ±10% 200-240V ±10% 380-480V ±10% 460-600V ±10% Frequency Tolerance: 48-63 Hz Input Phases: Three-phase input provides full rating. Single-phase operation provides 35% rated current. Displacement Power Factor: 0.98 across entire speed range Maximum Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 Amps Symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating: Determined by AIC Rating of installed fuse/circuit breaker Transistor Type: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 105. Supplemental Drive Information A-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E PowerFlex 40 Estimated Watts Loss (Rated Load, Speed & PWM) Voltage kW (HP) External Watts Internal Watts Total Watts Loss 100–120V 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.1 (1.5) 22 40 58 18 20 22 40 60 80 200–240V 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.1 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 3.7 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10) 22 40 63 100 150 200 265 18 20 22 25 30 35 40 40 60 85 125 180 235 305 380–480V 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.1 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 3.7 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10) 11 (15) 17 30 48 75 135 140 175 260 18 20 22 25 25 35 35 40 35 50 70 100 160 175 210 300 460–600V 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 4.0 (5.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10) 11 (15) 30 48 75 135 140 175 260 20 22 25 25 35 35 40 50 70 100 160 175 210 300 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 106. A-6 Supplemental Drive Information PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Notes: 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 107. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix B Accessories and Dimensions Table B.A Catalog Number Description Table B.B PowerFlex 40 Drives Product Selection 22B - A 1P5 N 1 1 4 Drive Voltage Rating Rating Enclosure HIM Emission Class Type Drive Ratings IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open IP20 Flange Mount(1) IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X Input Voltage kW HP Output Current Catalog Number Frame Size Catalog Number Catalog Number 120V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase No Filter 0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-V2P3N104 B 22B-V2P3F104 22B-V2P3C104 0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-V5P0N104 B 22B-V5P0F104 22B-V5P0C104 1.1 1.5 6.0A 22B-V6P0N104 B 22B-V6P0F104 22B-V6P0C104 240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase With Integral “S Type” EMC Filter 0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-A2P3N114 B – – 0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-A5P0N114 B – – 1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-A8P0N114 B – – 2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-A012N114 C – – 240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase No Filter 0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-A2P3N104 B 22B-A2P3F104 22B-A2P3C104 0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-A5P0N104 B 22B-A5P0F104 22B-A5P0C104 1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-A8P0N104 B 22B-A8P0F104 22B-A8P0C104 2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-A012N104 C 22B-A012F104 – 240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase No Filter 0.4 0.5 2.3A 22B-B2P3N104 B 22B-B2P3F104 22B-B2P3C104 0.75 1.0 5.0A 22B-B5P0N104 B 22B-B5P0F104 22B-B5P0C104 1.5 2.0 8.0A 22B-B8P0N104 B 22B-B8P0F104 22B-B8P0C104 2.2 3.0 12.0A 22B-B012N104 B 22B-B012F104 22B-B012C104 3.7 5.0 17.5A 22B-B017N104 B 22B-B017F104 22B-B017C104 5.5 7.5 24.0A 22B-B024N104 C 22B-B024F104 – 7.5 10.0 33.0A 22B-B033N104 C 22B-B033F104 – 480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase No Filter 0.4 0.5 1.4A 22B-D1P4N104 B 22B-D1P4F104 22B-D1P4C104 0.75 1.0 2.3A 22B-D2P3N104 B 22B-D2P3F104 22B-D2P3C104 1.5 2.0 4.0A 22B-D4P0N104 B 22B-D4P0F104 22B-D4P0C104 2.2 3.0 6.0A 22B-D6P0N104 B 22B-D6P0F104 22B-D6P0C104 4.0 5.0 10.5A 22B-D010N104 B 22B-D010F104 22B-D010C104 5.5 7.5 12.0A 22B-D012N104 C 22B-D012F104 – 7.5 10.0 17.0A 22B-D017N104 C 22B-D017F104 – 11.0 15.0 24.0A 22B-D024N104 C 22B-D024F104 (2) – 600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase No Filter 0.75 1.0 1.7A 22B-E1P7N104 B 22B-E1P7F104 22B-E1P7C104 1.5 2.0 3.0A 22B-E3P0N104 B 22B-E3P0F104 22B-E3P0C104 2.2 3.0 4.2A 22B-E4P2N104 B 22B-E4P2F104 22B-E4P2C104 4.0 5.0 6.6A 22B-E6P6N104 B 22B-E6P6F104 22B-E6P6C104 5.5 7.5 9.9A 22B-E9P9N104 C 22B-E9P9F104 – 7.5 10.0 12.0A 22B-E012N104 C 22B-E012F104 – 11.0 15.0 19.0A 22B-E019N104 C 22B-E019F104 – (1) Meets IP40/54/65 (NEMA 1/12/4/4X) when installed in an enclosure of like rating. (2) Requires use of external DC Bus Inductor or AC Line Reactor. See Table B.E for details. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 108. B-2 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.C Dynamic Brake Modules Drive Ratings Catalog Number (1) (2) (1) The resistors listed in this tables are rated for 5% duty cycle. (2) Use of Rockwell resistors is always recommended. The resistors listed have been carefully selected for optimizing performance in a variety of applications. Alternative resistors may be used, however care must be taken when making a selection. Refer to the PowerFlex Dynamic Braking Resistor Calculator, publication PFLEX-AT001. Input Voltage kW HP Minimum Resistance Ω 120V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase 0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500 0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500 1.1 1.5 48 AK-R2-091P500 240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase 0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500 0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500 1.5 2.0 48 AK-R2-091P500 2.2 3.0 32 AK-R2-047P500 240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 48 AK-R2-091P500 0.75 1.0 48 AK-R2-091P500 1.5 2.0 48 AK-R2-091P500 2.2 3.0 32 AK-R2-047P500 3.7 5.0 19 AK-R2-047P500 5.5 7.5 13 AK-R2-030P1K2 7.5 10.0 10 AK-R2-030P1K2 480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 97 AK-R2-360P500 0.75 1.0 97 AK-R2-360P500 1.5 2.0 97 AK-R2-360P500 2.2 3.0 97 AK-R2-120P1K2 4.0 5.0 77 AK-R2-120P1K2 5.5 7.5 55 AK-R2-120P1K2 7.5 10.0 39 AK-R2-120P1K2 11.0 15.0 24 AK-R2-120P1K2 (3) (3) Requires two resistors wired in parallel. 600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.75 1.0 120 AK-R2-360P500 1.5 2.0 120 AK-R2-360P500 2.2 3.0 82 AK-R2-120P1K2 4.0 5.0 82 AK-R2-120P1K2 5.5 7.5 51 AK-R2-120P1K2 7.5 10.0 51 AK-R2-120P1K2 11.0 15.0 51 AK-R2-120P1K2 (3) 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 109. Accessories and Dimensions B-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.D Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors Table B.E DC Bus Inductors Input Voltage kW HP Fundamental Amps Maximum Continuous Amps Inductance mh Watts Loss Catalog Number (1) (1) Catalog numbers listed are for 3% impedance open style units. NEMA Type 1 and 5% impedance reactor types are also available. Refer to publication 1321-TD001…. 240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 4 6 12.0 21 W 1321-3R4-D 0.75 1.0 8 12 3.0 29 W 1321-3R8-B 1.5 2.0 8 12 1.5 19.5 W 1321-3R8-A 2.2 3.0 12 18 1.25 26 W 1321-3R12-A 3.7 5.0 18 27 0.8 36 W 1321-3R18-A 5.5 7.5 25 37.5 0.5 48 W 1321-3R25-A 7.5 10.0 35 52.5 0.4 49 W 1321-3R35-A 480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 2 3 20.0 11.3 W 1321-3R2-B 0.75 1.0 4 6 9.0 20 W 1321-3R4-C 1.5 2.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B 2.2 3.0 8 12 5.0 25.3 W 1321-3R8-C 4.0 5.0 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B 5.5 7.5 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B 7.5 10.0 18 27 1.5 43 W 1321-3R18-B 11.0 15.0 25 37.5 1.2 52 W 1321-3R25-B 600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.75 1.0 2 3 20.0 11.3 W 1321-3R2-B 1.5 2.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B 2.2 3.0 4 6 6.5 20 W 1321-3R4-B 4.0 5.0 8 12 5.0 25.3 W 1321-3R8-C 5.5 7.5 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B 7.5 10.0 12 18 2.5 31 W 1321-3R12-B 11.0 15.0 18 27 1.5 43 W 1321-3R18-B Input Voltage kW HP Amps Inductance mh MTE Catalog Number (2) 240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 5.5 7.5 32 0.85 32RB001 7.5 10.0 40 0.5 40RB001 480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 5.5 7.5 18 3.75 18RB004 7.5 10.0 25 4.0 25RB005 11.0 15.0 32 2.68 32RB003 600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 5.5 7.5 12 6.0 12RB004 7.5 10.0 18 6.0 18RB005 11.0 15.0 25 4.0 25RB005 (2) Use MTE RB Series or equivalent inductors. 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 110. B-4 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.F EMC Line Filters Drive Ratings S Type Filter Catalog Number (1) (1) This filter is suitable for use with a cable length of at least 10 meters (33 feet) for Class A and 1 meter for Class B environments. L Type Filter Catalog Number (4) (4) This filter is suitable for use with a cable length of at least 100 meters for Class A and 5 meters for Class B environments. Input Voltage kW HP 120V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase 0.4 0.5 – 22-RF018-BL 0.75 1.0 – 22-RF018-BL 1.1 1.5 – 22-RF018-BL 240V 50/60 Hz 1-Phase 0.4 0.5 (2) (2) These ratings can be ordered with internal “S Type” filters. Refer to the Catalog Number explanation on page P-4 and Table B.B for details. 22-RF018-BL 0.75 1.0 (2) 22-RF018-BL 1.5 2.0 (2) 22-RF018-BL 2.2 3.0 (2) 22-RF025-CL 240V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 22-RF021-BS(3) (3) Filter must be Series B or later. 22-RF021-BL 0.75 1.0 22-RF021-BS(3) 22-RF021-BL 1.5 2.0 22-RF021-BS(3) 22-RF021-BL 2.2 3.0 22-RF021-BS(3) 22-RF021-BL 3.7 5.0 22-RF021-BS(3) 22-RF021-BL 5.5 7.5 22-RF034-CS 22-RF034-CL 7.5 10.0 22-RF034-CS 22-RF034-CL 480V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.4 0.5 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL 0.75 1.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL 1.5 2.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL 2.2 3.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL 4.0 5.0 22-RF012-BS 22-RF012-BL 5.5 7.5 22-RF018-CS 22-RF018-CL 7.5 10.0 22-RF018-CS 22-RF018-CL 11.0 15.0 22-RF026-CS 22-RF026-CL 600V 50/60 Hz 3-Phase 0.75 1.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL 1.5 2.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL 2.2 3.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL 4.0 5.0 – 22-RF8P0-BL 5.5 7.5 – 22-RF015-CL 7.5 10.0 – 22-RF015-CL 11.0 15.0 – 22-RF024-CL 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 111. Accessories and Dimensions B-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.G Human Interface Module (HIM) Option Kits and Accessories Table B.H IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit Item Description Catalog Number LCD Display, Remote Panel Mount Digital speed control CopyCat capable IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only Includes 2.9 meter cable 22-HIM-C2S LCD Display, Remote Panel Mount Digital speed control CopyCat capable IP66 (NEMA Type 4X/12) indoor use only Includes 2.9 meter cable 22-HIM-C2 LCD Display, Remote Handheld Digital speed control Full numeric keypad CopyCat capable IP30 (NEMA Type 1) Includes 1.0 meter cable Panel mount with optional Bezel Kit 22-HIM-A3 Bezel Kit Panel mount for LCD Display, Remote Handheld unit, IP30 (NEMA Type 1) 22-HIM-B1 DSI HIM Cable (DSI HIM to RJ45 cable) 1.0 Meter (3.3 Feet) 2.9 Meter (9.51 Feet) 22-HIM-H10 22-HIM-H30 Item Description Drive Frame Catalog Number IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP30/ NEMA 1/UL Type 1 enclosure. Includes conduit box with mounting screws and plastic top panel. B 22-JBAB C 22-JBAC IP30/NEMA 1/UL Type 1 Kit for Communication Option Field installed kit. Converts drive to IP30/ NEMA 1/UL Type 1 enclosure. Includes communication option conduit box with mounting screws and plastic top panel. B 22-JBCB C 22-JBCC 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 112. B-6 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.I Communication Option Kits and Accessories Item Description Catalog Number Communication Adapters Embedded communication options for use with the PowerFlex 4-Class drives. Requires a Communication Adapter Cover (IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 only. Ordered Separately) BACnet® ControlNet™ DeviceNet™ EtherNet/IP™ LonWorks® PROFIBUS™ DP 22-COMM-B 22-COMM-C 22-COMM-D 22-COMM-E 22-COMM-L 22-COMM-P External DSI™ Communications Kit External mounting kit for 22-COMM communication options 22-XCOMM-DC-BASE External Comms Power Supply Optional 100-240V AC Power Supply for External DSI Communications Kit. 20-XCOMM-AC-PS1 Compact I/O Module Three channel. 1769-SM2 Communication Adapter Cover Cover that houses the DeviceNet Communication Adapter (IP20, NEMA/UL Type 1 only) B Frame Drive C Frame Drive 22B-CCB 22B-CCC Serial Converter Module (RS485 to RS232) Provides serial communication via DF1 protocol for use with DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software. Includes: DSI to RS232 serial converter (1) 1203-SFC serial cable (1) 22-RJ45CBL-C20 cable (1) DriveExplorer Lite CD (1) 22-SCM-232 DSI Cable 2.0 meter RJ45 to RJ45 cable, male to male connectors. 22-RJ45CBL-C20 Serial Cable 2.0 meter serial cable with a locking low profile connector to connect to the serial converter and a 9-pin sub-miniature D female connector to connect to a computer. 1203-SFC Null Cable Converter For use when connecting the serial converter to DriveExplorer on a handheld PC. 1203-SNM Splitter Cable RJ45 one to two port splitter cable AK-U0-RJ45-SC1 Terminating Resistors RJ45 120 Ohm resistors (2 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TR1 Terminal Block RJ45 Two position terminal block (5 pieces) AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P DriveExplorer Software (CD-ROM) Version 3.01 or later Windows based software package that provides an intuitive means for monitoring or configuring Allen-Bradley drives and communication adapters online. Compatibility: Windows 95, 98, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later), 2000, XP and CE(1) (1) See www.ab.com/drives/driveexplorer.htm for supported devices. 9306-4EXP01ENE DriveExecutive software (CD-ROM) Version 1.01 or later Windows based software package that provides an intuitive means for monitoring or configuring Allen-Bradley drives and communication adapters online and offline. Compatibility: Windows 98, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 3 or later), 2000 and XP 9303-4DTE01ENE 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 113. Accessories and Dimensions B-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table B.J PowerFlex 40 Frames – Ratings are in kW and (HP) Figure B.1 IP20, NEMA/UL Type Open Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches). Weights are in kilograms and (pounds). Figure B.2 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 Option Kit without Communication Option Product Dimensions Frame 120V AC – 1-Phase 240V AC – 1-Phase 240V AC – 3-Phase 480V AC – 3-Phase 600V AC – 3-Phase B 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.1 (1.5) 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 3.7 (5.0) 0.4 (0.5) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 4.0 (5.0) 0.75 (1.0) 1.5 (2.0) 2.2 (3.0) 4.0 (5.0) C(1) 2.2 (3.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 11.0 (15.0) 5.5 (7.5) 7.5 (10.0) 11.0 (15.0) (1) IP66, NEMA/UL Type 4X rated drives are not availble in Frame C drive ratings. Frame A B C D E F Ship Weight B 100 (3.94) 180 (7.09) 136 (5.35) 87 (3.43) 168 (6.61) 87.4 (3.44) 2.2 (4.9) C 130 (5.1) 260 (10.2) 180 (7.1) 116 (4.57) 246 (9.7) – 4.3 (9.5) A E B D C F 5.5 (0.22) 33.0 (1.30) 74.3 (2.93) 109.9 (4.33) 64.1 (2.52) 79.1 (3.11) ∅ 22.2 (0.87) 25.6 (1.01) 40.6 (1.60) 60.0 (2.36) 111.2 (4.38) 152.2 (5.99) 107.0 (4.21) 66.0 (2.60) ∅ 22.2 (0.87) ∅ 28.5 (1.12) 24.0 (0.94) Frame B - 22-JBAB Frame C - 22-JBAC 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 114. B-8 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.3 IP30, NEMA/UL Type 1 Option Kit with Communication Option – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) 64.0 (2.52) 25.0 (0.98) ∅ 22.2 (0.87) 76.3 (3.00) 105.3 (4.15) 134.3 (5.29) 50.0 (1.97) 77.5 (3.05) 22.5 (0.89) 25.0 (0.98) 45.7 (1.80) 109.8 (4.32) 144.8 (5.70) 179.8 (7.08) 69.2 (2.72) 92.2 (3.63) 108.7 (4.28) 22.2 (0.87) ∅ 22.2 (0.87) ∅ 28.5 (1.12) 60.0 (2.36) Frame B - 22-JBCB Frame C - 22-JBCC 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 115. Accessories and Dimensions B-9 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.4 PowerFlex 40 Flange Mount Drives – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) 244 (9.61) 250 (9.84) 94.3 (3.71) 63.1 (2.48) 214 (8.43) 138.2 (5.44) 105.8 (4.17) 325 (12.8) 300 (11.81) 130.3 (5.13) 22B-CCC Frame B Frame C 22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 116. B-10 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.5 PowerFlex 40 Flange Mount Cutout Dimensions – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) 210 (8.27) 98 (3.86) 160 (6.30) 145 (5.71) 49 (1.93) 31 (1.22) 7.5 (0.30) 14 (0.55) 98.5 (3.88) 197 (7.76) 6.5 (0.26) 225 (8.86) 23.5 (0.93) 5.3 (0.21) 291.5 (11.48) 164 (6.46) 180 (7.09) 90 (3.54) 307.5 (12.11) 230.6 (9.08) 153.8 (6.06) 76.9 (3.03) 8 (0.31) 8 (0.31) 5.3 (0.21) Frame B Frame C 22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 117. Accessories and Dimensions B-11 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.6 PowerFlex 40 Replacement Plate Drive Dimensions – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) 125 (4.92) 204 (8.03) 180 (7.09) 192 (7.56) 96 (3.78) 9.5 (0.37) 88 (3.46) 112 (4.41) 100 (3.94) 80 (3.15) 5.3 (0.21) 155 (6.10) 284 (11.18) 260 (10.24) 272 (10.71) 136 (5.35) 9.5 (0.37) 98.5 (3.88) 123.5 (4.86) 142 (5.59) 130 (5.12) 80 (3.15) 5.3 (0.21) 22B-CCC Frame B Frame C 22B-UM001.book Page 11 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 118. B-12 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.7 IP66, NEMA Type/UL Type 4X – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Weights are in kilograms and (pounds). Weight 5.2 (11.5) 165 (6.50) 146 (5.75) 6.5 (0.26) 270 (10.63) 253 (9.96) 82.5 (3.25) 46 (1.81) 23 (0.91) 89 (3.50) 124 (4.88) 198 (7.80) 28 (1.10) 22 (0.87) 22B-UM001.book Page 12 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 119. Accessories and Dimensions B-13 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.8 Dynamic Brake Modules – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches). Weights are in kilograms and (pounds). Figure B.9 Recommended External Brake Resistor Circuitry Frame Catalog Number Weight A AK-R2-091P500, AK-R2-047P500, AK-R2-360P500 1.1 (2.5) B AK-R2-030P1K2, AK-R2-120P1K2 2.7 (6) 335.0 (13.19) 60.0 (2.36) 30.0 (1.18)17.0 (0.67) 59.0 (2.32) 13.0 (0.51) 405.0 (15.94) 386.0 (15.20) 316.0 (12.44) 61.0 (2.40)31.0 (1.22) ROCKWELL AUTOMATIONCUS SURFACES MAY BE ROCKWELL AUTOMATIONCUS Frame A Frame B Power On R (L1) S (L2) T (L3) Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat Power Off M M (Input Contactor) M Three-Phase AC Input 22B-UM001.book Page 13 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 120. B-14 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.10 Bulletin 1321-3R Series Line Reactors – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches). Weights are in kilograms and (pounds). Catalog Number A B C D E Weight 1321-3R2-A 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4) 1321-3R2-B 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 70 (2.75) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4) 1321-3R4-A 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 76 (3.00) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4) 1321-3R4-B 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 76 (3.00) 50 (1.98) 37 (1.44) 1.8 (4) 1321-3R4-C 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 86 (3.38) 60 (2.35) 37 (1.44) 2.3 (5) 1321-3R4-D 112 (4.40) 104 (4.10) 92 (3.62) 66 (2.60) 37 (1.44) 2.7 (6) 1321-3R8-A 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 3.1 (7) 1321-3R8-B 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 3.6 (8) 1321-3R8-C 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 85 (3.35) 63 (2.48) 51 (2.00) 4.9 (11) 1321-3R12-A 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 4.1 (9) 1321-3R12-B 152 (6.00) 127 (5.00) 76 (3.00) 53 (2.10) 51 (2.00) 4.5 (10) 1321-3R18-A 152 (6.00) 133 (5.25) 79 (3.10) 54 (2.13) 51 (2.00) 4.1 (9) 1321-3R18-B 152 (6.00) 133 (5.25) 86 (3.40) 63 (2.48) 51 (2.00) 5.4 (12) 1321-3R25-A 183 (7.20) 146 (5.76) 85 (3.35) 60 (2.35) 76 (3.00) 4.9 (11) 1321-3R35-A 193 (7.60) 146 (5.76) 91 (3.60) 66 (2.60) 76 (3.00) 6.3 (14) D C B A E 22B-UM001.book Page 14 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 121. Accessories and Dimensions B-15 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.11 Frame B EMC Line Filters – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Catalog Numbers: 22-RF8P0-BL, 22-RF012-BS, -BL (Series B); 22-RF018-BS; 22-RF021-BS, -BL 5.5 (0.22)17.8 (0.70) 24.0 (0.94) 78 (3.07) 100 (3.94) 50 (1.97) 29.8 (1.17) 229 (9.02) 216 (8.50) 217 (8.54) 22B-UM001.book Page 15 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 122. B-16 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.12 Frame C EMC Line Filters – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Catalog Numbers: 22-RF018-CS, -CL; 22-RF025-CL; 22-RF026-CS, -CL; 22-RF034-CS, -CL 5.5 (0.22)17 (0.67) 30 (1.18) 90 (3.54) 130 (5.12) 60 (2.36) 32 (1.26) 309 (12.17) 297 (11.69) 297 (11.69) 22B-UM001.book Page 16 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 123. Accessories and Dimensions B-17 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.13 Remote (Panel Mount) Small HIM – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Catalog Number: 22-HIM-C2S 93 (3.66) 25 (0.98) 2m 180 (7.09) 154 (6.06) 77 (3.03) 23.5 (0.93) 67 (2.64) 60 (2.36) 19.1 (0.75) 4.8 (0.19) 22B-UM001.book Page 17 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 124. B-18 Accessories and Dimensions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Figure B.14 NEMA Type 1 Bezel – Dimensions are in millimeters and (inches) Catalog Number: 22-HIM-B1 93 (3.66)25.2 (0.99) 2m 180 (7.09) 11.1 (0.44) 19.1 (0.75) 4.8 (0.19) 154 (6.06) 77 (3.03) 23.5 (0.93) 67 (2.64) 60 (2.36) 22B-UM001.book Page 18 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 125. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix C RS485 (DSI) Protocol PowerFlex 40 drives support the RS485 (DSI) protocol to allow efficient operation with Rockwell Automation peripherals. In addition, some Modbus functions are supported to allow simple networking. PowerFlex 40 drives can be multi-dropped on an RS485 network using Modbus protocol in RTU mode. For information regarding DeviceNet or other communication protocols, refer to the appropriate user manual. Network Wiring Network wiring consists of a shielded 2-conductor cable that is daisy-chained from node to node. Figure C.1 Network Wiring Diagram Controller V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3 BR+ BR-DC- DC+ Master PowerFlex 40 Node 1 4 5 PowerFlex 40 Node 2 4 5 PowerFlex 40 Node "n" 4 5 TxRxD+ TxRxD- TxRxD+ TxRxD- TxRxD+ TxRxD-120 ohm resistor 120 ohm resistor FRONT PIN 8 PIN 1 NOTE:The shield should be grounded at ONLY ONE location. Shield Shield Shield TxRxD+ TxRxD- RS485 (DSI) AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P RS485 (DSI) TxRxD+ TxRxD-V/T2T/L3S/L2R/L1 U/T1 W/T3 BR+ BR-DC- DC+ 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 13 14 15 06 07 08 09 16 17 18 19 01 02 03 04 05 11 12 13 14 15 06 07 08 09 16 17 18 19 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 126. C-2 RS485 (DSI) Protocol PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Only pins 4 and 5 on the RJ45 plug should be wired. The other pins on the PowerFlex 40 RJ45 socket must not be connected because they contain power, etc. for other Rockwell Automation peripheral devices. Wiring terminations on the master controller will vary depending on the master controller used and “TxRxD+” and “TxRxD-” are shown for illustration purposes only. Refer to the master controller’s user manual for network terminations. Note that there is no standard for the “+” and “-” wires, and consequently Modbus device manufacturers interpret them differently. If you have problems with initially establishing communications, try swapping the two network wires at the master controller. Standard RS485 wiring practices apply. • Termination resistors need to be applied at each end of the network cable. • RS485 repeaters may need to be used for long cable runs, or if greater than 32 nodes are needed on the network. • Network wiring should be separated from power wires by at least 0.3 meters (1 foot). • Network wiring should only cross power wires at a right angle. I/O Terminal 19 on the PowerFlex 40 is connected to the metal shield around the RJ45 connector. It is recommended to ground this terminal (there are two PE terminals on the drive). See Table 1.H for more information. Network Common is internally tied to I/O Terminal 04 (Digital Common). Tying I/O Terminal 04 to PE ground may improve noise immunity in some applications. 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 127. RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Parameter Configuration The following PowerFlex 40 parameters are used to configure the drive to operate on a network. Supported Modbus Function Codes The peripheral interface (DSI) used on PowerFlex 40 drives supports some of the Modbus function codes. Important: Modbus devices can be 0-based (registers are numbered starting at 0) or 1-based (registers are numbered starting at 1). Depending on the Modbus Master used, the register addresses listed on the following pages may need to be offset by +1. For example, Logic Command may be register address 8192 for some master devices (e.g. ProSoft 3150-MCM SLC Modbus scanner) and 8193 for others (e.g. PanelViews). Parameter Details Reference P036 [Start Source] Set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” if Start is controlled from the network. Page 3-10 P038 [Speed Reference] Set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” if the Speed Reference is controlled from the network. Page 3-12 A103 [Comm Data Rate] Sets the data rate for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes on the network must be set to the same data rate. Page 3-31 A104 [Comm Node Addr] Sets the node address for the drive on the network. Each device on the network requires a unique node address. Page 3-31 A105 [Comm Loss Action] Selects the drive’s response to communication problems. Page 3-32 A106 [Comm Loss Time] Sets the time that the drive will remain in communication loss before the drive implements A105 [Comm Loss Action]. Page 3-32 A107 [Comm Format] Sets the transmission mode, data bits, parity and stop bits for the RS485 (DSI) Port. All nodes on the network must be set to the same setting. Page 3-32 Modbus Function Code (Decimal) Command 03 Read Holding Registers 06 Preset (Write) Single Register 16 (10 Hexadecimal) Preset (Write) Multiple Registers 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 128. C-4 RS485 (DSI) Protocol PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Writing (06) Logic Command Data The PowerFlex 40 drive can be controlled via the network by sending Function Code 06 writes to register address 8192 (Logic Command). P036 [Start Source] must be set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” in order to accept the commands. In addition to being written, register address 8192 can be read using Function Code 03. Logic Command Address (Decimal) Bit(s) Description 8192 0 1 = Stop, 0 = Not Stop 1 1 = Start, 0 = Not Start 2 1 = Jog, 0 = No Jog 3 1 = Clear Faults, 0 = Not Clear Faults 5,4 00 = No Command 01 = Forward Command 10 = Reverse Command 11 = No Command 6 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier. In FRN 4.01 and later, activates Opto Output 1. Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter A058 is set to 20. 7 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier. In FRN 4.01 and later, activates Opto Output 2. Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter A061 is set to 20. 9,8 00 = No Command 01 = Accel Rate 1 Enable 10 = Accel Rate 2 Enable 11 = Hold Accel Rate Selected 11,10 00 = No Command 01 = Decel Rate 1 Enable 10 = Decel Rate 2 Enable 11 = Hold Decel Rate Selected 14,13,12 000 = No Command 001 = Freq. Source = P038 [Speed Reference] 010 = Freq. Source = A069 [Internal Freq] 011 = Freq. Source = Comms (Addr 8193) 100 = A070 [Preset Freq 0] 101 = A071 [Preset Freq 1] 110 = A072 [Preset Freq 2] 111 = A073 [Preset Freq 3] 15 Not Used in FRN 3.03 and earlier. In FRN 4.01 and later, activates C-form relay. Note: This bit controls the output when the value of parameter A055 is set to 20. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 129. RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Writing (06) Reference The Speed Reference to a PowerFlex 40 drive can be controlled via the network by sending Function Code 06 writes to register address 8193 (Reference). P038 [Speed Reference] must be set to 5 “RS485 (DSI) Port” in order to accept the Speed Reference. In addition to being written, register address 8193 can be read using Function Code 03. Reading (03) Logic Status Data The PowerFlex 40 Logic Status data can be read via the network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 8448 (Logic Status). Reference Address (Decimal) Description 8193 A decimal value entered as xxx.x where the decimal point is fixed. For example, a decimal “100” equals 10.0 Hz and “543” equals 54.3 Hz. Logic Status Address (Decimal) Bit(s) Description 8448 0 1 = Ready, 0 = Not Ready 1 1 = Active (Running), 0 = Not Active 2 1 = Cmd Forward, 0 = Cmd Reverse 3 1 = Rotating Forward, 0 = Rotating Reverse 4 1 = Accelerating, 0 = Not Accelerating 5 1 = Decelerating, 0 = Not Decelerating 6 1 = Alarm, 0 = No Alarm 7 1 = Faulted, 0 = Not Faulted 8 1 = At Reference, 0 = Not At Reference 9 1 = Reference Controlled by Comm 10 1 = Operation Cmd Controlled by Comm 11 1 = Parameters have been locked 12 Digital Input 1 Status 13 Digital Input 2 Status 14 Digital Input 3 Status(1) (1) This status is available only with firmware revision FRN 2.xx and higher. 15 Digital Input 4 Status(1) 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 130. C-6 RS485 (DSI) Protocol PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Reading (03) Feedback The Feedback (Output Frequency) from the PowerFlex 40 drive can be read via the network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 8451 (Feedback). Reading (03) Drive Error Codes The PowerFlex 40 Error Code data can be read via the network by sending Function Code 03 reads to register address 8449 (Drive Error Codes). Feedback(2) Address (Decimal) Description 8451 A xxx.x decimal value where the decimal point is fixed. For example, a decimal “123” equals 12.3 Hz and “300” equals 30.0 Hz. (2) Returns the same data as Reading (03) Parameter d001 [Output Freq]. Logic Status Address (Decimal) Value (Decimal) Description 8449 0 No Fault 2 Auxiliary Input 3 Power Loss 4 Undervoltage 5 Overvoltage 6 Motor Stalled 7 Motor Overload 8 Heatsink Overtemperature 12 HW Overcurrent (300%) 13 Ground Fault 29 Analog Input Loss 33 Auto Restart Tries 38 Phase U to Ground Short 39 Phase V to Ground Short 40 Phase W to Ground Short 41 Phase UV Short 42 Phase UW Short 43 Phase VW Short 63 Software Overcurrent 64 Drive Overload 70 Power Unit Fail 80 AutoTune Fail 81 Communication Loss 100 Parameter Checksum Error 122 I/O Board Fail 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 131. RS485 (DSI) Protocol C-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Reading (03) and Writing (06) Drive Parameters To access drive parameters, the Modbus register address equals the parameter number. For example, a decimal “1” is used to address Parameter d001 [Output Freq] and decimal “39” is used to address Parameter P039 [Accel Time 1]. Additional Information Refer to http://www.ab.com/drives/ for additional information. 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 132. C-8 RS485 (DSI) Protocol PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Notes: 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 133. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix D RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable The PowerFlex 40 drive provides a RJ45 port to allow the connection of a single peripheral device. The RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable can be used to connect a second DSI peripheral device to the drive. Connectivity Guidelines • Two peripherals maximum can be attached to a drive. • If a single peripheral is used, it must be connected to the Master port (M) on the splitter and configured for “Auto” (default) or “Master.” Parameter 9 [Device Type] on the DSI / MDI keypads and Parameter 1 [Adapter Cfg] on the Serial Converter are used to select the type (Auto / Master / Slave). • Do not use the RJ45 Splitter Cable with a drive that has an internal network communication adapter installed. Since only one additional peripheral can be added, the second peripheral can be connected directly to the RJ45 port on the drive. The internal Comm is always the Master, therefore the external peripheral must be configured as “Auto” (for temporary connections) or “Slave” (for permanent connections). • If two peripherals will be powered up at the same time, one must be configured as the “Master” and connected to the Master port (M) and the other must be connected as the “Slave” and connected to the Slave port (S). ! ATTENTION: Risk of injury or equipment damage exists. The peripherals may not perform as intended if these Connectivity Guidelines are not followed. Precautions should be taken to follow these Connectivity Guidelines. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 134. D-2 RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E DSI Cable Accessories RJ45 Splitter Cable – Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-SC1 RJ45 Two-Position Terminal Block Adapter – Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P RJ45 Adapter with Integrated Termination Resistor – Catalog Number: AK-U0-RJ45-TR1 Slave Port Master Port PIN 8PIN 1 MS TB2 (PIN 5) TB1 (PIN 4) PIN 8 PIN 1 PIN 8 PIN 1 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 135. RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable D-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Connecting One Temporary Peripheral Connecting One Temporary Peripheral and One Permanent Peripheral M S Serial Converter Parameter 1 [Adapter Cfg] set to "Auto" (default) or "Master" and connected to Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable DSI DSI / MDI Hand Held or Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to "Auto" (default) or "Master" and connected to Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable DSI / MDI Drive Serial Converter NEMA 4 Panel Mount Unit or NEMA 1 Bezel with DSI / MDI Hand Held Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to "Master" and connected to Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable Parameter 1 [Adapter Cfg] set to "Auto" (default) or "Slave" and connected to Slave port (S) on RJ45 Splitter Cable DSI M S DSI / MDI Drive 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 136. D-4 RJ45 DSI Splitter Cable PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Connecting Two Permanent Peripherals Connecting an RS-485 Network or NEMA 1 Bezel with DSI / MDI Hand Held NEMA 4 Panel Mount Unit Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to "Master" and connected to Master port (M) on RJ45 Splitter Cable Parameter 9 [Device Type] set to "Slave" and connected to Slave port (S) on RJ45 Splitter Cable M S DSI / MDI Drive or AK-U0-RJ45-TR1 Terminating Resistor (end of network) DSI / MDI Drives or or Customer supplied RJ45 male-to-RJ45 male cables with wires connected at pins 4 and 5 only. Both the Master (M) and Slave (S) ports on the RJ45 Splitter Cable operate as standard RS-485 ports in this configuration. AK-U0-RJ45-SC1 AK-U0-RJ45-TB2P Two-position Terminal Block 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 137. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix E StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions Four PowerFlex 40 logic functions provide the capability to program simple logic functions without a separate controller. • StepLogic Function Steps through up to eight preset speeds based on programmed logic. Programmed logic can include conditions that need to be met from digital inputs programmed as “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” before stepping from one preset speed to the next. A timer is available for each of the eight steps and is used to program a time delay before stepping from one preset speed to the next. The status of a digital output can also be controlled based on the step being executed. • Basic Logic Function Up to two digital inputs can be programmed as “Logic In1” and/or “Logic In2”. A digital output can be programmed to change state based on the condition of one or both inputs based on basic logic functions such as AND, OR, NOR. The basic logic functions can be used with or without StepLogic. • Timer Function A digital input can be programmed for “Timer Start”. A digital output can be programmed as a “Timer Out” with an output level programmed to the desired time. When the timer reaches the time programmed into the output level the output will change state. The timer can be reset via a digital input programmed as “Reset Timer”. • Counter Function A digital input can be programmed for “Counter In”. A digital output can be programmed as “Counter Out” with an output level programmed to the desired number of counts. When the counter reaches the count programmed into the output level the output will change state. The counter can be reset via a digital input programmed as “Reset Counter”. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 138. E-2 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E StepLogic Using Timed Steps To activate this function, set parameter P038 [Speed Reference] to 6 “Stp Logic”. Three parameters are used to configure the logic, speed reference and time for each step. • Logic is defined using parameters A140-A147 [Stp Logic x]. • Preset Speeds are set with parameters A070-A077 [Preset Freq x]. • Time of operation for each step is set with parameters A150-A157 [Stp Logic Time x]. The direction of motor rotation can be forward or reverse. Figure E.1 Using Timed Steps StepLogic Sequence • Sequence begins with a valid start command. • A normal sequence begins with Step 0 and transition to the next step when the corresponding StepLogic time has expired. • Step 7 is followed by Step 0 • Sequence repeats until a stop is issued or a fault condition occurs. Time 0 Forward Reverse Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 139. StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E StepLogic Using Basic Logic Functions Digital input and digital output parameters can be configured to use logic to transition to the next step. Logic In1 and Logic In2 are defined by programming parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] to option 23 “Logic In1” or option 24 “Logic In2”. Example • Run at Step 0. • Transition to Step 1 when Logic In1 is true. Logic senses the edge of Logic In1 when it transitions from off to on. Logic In1 is not required to remain “on”. • Transition to Step 2 when both Logic In1 and Logic In2 are true. The drive senses the level of both Logic In1 and Logic In2 and transitions to Step 2 when both are on. • Transition to Step 3 when Logic In2 returns to a false or off state. Inputs are not required to remain in the “on” condition except under the logic conditions used for the transition from Step 2 to Step 3. The step time value and the basic logic may be used together to satisfy machine conditions. For instance, the step may need to run for a minimum time period and then use the basic logic to trigger a transition to the next step. Time Logic In1 Logic In2 Frequency Start Step 0 Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Time Logic In1 Logic In2 Frequency Start Step 0 Step 1 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 140. E-4 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Timer Function Digital inputs and outputs control the timer function and are configured with parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] set to 18 “Timer Start” and 20 “Reset Timer”. Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached. Level parameters A056 [Relay Out Level], A059 [Opto Out1 Level] and A062 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the desired time in seconds. Parameters A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] and A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to option 16 “Timer Out” and causes the output to change state when the preset level is reached. Example • Drive starts up and accelerates to 30 Hz. • After 30Hz has been maintained for 20 seconds, a 4-20mA analog input becomes the reference signal for speed control. • The timer function is used to select a preset speed with a 20 second run time that overrides the speed reference while the digital input is active. • Parameters are set to the following options: – P038 [Speed Reference] = 3 “4-20mA Input” – A051 [Digital In1 Sel] = 4 “Preset Freq” – A052 [Digital In2 Sel] = 18 “Timer Start” – A055 [Relay Out Sel] = 16 “Timer Out” – A056 [Relay Out Level] = 20.0 Secs – A071 [Preset Freq 1] = 30.0 Hz • The control terminal block is wired such that a start command will also trigger the timer start. • The relay output is wired to I/O Terminal 05 (Digital Input 1) so that it forces the input on when the timer starts. • After the timer is complete, the output is turned off releasing the preset speed command. The drive defaults to following the analog input reference as programmed. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 141. StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Note that a “Reset Timer” input is not required for this example since the “Timer Start” input both clears and starts the timer. Digital In2 Reset Counter Limit Switch Digital In1 Counter In Photo Eye Start Output Frequency Relay Out 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 142. E-6 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Counter Function Digital inputs and outputs control the counter function and are configured with parameters A051-A054 [Digital Inx Sel] set to 19 “Counter In” and 21 “Reset Counter”. Digital outputs (relay and opto type) define a preset level and indicate when the level is reached. Level parameters A056 [Relay Out Level], A059 [Opto Out1 Level] and A062 [Opto Out2 Level] are used to set the desired count value. Parameters A055 [Relay Out Sel], A058 [Opto Out1 Sel] and A061 [Opto Out2 Sel] are set to 17 “Counter Out” which causes the output to change state when the level is reached. Example • A photo eye is used to count packages on a conveyor line. • An accumulator holds the packages until 5 are collected. • A diverter arm redirects the group of 5 packages to a bundling area. • The diverter arm returns to its original position and triggers a limit switch that resets the counter. • Parameters are set to the following options: – A051 [Digital In1 Sel] set to 19 to select “Counter In” – A052 [Digital In2 Sel] set to 21 to select “Reset Counter” – A055 [Relay Out Sel] set to 17 to select “Counter Out” – A056 [Relay Out Level] set to 5.0 (counts) 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 143. StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions E-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E StepLogic Parameters Table E.A Code Descriptions for Parameters A140-A147 Table E.B Digit 3 – Defines the action during the step currently executing. Table E.C Digit 2 – Defines what step to jump to or how to end program when the logic conditions specified in Digit 1 are met. Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Digit 0 0 0 F 1 Setting Accel/Decel Parameters Used StepLogic Output State Commanded Direction 0 1 Off FWD 1 1 Off REV 2 1 Off No Output 3 1 On FWD 4 1 On REV 5 1 On No Output 6 2 Off FWD 7 2 Off REV 8 2 Off No Output 9 2 On FWD A 2 On REV b 2 On No Output Setting Logic 0 Jump to Step 0 1 Jump to Step 1 2 Jump to Step 2 3 Jump to Step 3 4 Jump to Step 4 5 Jump to Step 5 6 Jump to Step 6 7 Jump to Step 7 8 End Program (Normal Stop) 9 End Program (Coast to Stop) A End Program and Fault (F2) 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 144. E-8 StepLogic™, Basic Logic and Timer/Counter Functions PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Table E.D Digit 1 – Defines what logic must be met to jump to a step other than the very next step. Table E.E Digit 0 – Defines what logic must be met to jump to the very next step. Setting Description Logic 0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP 1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter. TIMED 2 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TRUE 3 Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TRUE 4 Step if “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) FALSE 5 Step if “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) FALSE 6 Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) OR 7 Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) AND 8 Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) NOR 9 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) XOR A Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) XOR b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TIMED AND C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TIMED AND d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR F Do not step OR no “jump to”, so use Digit 0 logic IGNORE Setting Description Logic 0 Skip Step (jump immediately) SKIP 1 Step based on the time programmed in the respective [Stp Logic Time x] parameter. TIMED 2 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TRUE 3 Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TRUE 4 Step if “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) FALSE 5 Step if “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) FALSE 6 Step if either “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) OR 7 Step if both “Logic In1” and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) AND 8 Step if neither “Logic In1” or “Logic In2” is active (logically true) NOR 9 Step if “Logic In1” is active (logically true) and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) XOR A Step if “Logic In2” is active (logically true) and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) XOR b Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is active (logically true) TIMED AND C Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is active (logically true) TIMED AND d Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In1” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR E Step after [Stp Logic Time x] and “Logic In2” is not active (logically false) TIMED OR F Use logic programmed in Digit 1 IGNORE 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 145. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Appendix F PID Set Up PID Loop The PowerFlex 40 has a built-in PID (proportional, integral, differential) control loop. The PID loop is used to maintain a process feedback (such as pressure, flow or tension) at a desired set point. The PID loop works by subtracting the PID feedback from a reference and generating an error value. The PID loop reacts to the error, based on the PID Gains, and outputs a frequency to try to reduce the error value to 0. To enable the PID loop, parameter A132 [PID Ref Sel] must be set to an option other than 0 “PID Disabled”. Exclusive Control and Trim Control are two basic configurations where the PID loop may be used. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 146. F-2 PID Set Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Exclusive Control In Exclusive Control, the Speed Reference becomes 0, and the PID Output becomes the entire Freq Command. Exclusive Control is used when A132 [PID Ref Sel] is set to option 1, 2, 3 or 4. This configuration does not require a master reference, only a desired set point, such as a flow rate for a pump. Example • In a pumping application, the PID Reference equals the Desired System Pressure set point. • The Pressure Transducer signal provides PID Feedback to the drive. Fluctuations in actual system pressure, due to changes in flow, result in a PID Error value. • The drive output frequency increases or decreases to vary motor shaft speed to correct for the PID Error value. • The Desired System Pressure set point is maintained as valves in the system are opened and closed causing changes in flow. • When the PID Control Loop is disabled, the Commanded Speed is the Ramped Speed Reference. – + PID Prop Gain PID Loop PID Integ Time PID Diff Rate PID Enabled PID Fdbk PID Ref PID Error + + + PID Output Accel/Decel Ramp Freq Command Pump PID Feedback = Pressure Transducer Signal PID Reference = Desired System Pressure 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 147. PID Set Up F-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Trim Control In Trim Control, the PID Output is added to the Speed Reference. In Trim mode, the output of the PID loop bypasses the accel/decel ramp as shown. Trim Control is used when A132 [PID Ref Sel] is set to option 5, 6, 7 or 8. Example • In a winder application, the PID Reference equals the Equilibrium set point. • The Dancer Pot signal provides PID Feedback to the drive. Fluctuations in tension result in a PID Error value. • The Master Speed Reference sets the wind/unwind speed. • As tension increases or decreases during winding, the Speed Reference is trimmed to compensate. Tension is maintained near the Equilibrium set point. – + PID Prop Gain PID Loop PID Integ Time PID Diff Rate PID Enabled P038 [Speed Reference] PID Fdbk PID Ref PID Error + + + + PID Output Output Freq + Accel/Decel Ramp P038 [Speed Reference] 0 Volts PID Feedback = Dancer Pot Signal 10 Volts PID Reference = Equilibrium Set Point 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 148. F-4 PID Set Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E PID Reference and Feedback Parameter A132 [PID Ref Sel] is used to enable the PID mode (A132 ¦ 0 “PID Disabled”) and to select the source of the PID Reference. If A132 [PID Ref Sel] is not set to 0 “PID Disabled”, PID can still be disabled by select programmable digital input options (parameters A051-A054) such as “Jog”, “Local” or “PID Disable”. Table F.A A132 [PID Ref Sel] Options A133 [PID Feedback Sel] is used to select the source of the PID feedback. Table F.B A133 [PID Feedback Sel] Options Option Description 0 “PID Disabled” Disables the PID loop (default setting) 1 “PID Setpoint“ Selects Exclusive Control. A137 [PID Setpoint] will be used to set the value of the PID Reference 2 “0-10V Input” Selects Exclusive Control. Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero. 3 “4-20mA Input” Selects Exclusive Control. Selects the 4-20mA Input. 4 “Comm Port” Selects Exclusive Control. The reference word from a communication network (see Appendix C for details on the reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference. 5 “Setpnt, Trim” Selects Trim Control. A137 [PID Setpoint] will be used to set the value of the PID Reference. 6 “0-10V, Trim” Selects Trim Control. Selects the 0-10V Input. Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero. 7 “4-20mA, Trim” Selects Trim Control. Selects the 4-20mA Input. 8 “Comm, Trim” Selects Trim Control. The reference word from a communication network (see Appendix C for details on the reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes the PID Reference. The value sent over the network is scaled so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% reference. For example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% reference. Option Description 0 “0-10V Input” Selects the 0-10V Input (default setting). Note that the PID will not function with a bipolar analog input. It will ignore any negative voltages and treat them like a zero. 1 “4-20mA Input“ Selects the 4-20mA Input. 2 “Comm Port” The reference word from a communication network (see Appendix C of the PowerFlex 40 User Manual for details on the reference word) such as Modbus RTU or DeviceNet becomes the PID Feedback. The value sent over the network is scaled so that P035 [Maximum Freq] x 10 = 100% Feedback. For example, with [Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz, a value of 600 sent over the network would represent 100% Feedback. 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 149. PID Set Up F-5 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Analog PID Reference Signals Parameters A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] and A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] are used to scale or invert an analog PID Reference. Important: Firmware version FRN 2.xx also allows PID Feedback scaling from an analog input. Examples Scale Function For a 0-5 volt signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 0 volt signal = 0% PID Reference and a 5 volt signal = 100% PID Reference. • A110 [Anlg In 0-10V Lo] = 0.0% • A111 [Anlg In 0-10V Hi] = 50.0% • A132 [PID Ref Sel] = 0 “0-10V Input” 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PID Reference (%) InputVolts 2 4 6 8 10 12 22B-UM001.book Page 5 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 150. F-6 PID Set Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Invert Function For a 4-20mA signal, the following parameter settings are used so that a 20mA signal = 0% PID Reference and a 4mA signal = 100% PID Reference. • A112 [Anlg In 4-20mA Lo] = 100.0% • A113 [Anlg In 4-20mA Hi] = 0.0% • A132 [PID Ref Sel] = 3 “4-20mA Input” Alternatively, you can set the value of A167 [PID Invert Error] to 1 to change the sign of the PID error. See A167 [PID Invert Error] in Chapter 3 for more details. PID Deadband Parameter A138 [PID Deadband] is used to set a range, in percent, of the PID Reference that the drive will ignore. Example • [PID Deadband] is set to 5.0 • The PID Reference is 25.0% • The PID Regulator will not act on a PID Error that falls between 20.0 and 30.0% 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PID Reference (%) 4-20mAInput 4 8 12 16 20 24 22B-UM001.book Page 6 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 151. PID Set Up F-7 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E PID Preload The value set in A139 [PID Preload], in Hertz, will be pre-loaded into the integral component of the PID at any start or enable. This will cause the drive’s frequency command to initially jump to that preload frequency, and the PID loop starts regulating from there. PID Limits A130 [PID Trim Hi] and A131 [PID Trim Lo] are used to limit the PID output and are only used in trim mode. [PID Trim Hi] sets the maximum frequency for the PID output in trim mode. [PID Trim Lo] sets the reverse frequency limit for the PID output in trim mode. Note that when the PID reaches the Hi or Lo limit, the PID regulator stops integrating so that windup does not occur. PID Enabled Freq Cmd PID Output PID Pre-load Value PID Pre-load Value > 0 22B-UM001.book Page 7 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 152. F-8 PID Set Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E PID Gains The proportional, integral, and differential gains make up the PID regulator. • A134 [PID Prop Gain] The proportional gain (unitless) affects how the regulator reacts to the magnitude of the error. The proportional component of the PID regulator outputs a speed command proportional to the PID error. For example, a proportional gain of 1 would output 100% of max frequency when the PID error is 100% of the analog input range. A larger value for [PID Prop Gain] makes the proportional component more responsive, and a smaller value makes it less responsive. Setting [PID Prop Gain] to 0.00 disables the proportional component of the PID loop. • A135 [PID Integ Time] The integral gain (units of seconds) affects how the regulator reacts to error over time and is used to get rid of steady state error. For example, with an integral gain of 2 seconds, the output of the integral gain component would integrate up to 100% of max frequency when the PID error is 100% for 2 seconds. A larger value for [PID Integ Time] makes the integral component less responsive, and a smaller value makes it more responsive. Setting [PID Integ Time] to 0 disables the integral component of the PID loop. • A136 [PID Diff Rate] The Differential gain (units of 1/seconds) affects the rate of change of the PID output. The differential gain is multiplied by the difference between the previous error and current error. Thus, with a large error the D has a large effect and with a small error the D has less of an effect. This parameter is scaled so that when it is set to 1.00, the process response is 0.1% of [Maximum Freq] when the process error is changing at 1% / second. A larger value for [PID Diff Rate] makes the differential term have more of an effect and a small value makes it have less of an effect. In many applications, the D gain is not needed. Setting [PID Diff Rate] to 0.00 (factory default) disables the differential component of the PID loop. 22B-UM001.book Page 8 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 153. PID Set Up F-9 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Guidelines for Adjusting the PID Gains 1. Adjust the proportional gain. During this step it may be desirable to disable the integral gain and differential gain by setting them to 0. After a step change in the PID Feedback: – If the response is too slow increase A134 [PID Prop Gain]. – If the response is too quick and/or unstable (see Figure F.1), decrease A134 [PID Prop Gain]. – Typically, A134 [PID Prop Gain] is set to some value below the point where the PID begins to go unstable. 2. Adjust the integral gain (leave the proportional gain set as in Step 1). After a step change in the PID Feedback: – If the response is too slow (see Figure F.2), or the PID Feedback does not become equal to the PID Reference, decrease A135 [PID Integ Time]. – If there is a lot of oscillation in the PID Feedback before settling out (see Figure F.3), increase A135 [PID Integ Time]. 3. At this point, the differential gain may not be needed. However, if after determining the values for A134 [PID Prop Gain] and A135 [PID Integ Time]: – Response is still slow after a step change, increase A136 [PID Diff Rate]. – Response is still unstable, decrease A136 [PID Diff Rate]. 22B-UM001.book Page 9 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 154. F-10 PID Set Up PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E The following figures show some typical responses of the PID loop at different points during adjustment of the PID Gains. Figure F.1 Unstable Figure F.2 Slow Response – Over Damped Figure F.3 Oscillation – Under Damped Figure F.4 Good Response – Critically Damped PID Feedback PID Reference Time PID Feedback PID Reference Time PID Feedback PID Reference Time PID Feedback PID Reference Time 22B-UM001.book Page 10 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 155. PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Index A AC Supply Ground, 1-7 Source, 1-5 Ungrounded, 1-5 Acceleration Rate, 1-24 Advanced Program Group Parameters, 3-14 Ambient Temperatures, 1-3 Analog Input Loss Fault, F29, 4-3 Armored Cable, 1-10 Auto Rstrt Tries Fault, F33, 4-4 Auxiliary Input Fault, F2, 4-3 B Before Applying Power, 2-1 Bus Capacitors, Discharging, P-3, 1-2 C Cable Length, 1-15 Cable, Power, 1-10 Capacitors, Discharging, P-3, 1-2 Catalog Number Explanation, P-4 CE Conformity, 1-25 Checklist, Start-Up, 2-1 Circuit Breakers, 1-8 Comm Loss Fault, F81, 4-4 Command Sources for Start and Speed, 1-23 Common Symptoms and Corrective Action, 4-5 Contactors, 1-14 Control Wiring, 1-16 Control, 2 and 3 Wire, 1-18 Conventions, Manual, P-2 Cover, Opening, 1-1 Cross Reference, Parameter by Name, 3-45 D Data, Diagnostic, 2-7 Data, Saving, 2-7 Deceleration Rate, 1-24 Dimensions Drive, B-7 Minimum Clearances, 1-3 Direction of Drive, 2-2 of Motor, 1-13 Discharging Bus Capacitors, P-3, 1-2 Disconnecting Output Power, 1-12 Display, 2-4 Display Group Parameters, 3-3 Distribution Systems, Ungrounded, 1-5 Drive Frame Size, P-2, B-7 Drive Grounding, 1-7 Drive Overload Fault, F64, 4-4 Drive Ratings, P-4, A-1 DriveExecutive, 3-1 DriveExplorer, 3-1 E Earthing, see Grounding Edit Parameters, 2-5 EMC/RFI Grounding, Filter, 1-8 Interference, 1-25 Enclosure Rating, Changing, 1-3 ESD, Static Discharge, P-3 F Faults Analog Input Loss, F29, 4-3 Auto Rstrt Tries, F33, 4-4 Auxiliary Input, F2, 4-3 Comm Loss, F81, 4-4 Drive Overload, F64, 4-4 Ground Fault, F13, 4-3 Heatsink OvrTmp, F8, 4-3 HW OverCurrent, F12, 4-3 I/O Board Fail, F122, 4-5 Motor Overload, F7, 4-3 Motor Stalled, F6, 4-3 Net Loss, F71, 4-4 OverVoltage, F5, 4-3 Parameter Checksum, F100, 4-5 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 156. Index-2 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Params Defaulted, F48, 4-4 Phase Short, F41-F43, 4-4 Phase to Ground Short, F38-F40, 4-4 Power Loss, F3, 4-3 Power Unit, F70, 4-4 SVC Autotune, F80, 4-4 SW OverCurrent, F63, 4-4 UnderVoltage, F4, 4-3 File Monitor, 3-3 Filter, RFI, 1-8 Frame Designations, P-2, A-1, B-7 Fuses Minimum Recommendations, 1-8 Ratings, A-1 G General Precautions, P-3 Ground Fault, F13, 4-3 Grounding Filter, 1-8 General, 1-7 H Heatsink OvrTmp Fault, F8, 4-3 HW OverCurrent Fault, F12, 4-3 I I/O Block Diagram, 1-16 Terminal Block, 1-15 Terminal Designations, 1-17 Wiring, 1-14 Wiring Examples, 1-18 Wiring Multiple Drives, 1-22 I/O Board Fail Fault, F122, 4-5 Input Contactor, 1-14 Input Fusing, 1-8 Input Potentiometer, 1-18 Input Power Conditioning, 1-6 Installation of Drive, 1-1 Integral Keypad, 2-4 Interference, EMC/RFI, 1-25 IP66 Installations, 1-14 K Keypad, 2-4 L LEDs, 2-4 M Menu Structure, 2-6 Minimum Clearances, 1-3 Monitor File, 3-3 Motor Cable Length, 1-12 Changing Forward Direction of, 1-13 Disconnect, 1-12 Motor Overload Fault, F7, 4-3 Motor Stalled Fault, F6, 4-3 Motor Starter, Bulletin 140M, 1-8 Mounting Options and Clearances, 1-3 MOV Jumper Location and Removal, 1-5 N NEMA/UL Type 4X Installations, 1-14 Net Loss Fault, F71, 4-4 O Opening the Drive Cover, 1-1 Operating Temperatures, 1-3 Operator Interface, 2-4 Output Disconnect, 1-12 OverVoltage Fault, F5, 4-3 P Parameter Descriptions, 3-1 Types, 3-1 Viewing and Editing, 2-5, 2-6 Parameter Checksum Fault, F100, 4-5 Parameter Cross Reference by Name, 3-45 Parameters Advanced Program Group, 3-14 Display Group, 3-3 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 157. Index-3 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Program Group, 3-9 Params Defaulted Fault, F48, 4-4 PE Ground, 1-7 Phase Short Fault, F41-F43, 4-4 Phase to Ground Fault, F38-F40, 4-4 Potentiometer, Wiring, 1-18 Power Cables and Wiring, 1-10 Power Conditioning, 1-6 Power Loss Fault, F3, 4-3 Power Unit Fault, F70, 4-4 Powering Up the Drive, 2-1 Precautions, General, P-3 Preferences, Setting, 2-7 Product Selection, B-1 Program Group Parameters, 3-9 Programming, 3-1 PTC Analog Input Wiring, 1-18 R Ratings, A-1 Reflective Wave Protection, 1-12 Removing Cover, 1-1 Repeated Start/Stop, 1-14 Repeated Start/Stop Precautions, 1-14 RFI, see EMC/RFI RWR (Reflective Wave Reducer), 1-12 S Safety Ground, 1-7 Saving Data, Viewing, 2-7 Setting Preferences, 2-7 Shielded Power Cables, 1-10 Short Circuit Protection, 1-8 Sink/Source, 1-17 Software, 3-1 Speed, Control of, 2-2 Start and Speed Reference Selection and Control, 1-23 Start/Stop Drive, 2-2 Motor, 1-14 Starting/Stopping, The Motor, 1-14 Start-Up Checklist, 2-1 Static Discharge, ESD, P-3 Status LEDs, 2-4 Supply Source, AC, 1-5 SVC Autotune Fault, F80, 4-4 SW OverCurrent Fault, F63, 4-4 System Grounding, 1-7 T Terminal Block I/O, 1-15 Power, 1-13 Three Wire Control, 1-18 Two Wire Control, 1-18 U UnderVoltage Fault, F4, 4-3 Ungrounded Supply, 1-5 Unshielded Power Cables, 1-10 W Watts Loss, A-5 Wiring, 1-1 Block Diagram, 1-16 Examples, 1-18 I/O Terminal Descriptions, 1-17 Potentiometer, 1-18 Power, 1-10 PTC Example, 1-18 Recommendations, 1-14 22B-UM001.book Page 3 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 158. Index-4 PowerFlex 40 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive FRN 1.xx - 6.xx User Manual Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E Notes: 22B-UM001.book Page 4 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 159. 22B-UM001.book Page 1 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM
  • 160. U.S. Allen-Bradley DrivesTechnical Support Tel: (1) 262.512.8176, Fax: (1) 262.512.2222, Email: support@drives.ra.rockwell.com, Online: www.ab.com/support/abdrives Publication 22B-UM001H-EN-E – June 2013 Supersedes 22B-UM001G-EN-E - August 2008 Copyright © 2013 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. www.rockwellautomation.com Americas:Rockwell Automation,1201 South Second Street,Milwaukee,WI 53204-2496 USA,Tel:(1) 414.382.2000,Fax:(1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa:Rockwell Automation,Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36,1170 Brussels,Belgium,Tel:(32) 2 663 0600,Fax:(32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific:Rockwell Automation,Level 14,Core F,Cyberport 3,100 Cyberport Road,Hong Kong,Tel:(852) 2887 4788,Fax:(852) 2508 1846 Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters 22B-UM001.book Page 2 Wednesday, January 22, 2014 11:04 AM